菩提故事注释巴利
Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā
现在,在两部分别之后,想要开始解释已纳入结集、为大品和小品所收摄的犍度的含义,于是就说了“二部巴帝摩卡”等话。其中,“二部巴帝摩卡”就是指二部巴帝摩卡分别。这里用“巴帝摩卡”这个词,不加区分地把它们的分别一并包括了。“他们结集了犍度”这句话,是与上文的衔接。“犍度”就是诸蕴的聚合,或者因为能开示、说明诸蕴,所以叫“犍度”。这里说的“蕴”,指的是出家、受达上等被称为律行之事的规定,以及被称为应作、不应作的学处的规定。因为出家等是世尊所制定的,所以叫“制立”。在“制立”这个意思上,也能看到“蕴”字的用法,比如“木蕴”“火蕴”等。另外,这里“部分、集聚”的意思也完全说得通,因为这些规定正是按部分和集聚来分别的。“通达犍度者”,就是按制立的部分、集聚义来说,通达蕴义的人。巴利
Idāni ubhatovibhaṅgānantaraṃ saṅgahamāropitassa mahāvaggacūḷavaggasaṅgahitassa khandhakassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ ārabhitukāmo ‘‘ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhānanti ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhavibhaṅgānaṃ. Pātimokkhaggahaṇena hettha tesaṃ vibhaṅgo abhedena gahito. Yaṃ khandhakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti sambandho. Khandhānaṃ samūho khandhako, khandhānaṃ vā pakāsanato dīpanato khandhako. ‘‘Khandhā’’ti cettha pabbajjupasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandhasaddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho aggikkhandho’’tiādīsu viya. Apica bhāgarāsaṭṭhatāpettha yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato rāsito ca vibhattattā. Khandhakovidāti paññattibhāgarāsaṭṭhavasena khandhaṭṭhe kovidā.
在《分别论》中,那些词的意义已经由那些注释方式阐明,应当这样连接起来理解。如果我们要把那些注释方式再说一遍,那就是:如果我们要把那些注释方式再说一遍。或者也可以这样连接:在《分别论》中,那些词的那些意义已经在前面阐明了,如果我们要把那些意义再说一遍,应当这样连接。在这种情况下,“hi”这个字应当看作只是用来补足音节的虚词。“结尾”指的是注释的结束。“那些意义既浅显易懂”,指的是那些意义即使之前没有阐明,也是浅显易懂、并不深奥的。巴利
Padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ atthā yehi aṭṭhakathānayehi pakāsitāti yojetabbaṃ. Te ce puna vadeyyāmāti te ce aṭṭhakathānaye punapi vadeyyāma. Atha vā padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ ye atthā heṭṭhā pakāsitā, te ce atthe puna vadeyyāmāti yojetabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pakkhe hi-saddo padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Pariyosānanti saṃvaṇṇanāpariyosānaṃ. Uttānā ceva ye atthāti ye atthā pubbe apakāsitāpi uttānā agambhīrā.
1 这里没有特别的因缘。也就是说,不像“那时,具寿舍利弗长老心中生起了作为请求制定学处之因的思惟,就在那时……”等所说的因缘那样,这里没有特别的因缘。“这个说法”就是指“那时”这个表述。那么,说这句话有什么用意呢?意思是:如果没有特别的因缘,说这句话有什么用意?应当接上“显示因缘就是它的用意”。为了阐明这一点,才说了“因为世尊所……”等话。巴利
1.Visesakāraṇaṃ natthīti ‘‘yena samayena āyasmato sāriputtattherassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūto parivitakko udapādi, tena samayenā’’tiādinā vuttakāraṇaṃ viya idha visesakāraṇaṃ natthi. Ayamabhilāpoti ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti ayamabhilāpo. Kiṃ panetassa vacane payojananti yadi visesakāraṇaṃ natthi, etassa vacane kiṃ payojananti adhippāyo. Nidānadassanaṃ payojananti yojetabbaṃ. Tameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yā hi bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
大沙岸就像大沙岸一样,意思是:因为堆积了大量沙子,所以就像巨大的沙岸。因此说:“意思是在巨大的沙堆中。” uru、maru、sikatā、vālukā、vaṇṇu、vālikā 这些词意思相同,只是字面写法不同。因此说:“uru 就叫做沙。”巴利
Mahāvelā viya mahāvelā, vipulavālukapuñjatāya mahanto velātaṭo viyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘mahante vālikarāsimhīti attho’’ti. Uru maru sikatā vālukā vaṇṇu vālikāti ime saddā samānatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘urūti vālikā vuccatī’’ti.
从这以后——巴利
Ito paṭṭhāya ca –
因为诸经文的义理已经作了简略注释;
所以,我们要来说明它们的含义。巴利
Yasmā suttantapāḷīnaṃ, attho saṅkhepavaṇṇito; Tasmā mayaṃ karissāma, tāsaṃ atthassa dīpanaṃ.
“Najjā”:“流动、奔流者”就是河(nadī),它的“najjā”就是河、向下奔流者的意思。“Nerañjarāyā”本来应该说成“nelañjalāyā”,但把 la 音变成了 ra 音,所以说成“nerañjarāyā”,意思是水质没有泥泞、水草、苔藓等过失。有些人说:“本来应该说‘nīlaṃjalāyā’,却说成了‘nerañjarāyā’。”或者应当知道,这只是那条河的名字。为了显示世尊住在那条河的岸边,所以说“在菩提树下”。“菩提”一词,在“菩提称为四道中的智”(《小部·犀牛角经释义》121)里,指的是道智为菩提;在“得菩提、最胜广慧者”(《长部》3.217)里,指的是一切知智。世尊在这里证得了这两种菩提,所以那棵树也得到了“菩提树”这个名字。或者,世尊以七觉支而觉悟,所以是“菩提”。因为他觉悟时那棵树为觉者所依止,所以那棵树得名“菩提树”。不过,注释书为了只从一部分来显示义理,才说了“菩提称为四道中的智”等话。“Mūle”意思是附近。“Paṭhamābhisambuddho”是省略鼻音的说法,所以说“最初现等觉”。“Paṭhamaṃ”是中性词作副词用,因此这里的关联应当理解为:他现等觉之后,最初住在菩提树下。巴利
Najjāti (udā. aṭṭha. 1) nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti attho. Nerañjarāyāti ‘‘nelañjalāyā’’ti vattabbe la-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālapaṇakādidosarahitasalilāyāti attho. Keci ‘‘nīlaṃjalāyāti vattabbe nerañjarāyāti vutta’’nti vadanti, nāmameva vā etaṃ tassā nadiyāti veditabbaṃ. Tassā nadiyā tīre yattha bhagavā vihāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷava. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) ettha maggañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuttaṃ, ‘‘pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tadubhayampi bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi ‘‘bodhirukkho’’tveva nāmaṃ labhi. Atha vā satta bojjhaṅge bujjhatīti bhagavā bodhi. Tena bujjhantena sannissitattā so rukkho ‘‘bodhirukkho’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ekadeseneva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mūleti samīpe. Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti anunāsikalopenāyaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho’’ti. Paṭhamanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, tasmā abhisambuddho hutvā sabbapaṭhamaṃ bodhirukkhamūle viharatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo.
那时,世尊这句话里,atha要理解为在那时,因为不变词有多种含义。意思是:在他成为正自觉者之后,住在菩提树下的时候,就是那时。所以《优陀那》(优陀那2)里说:“那时,世尊以单盘坐姿坐了七天,感受解脱之乐。”或者,atha这个不变词在这里是之后的意思,因此要理解为正自觉之后。kho是填充词语的虚词。七日就是satta ahāni。这里是表示持续关联的业格。因为世尊在那七天里,不间断地、持续地安住在果等至之乐中,所以按照持续关联的用法,说sattāhaṃ这个业格。以单盘坐姿:从卫塞月满月日、太阳还没落山时,以不败的盘坐坐在金刚座上那一刻起,一次也没有起身,就以最初盘好的那一个坐姿坐着。巴利
Athakho bhagavāti ettha athāti tasmiṃ samayeti evamattho gahetabbo anekatthattā nipātānaṃ, yasmiṃ samaye abhisambuddho hutvā bodhirukkhamūle viharati, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Teneva udānapāḷiyaṃ (udā. 2) ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti vuttaṃ. Athāti vā pacchāti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto, tasmā abhisambodhito pacchāti evamattho gahetabbo. Khoti padapūraṇe nipāto. Satta ahāni sattāhaṃ. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ nirantaratāya accantameva phalasamāpattisukhena vihāsi, tasmā ‘‘sattāha’’nti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkenāti visākhapuṇṇamāya anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye aparājitapallaṅkavasena vajirāsane nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena.
感受解脱乐这一句里,这里指的是五种解脱——即彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断、出离解脱——当中被称为安息断解脱的世尊的果解脱,所以说“正在感受解脱乐,也就是果等至乐”。而“解脱”是指由于随烦恼已经平息,心处于解脱的状态;或者也可以理解为,心本身就是那样解脱的。由这种解脱所生起的乐,或者与这种解脱相应的乐,就是解脱乐。依据“尊者,世尊在寂静乐中所说的那个舍”这句话,在这里舍也应该理解为乐。正如《迷惑冰消》中所说:“然而,舍因为是寂静的,所以也被说为乐。”因为世尊入的是第四禅的阿拉汉果等至,而不是别的。或者,像“它们的寂止是乐”等处所说的那样,正如诸行苦的寂止被称为“乐”,同样,由于在最高果位中获得的一切烦恼苦寂止的状态,在这里,安息断解脱本身就应该理解为“乐”。巴利
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti ettha tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīsu pañcasu paṭippassaddhivimuttisaṅkhātā bhagavato phalavimutti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno’’ti. Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cittassa vimuttabhāvo, cittameva vā tathā vimuttaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāya vimuttiyā jātaṃ, sampayuttaṃ vā sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, upekkhā sante sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) vacanato upekkhāpi cettha sukhamicceva veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti. Bhagavā hi catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na itaraṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.221, 272) yathā saṅkhāradukkhavūpasamo ‘‘sukho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ sakalakilesadukkhūpasamabhāvato aggaphale labbhamānā paṭippassaddhivimutti eva idha ‘‘sukha’’nti veditabbā.
“atha”这个词表示“另外、再者”的意思,“kho”只是用来补足音节的虚词。这里用“atha”的“另外”这个意思,是为了指出一个不同于感受解脱乐的主题。那这个主题是什么呢?就是对缘起的作意。“rattiyā”是表示部分与整体关系的属格。“paṭhamaṃ”是表示完全投入关系的业格。因为世尊在那个夜晚的整个初夜分,都完全投入在那种作意里。巴利
Athāti adhikāratthe nipāto, khoti padapūraṇe. Tesu adhikāratthena ‘‘athā’’ti iminā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanato aññaṃ adhikāraṃ dasseti. Ko panesoti? Paṭiccasamauppādamanasikāro. Rattiyāti avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Paṭhamanti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ . Bhagavā hi tassā rattiyā sakalampi paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ teneva manasikārena yutto ahosīti.
“缘相”指的是无明等作为缘的法。“缘”的意思是:面向、朝向,也就是不排斥因缘条件的聚合。而“面向、朝向”本身,就是缘作为因缘条件聚合的一部分,使果得以生起。“不排斥”的意思则是:如果离开那因缘条件的聚合,不成为其中的一部分,它自己就不能生起。由此显示了因的众多性,因为这里是以无明等每一个单独的因作为代表,指出了整个因的集合。“俱时”的意思是:聚合在一起,不可分离。因为无明等作为缘的法,正是在彼此聚合、不可分离地运作的诸法中,使果生起。由此显示了缘所生法的众多性。通过这两方面,就阐明了“一因不能单独生果”等道理。因为在这里,从一个因不会产生一个单独的果,也不会产生多个果;从多个因也不会产生一个单独的果;只有从多个因才会产生多个果。正如可以观察到,从地、水、火、风、种子等众多因,产生出颜色、香气、味道、芽等众多果。至于“以无明为缘有诸行,以行为缘有识”这类逐一说明单一因与果的说法,其用意并不在此。巴利
Paccayākāranti avijjādipaccayadhammaṃ. Paṭiccāti paṭimukhaṃ gantvā, kāraṇasāmaggiṃ apaṭikkhipitvāti attho. Paṭimukhagamanañca paccayassa kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvena phalassa uppādanameva. Apaṭikkhipitvāti pana vinā tāya kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvaṃ agantvā sayameva na uppādetīti attho. Etena kāraṇabahutā dassitā. Avijjādiekekahetusīsena hi hetusamūho niddiṭṭho. Sahiteti samudite, avinibbhutteti attho. Avijjādiko hi paccayadhammo sahiteyeva aññamaññaṃ avinibbhogavuttidhamme uppādeti. Iminā paccayuppannadhammabahutā dassitā. Ubhayenapi ‘‘ekaṃ na ekato’’tiādinayo (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; visuddhi. 2.617) dīpito hoti. Ekato hi kāraṇato na idha kiñci ekaṃ phalamatthi, na anekaṃ, nāpi anekehi kāraṇehi ekaṃ, anekehi pana kāraṇehi anekameva hoti. Tathā hi anekehi utupathavībījasalilasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi anekameva rūpagandharasādiaṅkurasaṅkhātaṃ phalamuppajjamānaṃ dissati. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ekekahetuphaladīpanaṃ kataṃ, tattha payojanaṃ na vijjati.
世尊有时因为某个因是最主要的,有时因为某个因最明显,有时因为某个因不共通,也会根据说法的善巧以及所教化众生的根机,只说明一个因或一个果。比如“以触为缘而有受”,就只说了同一个因和同一个果。因为触是受的主要因,受是依触而确定的;受也是触的主要果,触是依受而确定的。又如“由痰引起的疾病”,这是从明显性来说只讲了一个因,因为在这里痰很明显,不是业等。又如“诸比丘,任何不善法,全都以不如理作意为根本”,这是从不共通性来说只讲了一个因。因为不如理作意是不善法不共通的因,而所依、所缘等则是共通的。因此,在这里,虽然所依、所缘、俱生法等其他能造作诸行的因也存在,但无明仍然是它们的因,因为它是主要因——就像经中说“随观滋味的人,渴爱增长”,以及“无明集起则漏集起”——无明也是其他像渴爱等行因的因;又因为明显——“诸比丘,无知的人、被无明笼罩的人,也会造作福行”;还因为不共通——所以应当知道,无明是以作为诸行之因的方式被说明的。这样,在一切地方说明每一个单独的因和果时,都应按照具体情况类推。因此,古德们说:巴利
Bhagavā hi katthaci padhānattā katthaci pākaṭattā katthaci asādhāraṇattā desanāvilāsassa ca veneyyānañca anurūpato ekameva hetuṃ vā phalaṃ vā dīpeti. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi ekameva hetuṃ phalañcāha. Phasso hi vedanāya padhānahetu yathāphassaṃ vedanāvavatthānato. Vedanā ca phassassa padhānaphalaṃ yathāvedanaṃ phassavavatthānato. ‘‘Semhasamuṭṭhānā ābādhā’’ti (mahāni. 5) pākaṭattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Pākaṭo hi ettha semho, na kammādayo. ‘‘Ye keci, bhikkhave, akusalā dhammā, sabbete ayonisomanasikāramūlakā’’ti asādhāraṇattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Asādhāraṇo hi ayonisomanasikāro akusalānaṃ, sādhāraṇāni vatthārammaṇādīnīti. Tasmā avijjā tāvettha vijjamānesupi aññesu vatthārammaṇasahajātadhammādīsu saṅkhārakāraṇesu ‘‘assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) ca ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.104) ca vacanato aññesampi taṇhādīnaṃ saṅkhārahetūnaṃ hetūti padhānattā, ‘‘avidvā, bhikkhave, avijjāgato puññābhisaṅkhārampi abhisaṅkharotī’’ti pākaṭattā asādhāraṇattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ sabbattha ekekahetuphaladīpane yathāsambhavaṃ nayo netabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 在这里,一个并不从单一产生,多个也不从多个产生,也不是一个;
有果,也有单独说明一因一果的意义。”巴利
‘‘Ekaṃ na ekato idha, nānekamanekatopi no ekaṃ; Phalamatthi atthi pana eka-hetuphaladīpane attho’’ti.
“值得被了知,所以叫缘(paṭicca)。”因为,凡是了知它、通达它的人,它必定导向苦的完全止息。“正确且一起生起”,所以叫起(samuppāda)。因为缘法在生起自己的果时,是完整地生起,而不是残缺地生起;并且它所生起的那些法,是全部一起生起,不是一个一个地生起。因此,它既是缘,又是起,所以叫缘起——这里应当这样理解它的含义。“广说”是指对缘起这个词解释的详细展开。我们因为怕太冗长,这里就不展示了;同样,后面将要说的广说也不展示。“顺逆”是中性名词的表达方式,就像“日月不正运行”等说法中的用法一样。“那个”就是指那个缘相。或者,“依前面所说方式所说”是指依照“以无明为缘,有诸行”等方式所说的缘相。“于流转”是指在轮回中的流转。“作意”的意思是:任何一个缘法对任何一个缘所生法,以任何方式——比如因缘等——作为缘而成为缘,对于这一切,以不颠倒、无遗漏、毫无剩余地观察的方式,在心中作了意。巴利
Paccetumarahatīti paṭicco. Yo hi naṃ pacceti abhisameti, tassa accantameva dukkhavūpasamāya saṃvattati. Sammā saha ca uppādetīti samuppādo. Paccayadhammo hi attano phalaṃ uppādento sampuṇṇameva uppādeti, na vikalaṃ. Ye ca dhamme uppādeti, te sabbe saheva uppādeti, na ekekaṃ. Iti paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Vitthāroti paṭiccasamuppādapadavaṇṇanāpapañco. Mayampi taṃ atipapañcabhayā idha na dassayissāma, evaṃ parato vakkhamānampi vitthāraṃ. Anulomapaṭilomanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Svevāti so eva paccayākāro. Purimanayena vā vuttoti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto paccayākāro. Pavattiyāti saṃsārappavattiyā. Manasi akāsīti yo yo paccayadhammo yassa yassa paccayuppannadhammassa yathā yathā hetupaccayādinā paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ aviparītaṃ aparihāpetvā anavasesato paccavekkhaṇavasena citte akāsīti attho.
在“无明缘”等说法里,无明是这样得名的:对不该做的身恶行等却去经历、去承受,所以叫无明;对该做的身善行等不去经历、不去承受,所以叫无明;让诸法的真实本性变得不被了知,所以叫无明;让众生在无始的轮回和诸有中狂奔,所以叫无明;在不存在的东西上狂奔,在存在的东西上不狂奔,所以叫无明;或者,是明的对立面,所以叫无明。应当知道,它按“对苦无知”等说法分为四种。缘,是指依它才有果生起和持续,不是没有它果也能来;或者,缘是资助的意思。无明既是那个缘,又是缘本身,所以叫无明缘;因此说“以无明为缘”。行,就是造作,指世间的善思和不善思。应当知道,它们按福行、非福行、不动行分为三种。识,就是了知,按世间异熟识来分有三十二种。名,就是朝向,指受等三蕴。色,就是变坏,指四大种色以及眼等所造色。处,就是来至,也指令轮回之苦延长,所以叫处。触,就是接触。受,就是感受。这二者按门来分各有六种,按异熟来取则有三十二种。渴爱,就是渴望、热望,它按欲渴爱等简略说有三种,详细说有一百零八种。取,就是执取,它按欲取等有四种。巴利
Avijjāpaccayātiādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 225; visuddhi. 2.586-587; udā. aṭṭha. 1) avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre bhavādīsu satte javāpetīti avijjā, avijjamānesu javati, vijjamānesu na javatīti avijjā, vijjāpaṭipakkhāti vā avijjā. Sā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā catubbidhā veditabbā. Paṭicca naṃ na vinā phalaṃ eti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti paccayo, upakāraṭṭho vā paccayo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo , tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā, lokiyā kusalākusalacetanā. Te puññāpuññāneñcābhisaṅkhāravasena tividhā veditabbā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇavasena bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, bhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādiupādārūpañca. Āyatanti, āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Idampi dvayaṃ dvāravasena chabbidhaṃ, vipākavasena gahaṇe bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Tassati paritassatīti taṇhā, sā kāmataṇhādivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato aṭṭhasatavidhā ca. Upādiyatīti upādānaṃ, taṃ kāmupādānādivasaena catubbidhaṃ.
有,并且能使之有,所以叫“有”。它按业有和生有两种分类,分为两类。产生,就是生。衰老,就是老。依它而死,就是死。忧愁,就是愁。悲泣,就是悲。令人痛苦,就是苦;或者,依生起和住立的两种方式而损害,所以是苦。心不悦的状态,就是忧。强烈的苦恼,就是恼。生起,就是产生。而且不只是和愁等词搭配,应当把“生起”这个词和所有词都连接起来。这样,就显示了“以无明为缘,行生起”等关于缘和缘生法的确定。因此说:“以无明为缘,行生起——应当以这个方法理解所有词句的意义。”如是,此……生起,在这里意思是:“如是”是对上述方法的指示,借此说明只是以无明等为因,而不是以大自在天所造等为因。“此”,指前面所说的。“纯”,指不混杂的,或者全部的。“苦蕴”,指苦的聚集,不是指有情,也不是指乐、净等。“生起”,就是产生、发生。巴利
Bhavati bhāvayati cāti bhavo, so kammopapattibhedato duvidho. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti tenāti maraṇaṃ. Socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ. Uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvedhā khanatīti vā dukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīheva, atha kho sabbapadehi ‘‘sambhavantī’’ti padassa yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo’’ti. Evametassa…pe… samudayo hotīti ettha pana ayamattho. Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ. Tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa nāpi subhasukhādīnaṃ. Samudayo hotīti nibbatti sambhavati.
彻底地、完全地从诸行离染,因此称为“离”;也就是圣道。所以(注释者)说“以名为离的道”。所谓“无余灭”,就是没有剩余的灭。“无余”的意思是不留残余、不留余迹,所以称为灭、称为断除;换言之,这是依随眠的断除,以最上的道彻底根除无明,这就是它的含义。虽然较低的道所断的无明同样是以彻底根除的方式断除的,但那毕竟不是毫无残余地断除。因为,导致堕入恶趣的无明由第一道断除;同样,那作为仅仅一次于此世受生、以及于一切非圣者之地受生之因缘的无明,则依次由第二道、第三道断除,而不是由其他道断除;只有通过阿拉汉道,它才毫无残余地被断除。无生灭,就是一切诸行毫无残余地无生灭。因为,由下面三道,有些行灭了,有些行没有灭,这是因为无明还有残余的灭;而由最上的道,由于它的无余灭,没有任何行不灭。如此灭尽,就是依这样的无生灭而灭尽。“纯”这个词,既有毫无残余的意思,如“纯一摩揭陀国”等;也有不混杂的意思,如“纯娑罗”等。因此,它表达了两种含义:“全部的,或者纯净的”。其中,“全部的”就是毫无残余的、一切有等所包含的。“无有情的”,就是远离他人所假想的命者。巴利
Accantameva saṅkhārehi virajjati etenāti virāgo, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘virāgasaṅkhātena maggenā’’ti. Asesaṃ nirodhā asesanirodhā, asesetvā nissesetvā nirodhā samucchindanā anusayappahānavasena aggamaggena avijjāya accantasamugghātatoti attho. Yadipi heṭṭhimamaggehipi pahīyamānā avijjā accantasamugghātavaseneva pahīyati, tathāpi na anavasesato pahīyati. Apāyagamanīyā hi avijjā paṭhamamaggena pahīyati, tathā sakideva imasmiṃ loke sabbattha ca anariyabhūmiyaṃ upapattiyā paccayabhūtā avijjā yathākkamaṃ dutiyatatiyamaggehi pahīyati, na itarāti, arahattamaggeneva pana sā anavasesaṃ pahīyatīti. Anuppādanirodho hotīti sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Heṭṭhimena hi maggattayena keci saṅkhārā nirujjhanti, keci na nirujjhanti avijjāya sāvasesanirodhā, aggamaggena panassā anavasesanirodhā na keci saṅkhārā na nirujjhantīti. Evaṃ niruddhānanti evaṃ anuppādanirodhena niruddhānaṃ. Kevala-saddo niravasesavācako ca hoti ‘‘kevalā aṅgamagadhā’’tiādīsu. Asammissavācako ca ‘‘kevalā sālayo’’tiādīsu. Tasmā ubhayathāpi atthaṃ vadati ‘‘sakalassa, suddhassa vā’’ti. Tattha sakalassāti anavasesassa sabbabhavādigatassa. Sattavirahitassāti paraparikappitajīvarahitassa.
不过在这里,单凭“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭”这一句,就已经说明了一切苦蕴毫无残余地灭尽。尽管如此,这里仍然说了“无明缘行……集起”,这是为了显示顺观中的道理:某某缘法存在时,某某缘生法就不灭而持续生起。同样,这里说“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭,识灭则名色灭……苦蕴灭”,则是为了从反面显示:某某缘不存在时,某某缘生法就灭尽而不再生起。这并不像顺观那样,是为了显示涵盖三世的苦蕴之灭。因为这里所要表达的,只是未来本会生起的苦蕴——它在未修圣道时将会生起,而通过修习圣道使它灭去。这个差别也应该知道。巴利
Apicettha kiñcāpi ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’ti ettāvatāpi sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa anavasesato nirodho vutto hoti, tathāpi yathā anulome yassa yassa paccayadhammassa atthitāya yo yo paccayuppannadhammo na nirujjhati pavattati evāti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tappaṭipakkhato tassa tassa paccayassa abhāve so so paccayuppannadhammo nirujjhati na pavattatīti dassanatthaṃ idha ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana anulome viya kālattayapariyāpannassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhadassanatthaṃ. Anāgatasseva hi ariyamaggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahassa dukkhakkhandhassa ariyamaggabhāvanāya nirodho icchitoti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
在这里,“Yadā have”当中的“have”是一个小品词,在这个意义上是“确实”的意思。不过有些人说,“have”的意思是“在战斗、在战场上”,因为《法句经》第40颂说“应以智慧之武器战胜魔罗”,所以他们的意思是:那是指与烦恼魔作战的时候。所谓“以所缘近伺为相”,就是具有所缘近伺的本质。所谓“以特相近伺为相”,这里道理也一样。其中,“所缘近伺”指的是八种等至,因为它们近伺于所缘的遍相。“特相近伺”指的是观、道、果。观近伺于三相,所以是特相近伺;道成办由观所带来的任务,所以是特相近伺;果近伺于如实之相——灭谛,所以是特相近伺。“No kallo pañho”就是“此问不合宜”,意思是“这是劣问”。以“ādi”一词……巴利
Yadā haveti ettha haveti byattanti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Keci pana ‘‘haveti āhave yuddhe’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, ‘‘yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhenā’’ti (dha. pa. 40) hi vacanato kilesamārena yujjhanasamayeti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānasabhāvena. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma aṭṭha samāpattiyo kasiṇārammaṇassa upanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma vipassanāmaggaphalāni. Vipassanā hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, maggo vipassanāya āgatakiccaṃ sādhetīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho, duppañho esoti attho. Ādisaddena –
我不说“触者”。如果我说“触者”,那么问“尊者,是谁在触?”才是合适的问题。但我不这样说。对于不这样说的我,如果有人问“尊者,触以什么为条件?”,这才是合适的问题。对此合适的回答是:“以六处为条件而有触,以触为条件而有受。” “尊者,是谁在感受?”世尊说:“这个问题不合适。” 我不说“感受者”。如果我说“感受者”,那么问“尊者,是谁在感受?”才是合适的问题。但我不这样说。对于不这样说的我,如果有人问“尊者,受以什么为条件?”,这才是合适的问题。对此合适的回答是:“以触为条件而有受,以受为条件而有渴爱。”巴利
‘‘Phusatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi. Phusatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi, evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, phasso’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā’ti. Ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatīti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avoca, vedayatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi, vedayatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi. Evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, vedanā’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.12) –
像这样,就涵盖了其余经文的说法。巴利
Evamādiṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
这里“以等起及方法”中的“等”字,涵盖了像“尊者,什么是生?而这是谁的生?世尊说:‘这个问题不合适。’”这样的内容。那么,这里问“尊者,什么是老死”,难道不是问得很好吗?虽然问得好,但就像在价值十万金的黄金盘子里盛满美食,却在上面放了一团枣核大小的粪便,所有美食就都变成了劣食、该被丢掉一样,同样地,由于“而这是谁的老死”这句执著有情的邪见,就像那团粪便,使得这个善问也变成了劣问。巴利
Ādinā ca nayenāti ettha ādi-saddena pana ‘‘katamā nu kho, bhante, jāti, kassa ca panāyaṃ jātīti. ‘No kallo pañho’ti bhagavā avocā’’ti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nanu cettha ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.35) idaṃ supucchitanti? Kiñcāpi supucchitaṃ, yathā pana satasahassagghanake suvaṇṇathālake vaḍḍhitassa subhojanassa matthake āmalakamatte gūthapiṇḍe ṭhapite sabbaṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ hoti chaḍḍetabbaṃ, evameva ‘‘kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti iminā sattūpaladdhivādapadena gūthapiṇḍena taṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ viya ayampi sabbo duppañho jātoti.
十六种疑,就是:“我在过去世存在吗?不存在吗?曾是什么?是怎样存在的?曾经是什么,又变成了什么?我在过去世……我在未来世将会存在吗?将不存在吗?将会是什么?将会怎样存在?将会是什么,又变成什么?我在未来世……我现在存在吗?不存在吗?是什么?怎样存在?这个众生从哪里来?他将要去哪里?”像这样,涉及过去、未来、现在三种对象的十六种疑惑。巴利
Soḷasa kaṅkhāti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kathaṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, ahaṃ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṃ nu khosmi, kathaṃ nu khosmi, ayaṃ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20; ma. ni. 1.18) evamāgatā atītānāgatapaccuppannavisayā soḷasavidhā kaṅkhā.
在这里,“我过去存在吗?不存在吗?”这种疑惑,是依靠常见(认为过去自我恒常存在)和无因生起(认为过去自我偶然出现)这两种看法,对过去自我的存在与不存在产生怀疑。至于它的原因是什么,则不必追问。因为愚痴的凡夫就像疯子一样,行为毫无规律。而且,这里的原因就是不如理作意。那么,不如理作意的原因又是什么呢?就是凡夫性本身,或者没有见过圣者等。难道凡夫也能如理作意吗?谁说过他们“不作意”呢?不过,在那种情况下,凡夫性并不是原因,听闻正法、亲近善友等才是那里的原因。因为鱼肉等本身并不香,但通过加工,也可以变得香。巴利
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.18; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.20) ahosiṃ nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati, kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano yathā tathā vā pavattati. Apica ayonisomanasikāroyevettha kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ ayonisomanasikārassa pana kiṃ kāraṇanti? Sveva puthujjanabhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanādīni vā. Nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotīti. Ko vā evamāha ‘‘na manasi karotī’’ti. Na pana tattha puthujjanabhāvo kāraṇaṃ, saddhammasavanakalyāṇamittādīni tattha kāraṇāni . Na hi macchamaṃsādīni attano pakatiyā sugandhāni, abhisaṅkhārapaccayā pana sugandhānipi honti.
我曾经是什么?——这是依靠出生、性别和投生之处而产生的疑惑:我曾经是刹帝利吗?还是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者,或者天、人当中的某一种?巴利
Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati.
“我究竟是怎样存在的?”——这是依形体相貌生起的疑惑:“我曾经是高个子吗?是矮个子、白皮肤、黑皮肤、有量、无量等等当中的哪一种吗?”不过有些人说:“这是依自在天所造等,从原因上疑惑:‘我究竟是由于什么原因而存在的?’”巴利
Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakaṇhappamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādiṃ nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosi’nti hetuto kaṅkhatī’’ti vadanti.
“成为什么之后又成了什么?”这是依出身等而对自己前后相续生起的疑惑:“我曾是刹帝利而后成为婆罗门吗?……乃至……曾是天人而后成为人吗?”不过,在所有这些场合中,“addhāna”一词都是时间的同义词,而且应当理解为处格意义上使用了业格。巴利
Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manusso’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我会存在吗?还是不会存在呢?这是依止常见之相和断灭之相,对未来自己的存在或不存在产生疑惑。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Bhavissāmi nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
“我究竟是不是存在呢?”——这是对自己是否存在产生怀疑。那么,“这合理吗?”合理还是不合理,在这里有什么好想的呢?不过,这里也有人举出这样一个例子:据说,小母的儿子是秃头,大母的儿子不是秃头。他们把睡着的那个(大母的儿子)剃了头。他起来后想:“我是小母的儿子吗?”就这样,产生了“我究竟是不是存在呢?”的怀疑。巴利
Ahaṃnu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti, cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo. Taṃ suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ. So uṭṭhāya ‘‘ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya putto’’ti cintesi. Evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhā hoti.
“我难道不存在吗?”——他这样怀疑自己不存在。这里也有一个事例:据说,有一个人抓鱼时,因为在水里站久了,大腿变得冰凉,他以为是“鱼”,就打了下去。另一个人在坟场旁边守田,因为害怕而蜷缩着睡下。他醒来后,把自己的膝盖当成“两个夜叉”,就打了下去。像这样,就是“我难道不存在吗?”的怀疑。巴利
No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ ‘‘maccho’’ti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi. So paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni ‘‘dve yakkhā’’ti cintetvā pahari, evaṃ ‘‘no nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhati.
“我到底是什么呢?”——明明是刹帝利,却怀疑自己的刹帝利身份,就像迦尔纳自认为是车夫之子一样。其余种姓也是如此。不过,身为天人却不知道自己是天人的情况,是不存在的。但天人也会以“我是有色的还是无色的?”这样的方式产生疑惑。那为什么刹帝利等不知道自己是谁呢?因为他们对自己在各个家族中的出生并没有直接的认知。在家众中,像波咤厘等人,也会误以为自己是出家众;出家众也会以“我的业是否有过失?”这样的方式,误以为自己是在家众。人类中也有一些人,像某些国王一样,误以为自己是天人。巴利
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī. Esa nayo sesesu. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce? Appaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca pātalikādayo pabbajitasaññino. Pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca ekacce rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti.
“我是怎样的呢?”这一句的解释方式跟前面一样。不过这里要这样理解:先执取“身体内部有一个叫做命者的东西”,然后依着它的形状样貌起疑惑:“我是长的吗?还是短的、方的、六角的、八角的、十六角的等等当中的某一种?”这就是在疑惑“我是怎样的呢?”。然而,对当下身体的形状,没有人是不知道的。巴利
Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañhettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu khosmi, rassacaturassachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāro’’ti kaṅkhanto ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi.
他从哪里来?又将去往哪里?他这样对自身的来处和去处生起疑惑。巴利
Kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhati.
Vapayanti 就是 viapayanti,这里是把 i 省略了的说法。说的就是 byapayanti。因此说 vapayanti apagacchanti,意思是消散、离去。而离去是就尚未生起的灭尽而言,所以说 nirujjhanti,即灭尽。巴利
Vapayantīti viapayanti, ikāralopenāyaṃ niddeso. Byapayantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘vapayanti apagacchantī’’ti. Apagamanañca anuppattinirodhavasenāti āha ‘‘nirujjhantī’’ti.
3 那么,菩提分法和四圣谛法什么时候显现、生起、变得清楚呢?是在观智和道智运作的时候。其中,先说观智阶段:与观智相应的念等法以及观智本身,各自按照适合的方式,在各自的所缘上,以彼分断的方式舍弃净想等,依身随观等分别生起。而在道刹那,它们缘取涅槃,以正断的方式舍弃对立面,在四圣谛中以无痴通达的方式,仅一时生起。应当知道,这里菩提分法是以“生起”之义为“显现”。至于四圣谛法:世间圣谛在观刹那,以作为观的所缘而显现;出世间圣谛在道刹那,以彼决意、以灭谛为所缘而证悟、以一切圣谛的作用证悟的方式而显现,所以应以“阐明”之义理解其“显现”。巴利
3. Kadā panassa bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsantīti? Vipassanāmaggañāṇesu pavattamānesu. Tattha vipassanāñāṇe tāva vipassanāñāṇasampayuttā satiādayo vipassanāñāṇañca yathārahaṃ attano attano visayesu tadaṅgappahānavasena subhasaññādike pajahantā kāyānupassanādivasena visuṃ visuṃ uppajjanti. Maggakkhaṇe pana te nibbānamālambitvā samucchedavasena paṭipakkhe pajahantā catūsupi ariyasaccesu asammohapaṭivedhasādhanavasena sakideva uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāvettha bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo. Ariyasaccadhammānaṃ pana lokiyānaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokuttarānaṃ tadadhimuttatāvasena maggakkhaṇe nirodhasaccassa ārammaṇābhisamayavasena sabbesampi kiccābhisamayavasena pākaṭabhāvato pakāsanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
世尊虽然已经以一切方式,让一切法在自己的智慧中清清楚楚地显现,但因为他致力于依缘起之门而观修,缘起的行相又极其精深、极其难见,所以他在审察了这缘起的行相之后,生起强有力的欢喜,就在这里宣说了优陀那——这优陀那既彰显自己证悟的威力,也一并显示了对立面的彻底断除。巴利
Iti bhagavā satipi sabbākārena sabbadhammānaṃ attano ñāṇassa pākaṭabhāve paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa katattā nipuṇagambhīrasududdasatāya paccayākārassa taṃ paccavekkhitvā uppannabalavasomanasso paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena saddhiṃ attano tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakamevettha udānaṃ udānesi.
以“欲是你的第一军”等这样一类方式所说的那种,就是魔军:巴利
‘‘Kāmāte paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenanti –
欲是你的第一支军,第二支叫做不乐。
第三是你的饥渴,第四被称为渴爱。
第五为昏沉睡眠,第六称为怖畏;
第七是疑,覆和顽固是第八。
得到、名声、恭敬,以及通过不正当手段得来的名望;
谁抬高自己、贬低别人,
“ 这就是你的军队,魔罗,黑暗魔的攻击军;
不勇猛的人胜不了它,战胜了就能得到快乐。”巴利
‘‘Kāmā te paṭhamā senā, dutiyā arati vuccati; Tatiyā khuppipāsā te, catutthī taṇhā pavuccati. ‘‘Pañcamī thinamiddhaṃ te, chaṭṭhā bhīrū pavuccati; Sattamī vicikicchā te, makkho thambho ca aṭṭhamā. ‘‘Lābho siloko sakkāro, micchāladdho ca yo yaso; Yo cattānaṃ samukkaṃse, pare ca avajānati. ‘‘Esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī; Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukha’’nti. (su. ni. 438-441; mahāni. 28) –
按照这个方法,就说明了上面所说的那种魔军。巴利
Iminā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ.
在这里,因为最初那些在家人被烦恼欲在种种感官欲乐中迷惑,而战胜了烦恼欲、进入出家状态的人,在偏远的坐卧处,或在对种种殊胜善法的修习中,会生起不乐。这也说过:“贤友,对出家者来说,喜乐是难以做到的。”因此,他们因为生活依赖他人,被饥渴所逼迫;被饥渴逼迫时,寻求的渴爱使心疲惫;心疲惫之后,昏沉睡眠就侵入他们;接着,那些没有得到殊胜成就的人,住在难以安住的山林旷野坐卧处时,心中生起恐惧,变得怯懦;他们疑神疑鬼,长久以来未能品尝远离之乐而安住,于是在修行路上生起疑惑:“这条路莫非不存在?”消除彼后而住者,因为一点点殊胜的证得,就生起傲慢、抹恩(覆)和固执;亦消除彼等后而住者,又依止更高的殊胜证得,于是利得、恭敬和名声就出现了;耽著于利得等的人,宣说像法一样的东西,得到邪的名声,安住其中,以出身等抬高自己、贬低他人。因此,应当知道欲等是(魔军的)第一支队伍等。巴利
Tattha (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.439-41; mahāni. aṭṭha. 28) yasmā āditova agāriyabhūte satte vatthukāmesu kilesakāmā mohayanti, te abhibhuyya anagāriyabhāvaṃ upagatānaṃ pantesu vā senāsanesu aññataraññataresu vā adhikusalesu dhammesu arati uppajjati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘pabbajitena kho, āvuso, abhirati dukkarā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.331). Tato te parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā khuppipāsā bādhati, tāya bādhitānaṃ pariyesana taṇhā cittaṃ kilamayati, atha nesaṃ kilantacittānaṃ thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, tato visesamanadhigacchantānaṃ durabhisambhavesu araññavanapatthesu senāsanesu viharataṃ utrāsasaññitā bhīru jāyati, tesaṃ ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitānaṃ dīgharattaṃ vivekarasamanassādayamānānaṃ viharataṃ ‘‘na siyā nu kho esa maggo’’ti paṭipattiyaṃ vicikicchā uppajjati, taṃ vinodetvā viharataṃ appamattakena visesādhigamena mānamakkhathambhā jāyanti, tepi vinodetvā viharataṃ tato adhikataraṃ visesādhigamaṃ nissāya lābhasakkārasilokā uppajjanti, lābhādimucchitā dhammapatirūpakāni pakāsentā micchāyasaṃ adhigantvā tattha ṭhitā jātiādīhi attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti paraṃ vambhenti, tasmā kāmādīnaṃ paṭhamasenādibhāvo veditabbo.
像这样指出十种军队之后,由于它具备黑暗法,能帮助黑暗的那摩奇,所以在指明“这是你的军队”时,说:“那摩奇,这是你的军队,是黑暗的,能摧破。”其中,“能摧破”是指杀害、击倒沙门和婆罗门,也就是制造障碍的意思。“非懦夫能战胜它,战胜后则得安乐”:意思是,你这支军队,顾惜身体和生命的懦夫不能战胜,勇者却能战胜,战胜后就能证得道乐和果乐。“那位也是婆罗门”:意思是,那位也是漏尽的婆罗门。巴利
Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ senaṃ uddisitvā yasmā sā kaṇhadhammasamannāgatattā kaṇhassa namucino upakārāya saṃvattati, tasmā naṃ ‘‘tava senā’’ti niddisantena ‘‘esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha abhippahārinīti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ghātanī nippothanī, antarāyakarīti attho. Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukhanti evaṃ tava senaṃ asūro kāye ca jīvite ca sāpekkho puriso na jināti, sūro pana jināti, jetvā ca maggasukhaṃ phalasukhañca adhigacchatīti attho. Sopi brāhmaṇoti sopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo.
现在,为了说明《优陀那》里这段话——“那时,世尊以盘腿坐姿坐了整整七天,体验着解脱的快乐。过了这七天,世尊从那个定中起来,在初夜时分,好好地把缘起顺着作意;在中夜时分,好好地把缘起逆着作意;在后夜时分,好好地把缘起顺逆两方面都作意”——跟这部《犍度》的经文并不矛盾,所以接着开始说“但在《优陀那》中”等等。
这里“依彼之力”,是指依着了知缘起的方式以及证得缘灭的力量。“每一部分”,是指在顺观和逆观中各一部分。“在隔夜如是作意”,是指在夜里的三个时段中,只是顺逆地作意。
据说,世尊除了在宝屋那七天之外,在其余六个七天里,时不时地省察法,大多数时候都安住在体验解脱的快乐中;但在宝屋那七天里,则纯粹以阿毗达摩的推究而安住。因此,意思是:在那些由于省察法而时不时生起作意的情况下,针对隔夜所生起的作意,在这部《犍度》经文里才那样说。巴利
Idāni ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī. Atha kho bhagavā tassa sattāhassa accayena tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsi. Rattiyā majjhimaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭilomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsi. Rattiyā pacchimaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsī’’ti evaṃ vuttāya udānapāḷiyā (udā. 1) imissā ca khandhakapāḷiyā avirodhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘udāne panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ettha tassa vasenāti tassa paccayākārapajānanassa paccayakkhayādhigamassa ca vasena. Ekekameva koṭṭhāsanti anulomapaṭilomesu ekekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ. Pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasākāsīti rattiyā tīsupi yāmesu anulomapaṭilomaṃyeva manasākāsi. Bhagavā kira ṭhapetvā ratanagharasattāhaṃ sesesu chasu sattāhesu antarantarā dhammaṃ paccavekkhitvā yebhuyyena vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī vihāsi, ratanagharasattāhe pana abhidhammapavicayavaseneva vihāsi. Tasmā antarantarā dhammapaccavekkhaṇavasena uppāditamanasikāresu pāṭipadarattiyā uppāditaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāya imissaṃ khandhakapāḷiyaṃ evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo.
牧羊人故事注释巴利
Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā
4 “那七日过后”是指结跏趺坐的七日过去之后。“从那个定中出来”是指从阿拉汉果等至的定中,按照时限出定。“还有其他能成佛的法”是指从毗舍佉月满日开始,日日夜夜如此成为恒常等持之因的佛陀功德之上,还有其他能成就佛果的法。“这是佛”——为了向他人显示佛的体性,是否存在着这样的法呢?这是文句的连接方式。“某些天人”是指那些已经证得道、现证灭、以一部分了知佛德的天人,除了他们以外的其他天人。“以不眨眼”是指因为法喜洋溢而显现净信,眼睑不动,没有眨眼。“宝经行处”是指天人们所建造的宝石经行处。也有人说:“因为在那里以七部论藏之宝和无上法宝作为思惟对象,那个地方就成为名叫宝屋的支提。”因此,《殊胜义论》中说:“所谓宝屋,并不是宝石所造的屋子,而是思惟七部论藏的地方,应当理解为宝屋。”巴利
4.Tassa sattāhassa accayenāti pallaṅkasattāhassa apagamanena. Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvāti tato arahattaphalasamāpattisamādhito yathākālaparicchedaṃ vuṭṭhahitvā. Aññepi buddhattakarāti visākhapuṇṇamito paṭṭhāya rattindivaṃ evaṃ niccasamāhitabhāvahetubhūtānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ upari aññepi buddhattasādhakā. ‘‘Ayaṃ buddho’’ti buddhabhāvassa paresaṃ vibhāvanā dhammā kiṃ nu kho santīti yojanā. Ekaccānaṃ devatānanti yā adhigatamaggā sacchikatanirodhā ekapadesena buddhaguṇe jānanti, tā ṭhapetvā tadaññāsaṃ devatānaṃ. Animisehīti dhammapītivipphāravasena pasādavibhāvaniccaladalatāya nimesarahitehi. Ratanacaṅkameti devatāhi māpite ratanamayacaṅkame. ‘‘Ratanabhūtānaṃ sattannaṃ pakaraṇānaṃ tattha ca anuttarassa dhammaratanassa sammasanena taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jāta’’ntipi vadanti. Teneva aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ‘‘ratanagharaṃ nāma na ratanamayaṃ gehaṃ, sattannaṃ pana pakaraṇānaṃ sammasitaṭṭhānaṃ ratanagharanti veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
这棵树为什么叫牧羊人榕树呢?所以接着就说“据说……”等等。不过有些人说:“因为那些没法在那里诵习吠陀的年老婆罗门,在那里建了有围墙环绕的住所,全都住在那里,所以这棵树就得名叫牧羊人榕树。”这里的词义是:不诵习的人就叫ajapā,意思是不念诵咒语的人。这些ajapā在这里居住、安住,所以叫ajapāla。另一些人则说:“因为到了正午时分,山羊进入树荫下,这棵树用自己的阴影保护、守护它们,所以这棵树就惯常叫做牧羊人。”不管怎样,这都是那棵树的名字。巴利
Kasmā panāyaṃ ajapālanigrodho nāma jātoti āha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā tattha vede sajjhāyituṃ asamatthā mahallakabrāhmaṇā pākāraparikkhepayuttāni nivesanāni katvā sabbe vasiṃsu, tasmāssa ‘ajapālanigrodho’ti nāmaṃ jāta’’nti vadanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – na japantīti ajapā, mantānaṃ anajjhāyakāti attho. Ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthāti ajapāloti. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘yasmā majjhanhike samaye anto paviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāleti rakkhati, tasmā ‘ajapālo’tissa nāmaṃ ruḷha’’nti. Sabbathāpi nāmametaṃ tassa rukkhassa.
“体验解脱乐”说的是:就在推究法的时候,间或也在体验解脱乐。或者,这里应该采用“推究法并体验解脱乐”这样的读法,因为《优陀那注》里也是这个读法。这里“推究法”是指这样思惟阿毗达摩的理趣:先是名为《法集论》的论,接着是《分别论》《界论》《人施设论》《论事》《双论》,然后是名为《大论》的《发趣论》。在那里,当心进入微细之处时,喜生起了;喜生起后,血液变得清净;血液清净后,皮肤变得清净;皮肤清净后,从身体前侧放出像楼阁那么大的光芒,跃入空中,像六牙象群一样,跃向东方无量的轮围世界。从身体后侧放出,跃向西方;从右肩放出,跃向南方;从左肩放出,跃向北方,都是无量轮围世界。从脚底放出珊瑚芽色的光芒,穿透大地,把水分开,劈开风层,跃入无碍的虚空。从头顶升起像旋转的宝珠鬘一样的蓝色光带,穿透六欲天,越过九梵天,跃入无碍的虚空。那一天,无量轮围世界里的无量众生全都变成了金色。而且据说,从那天世尊身上放出的光芒,直到今天还在照向无量的世界。不只是在这七天里推究法时,光芒从身体放出;在宝屋的七天里思惟《发趣论》时,也同样有光芒从身体放出,应当这样理解。巴利
Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoti dhammaṃ vicinantoyeva antarantarā vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento. ‘‘Dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento’’ti evaṃ vā ettha pāṭho gahetabbo. Udānaṭṭhakathāyampi (udā. aṭṭha. 4) hi ayameva pāṭho. Dhammaṃ vicinanto cettha evaṃ abhidhamme nayamaggaṃ sammasi paṭhamaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇīpakaraṇaṃ nāma, tato vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathāpakaraṇaṃ, puggalapaññattippakaraṇaṃ, kathāvatthuṃ nāma, yamakaṃ nāma, tato mahāpakaraṇaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti. Tatthassa saṇhasukhumaṭṭhānamhi citte otiṇṇe pīti uppajji, pītiyā uppannāya lohitaṃ pasīdi, lohite pasanne chavi pasīdi, chaviyā pasannāya puratthimakāyato kūṭāgārādippamāṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā ākāse pakkhandaṃ chaddantanāgakulaṃ viya pācīnadisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pacchimakāyato uṭṭhahitvā pacchimadisāya, dakkhiṇaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇadisāya, vāmaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā uttaradisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pādatalehi pavāḷaṅkuravaṇṇā rasmiyo nikkhamitvā mahāpathaviṃ vinibbijjha udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā vātakkhandhaṃ padāletvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Sīsato saṃparivattiyamānaṃ maṇidāmaṃ viya nīlavaṇṇarasmivaṭṭi uṭṭhahitvā cha devaloke vinivijjhitvā nava brahmaloke atikkamma ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Tasmiṃ divase aparimāṇesu cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇā sattā sabbe suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva ahesuṃ. Taṃ divasañca pana bhagavato sarīrā nikkhantā yāvajjadivasāpi kira tā rasmiyo anantalokadhātuyo gacchantiyeva. Na kevalañca imasmiṃyeva sattāhe dhammaṃ vicinantassa sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, atha kho ratanagharasattāhepi paṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa evameva sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhantā evāti veditabbaṃ.
这句话在《法集论注》的缘起部分中已经说过了。巴利
Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) –
在这二十一天里,没有一天有光芒从世尊的身体放出来。不过,在第四个七天,世尊坐在西北方的宝屋中。在那里,即使他正在思择《法集论》,也没有光芒从身体放出。思择《分别论》《界论》《人施设论》《论事》《双论》时,光芒也没有放出。可是,当他降入《大论》,开始思择“因缘、所缘缘……不离去缘”时,也就是当他思择二十四缘的全面发趣时,一切知智才终于在《大论》中得到了机会。就像巨大的提弥罗频伽罗鱼只有在八万四千由旬深的大海里才能得到活动空间一样,一切知智也只有在《大论》中才终于得到了机会。巴利
‘‘Imesu ca ekavīsatiyā divasesu ekadivasepi satthu sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā, catutthe pana sattāhe pacchimuttarāya disāya ratanaghare nisīdi. Tattha dhammasaṅgaṇiṃ sammasantassapi sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathaṃ, puggalapaññattiṃ, kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ, yamakappakaraṇaṃ sammasantassapi rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Yadā pana mahāpakaraṇaṃ oruyha ‘hetupaccayo ārammaṇapaccayo…pe… avigatapaccayo’ti sammasanaṃ ārabhi, athassa catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa ekantato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ mahāpakaraṇe okāsaṃ labhi. Yathā hi timirapiṅgalamahāmaccho caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīre mahāsamuddeyeva okāsaṃ labhati, evameva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ekantato mahāpakaraṇeyeva okāsaṃ labhi.
世尊这样得到了机会,以一切知智随着自己的意愿思择微细精妙的法时,从身体放出了蓝、黄、红、白、茜草红、极光色六色光芒。从头发、胡须以及眼睛的蓝色部位放出蓝色光芒,凭借这些光芒,天空变得好像撒满了安阇那粉末,好像铺满了亚麻花和蓝莲花瓣,好像飞过的宝石扇子,又好像展开的深蓝布幔。从皮肤以及眼睛的黄色部位放出黄色光芒,凭借这些光芒,各方各处好像被金色液体浇灌,好像铺开了金色布匹,好像撒满了藏红花粉和迦尼迦罗花,光辉灿烂。从肌肉、血液以及眼睛的红色部位放出红色光芒,凭借这些光芒,各方各处好像被朱砂粉染红,好像被煮熟的虫胶汁浇灌,好像被红毯围裹,好像撒满了胜利须曼花、结缚婆迦花和班度耆婆花,光辉灿烂。从骨骼、牙齿以及眼睛的白色部位放出白色光芒,凭借这些光芒,各方各处好像从银壶中倾泻的乳汁流注遍布,好像铺开了银色的帐幕,好像飞过的银扇,好像覆盖了白茉莉、白睡莲、辛度婆罗花、须曼花、茉莉花等花朵,光辉灿烂。而茜草红和极光色光芒则从身体各个部位放出。这样,那六色光芒放出后,遍照了厚密的大地。巴利
‘‘Satthu evaṃ laddhokāsena sabbaññutaññāṇena yathāsukhaṃ saṇhasukhumadhammaṃ sammasantassa sarīrato nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu. Kesamassūhi ceva akkhīnañca nīlaṭṭhānehi nīlarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena gaganatalaṃ añjanacuṇṇasamokiṇṇaṃ viya umāpupphanīluppaladalasañchannaṃ viya vītipatantamaṇitālavaṇṭaṃ viya sampasāritamecakapaṭaṃ viya ca ahosi. Chavito ceva akkhīnañca pītaṭṭhānehi pītarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā suvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānā viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāritā viya kuṅkumacuṇṇakaṇikārapupphasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Maṃsalohitehi ceva akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhānehi lohitarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇarañjitā viya supakkalākhārasanisiñcamānā viya rattakambalaparikkhittā viya jayasumanapāribaddhakabandhujīvakakusumasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Aṭṭhīhi ceva dantehi ca akkhīnañca setaṭṭhānehi odātarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā rajatakuṭehi āsiñcamānakhīradhārāsamparikiṇṇā viya pasāritarajatapaṭavitānā viya vītipatantarajatatālavaṇṭā viya kundakumudasindhuvārasumanamallikādikusumasañchannā viya ca virociṃsu. Mañjiṭṭhapabhassarā pana tamhā tamhā sarīrappadesā nikkhamiṃsu. Iti tā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā ghanamahāpathaviṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
厚达二十四万由旬的大地,变得像一块精炼过的金块。光芒穿透大地之后,照到了下面的水。支撑大地的那层水厚达四十八万由旬,变得像从金壶里倒出来的熔化黄金。光芒穿透水之后,照到了风。风厚达九十六万由旬,变得像一根竖立的金柱。光芒穿透风之后,向下射入无碍的虚空。接着又向上腾升,照到了四大王天。穿透四大王天之后,照到了三十三天,接着是夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天,然后是九个梵天界,接着是广果天,再穿透五个净居天之后,照到了四无色界。穿透四无色界之后,射入了无碍的虚空。巴利
‘‘Catunahutādhikadviyojanasatasahassabahalā mahāpathavī niddhantasuvaṇṇapiṇḍi viya ahosi. Pathaviṃ bhinditvā heṭṭhā udakaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Pathavīsandhārakaṃ aṭṭhanahutādhikacatuyojanasatasahassabahalaṃ udakaṃ suvaṇṇakalasehi āsiñcamānavilīnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ahosi. Udakaṃ vinivijjhitvā vātaṃ aggahesuṃ. Channavutādhikanavayojanasatasahassabahalo vāto samussitasuvaṇṇakkhandho viya ahosi. Vātaṃ vinivijjhitvā heṭṭhā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Uparibhāgena uggantvāpi catumahārājike gaṇhiṃsu. Te vinivijjhitvā tāvatiṃse, tato yāme, tato tusite, tato nimmānaratī, tato paranimmitavasavattī, tato nava brahmaloke, tato vehapphale, tato pañca suddhāvāse vinivijjhitvā cattāro āruppe gaṇhiṃsu. Cattāro ca āruppe vinivijjhitvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu.
光芒向横向的无数世界界域射去。在那些地方,月亮上没有月光,太阳上没有日光,群星中没有星光,天人们的园林、宫殿、如意树、身体、饰物等一切处都没有光明。就连能遍照三千大千世界的大梵天王,在佛光面前也像日出时的萤火虫一样。月亮、太阳、星辰、天人、园林、宫殿、如意树,只还能看出一点轮廓而已。而这一大片区域,全都被佛光覆盖了。这并不是诸佛的决意神通,也不是修习所成的神通。而是当世间怙主观照微细深妙之法时,血液变得清净,依处色变得清净,肤色变得清净。由心等起的色法在周围约八十肘的范围内,安住不动。巴利
‘‘Tiriyabhāgehi anantā lokadhātuyo pakkhandiṃsu, ettake ṭhāne candamhi candappabhā natthi, sūriye sūriyappabhā natthi, tārakarūpesu tārakarūpappabhā natthi, devatānaṃ uyyānavimānakapparukkhesu sarīre ābharaṇesūti sabbattha pabhā natthi. Tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuyā ālokapharaṇasamattho mahābrahmāpi sūriyuggamane khajjopanako viya ahosi, candasūriyatārakarūpadevatuyyānavimānakapparukkhānaṃ paricchedamattakameva paññāyittha. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ buddharasmīhiyeva ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Ayañca neva buddhānaṃ adhiṭṭhāniddhi, na bhāvanāmayiddhi. Saṇhasukhumadhammaṃ pana sammasato lokanāthassa lohitaṃ pasīdi, vatthurūpaṃ pasīdi, chavivaṇṇo pasīdi. Cittasamuṭṭhānā vaṇṇadhātu samantā asītihatthamatte padese niccalā aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
从那样的定中出定之后,坐着。有一位婆罗门:指一个因名字和族姓都不为人所知、不出名的婆罗门。他一边发出“哼哼”声一边游走:指他看到一切不干净的东西后感到厌恶,一边发出“哼哼”声一边游走。说了以下的话:指说了现在要说的“怎样才算……”等话语。其中,“怎样才算”意为以什么为标准。“nu”是表示疑问的语气词,“kho”是填充音节的词。“bho”是婆罗门因出身而用的称呼。正如所说:“若他还有执著,他便被称为说bho的人。”
“乔达摩”:他以族姓称呼世尊。可是,这位婆罗门如果是现在才遇见的,怎么会知道世尊的族姓呢?他并不是现在才遇见的。在六年精勤修行期间,世尊曾与侍奉他的五比丘一起游方,后来舍弃那种苦行,在优楼频螺的将军村独自一人、没有伴侣地乞食时,这位婆罗门就曾见过他并与他交谈过。因此,他忆念起以前从五比丘那里听到的世尊的族姓,便以族姓称呼世尊为“乔达摩尊者”。或者说,自从世尊发起大出家,在阿诺玛河畔出家以来,他就如同月亮、太阳一般,以“沙门乔达摩”之名而广为人知,所以不必去追问他知道族姓的原因。“婆罗门形成”:指造就婆罗门,也就是成为婆罗门的意思。在这里,“怎样才算”是问那些使人成为婆罗门的法有多少;“哪些”则是问那些法的具体内容。巴利
Evaṃ nisinneti tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā nisinne. Eko brāhmaṇoti nāmagottavasena anabhiññāto apākaṭo eko brāhmaṇo. ‘‘Huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicaratīti sabbaṃ acokkhajātikaṃ passitvā jigucchanto ‘‘huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicarati. Etadavocāti (udā. aṭṭha. 4) etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha kittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena. Nu-ti saṃsayatthe nipāto, kho-ti padapūraṇe. Bho-ti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ brāhmaṇo sampati samāgato bhagavato gottaṃ jānātīti? Nāyaṃ sampati samāgato, chabbassāni padhānakaraṇakāle upaṭṭhahantehi pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ caramāno aparabhāge taṃ vataṃ chaḍḍetvā uruvelāyaṃ senanigame eko adutiyo hutvā piṇḍāya caramānopi tena brāhmaṇena diṭṭhapubbo ceva sallapitapubbo ca, tena so pubbe pañcavaggiyehi gayhamānaṃ bhagavato gottaṃ anussaranto ‘‘bho gotamā’’ti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Yato paṭṭhāya vā bhagavā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto anomānadītīre pabbaji, tato pabhuti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’ti cando viya sūriyo viya pākaṭo paññāto hoti, na ca tassa gottajānane kāraṇaṃ gavesitabbaṃ. Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti brāhmaṇaṃ karontīti brāhmaṇakaraṇā, brāhmaṇabhāvakarāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘kittāvatā’’ti etena yehi dhammehi brāhmaṇo hoti, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ parimāṇaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Katame’’ti pana iminā tesaṃ sarūpaṃ pucchati.
他说了优陀那,意思是:他说了“那位婆罗门……”这样的优陀那,但并没有为那位婆罗门说法。为什么?因为那位婆罗门不是能领受说法的根器。事实正是如此:那位婆罗门听了这首偈颂之后,并没有证得谛现观。就像这位一样,伍巴咖邪命外道听了对佛陀功德的宣扬之后,也是如此。因为在转法轮之前,世尊所说的话,即使别人听了,也像给德布萨和跋离咖授皈依那样,只成为习气层面的东西,而不是无学层面的,也不是决择层面的。这就是法性。知了边际:这里,“边际”指的是一切行的终结,也就是涅槃。这些增盛不存在:因为这一切已被彻底断除,所以不存在。巴利
Udānaṃ udānesīti ‘‘yo brāhmaṇo’’tiādikaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, na pana tassa brāhmaṇassa dhammaṃ desesi. Kasmā? Dhammadesanāya abhājanabhāvato. Tathā hi tassa brāhmaṇassa imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā na saccābhisamayo ahosi. Yathā ca imassa, evaṃ upakassa ājīvakassa buddhaguṇappakāsanaṃ sutvā. Dhammacakkappavattanato hi pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ paresaṃ suṇantānampi tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na asekkhabhāgiyaṃ vā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ vā. Esā hi dhammatāti. Vedehi vā antanti ettha antaṃ nāma sabbasaṅkhārapariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ. Ime ussadā natthīti sabbaso ime pahīnattā na santi.
目恰林达故事注释巴利
Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā
5 5. 在目恰林达树下:这里所说的“目恰林达”,指的是一种叫“尼波”的树,也叫“尼周罗”,意思是“在那棵树附近”。不过有些人说:“目遮罗是那棵树的名字,因为它在这片树林里最年长,所以叫目恰林达。”下雨:指一朵遍满整个轮围界内部的大云下起了雨。据说这样的云只在两种时候下雨:转轮王出现的时候,或者佛陀出现的时候。这里是在佛陀出现的时候下起了雨。生于莲池:莲池下方有龙宫,他就在那里出生。从自己的龙宫:指从他自己的龙宫。这样用蛇身缠绕:指用自己的身体缠绕世尊的身体七圈。在上方头顶展开大蛇冠:指在世尊头顶上方展开自己的大蛇冠。也有写成“作蛇冠”的版本,意思一样。巴利
5.Mucalindamūleti (udā. aṭṭha. 11) ettha mucalindo vuccati nīparukkho, yo ‘‘niculo’’tipi vuccati, tassa samīpeti attho. Keci pana ‘‘mucaloti tassa rukkhassa nāmaṃ, vanajeṭṭhakatāya pana mucalindoti vutta’’nti vadanti. Udapādīti sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūrento mahāmegho udapādi. Evarūpo kira megho dvīsuyeva kālesu vassati cakkavattimhi vā uppanne buddhe vā, idha buddhuppādakāle udapādi. Pokkharaṇiyā nibbattoti pokkharaṇiyā heṭṭhā nāgabhavanaṃ atthi, tattha nibbatto. Sakabhavanāti attano nāgabhavanato. Evaṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvāti satta vāre attano sarīrabhogehi bhagavato kāyaṃ parivāretvā. Uparimuddhani mahantaṃ phaṇaṃvihaccāti bhagavato muddhappadesassa upari attano mahantaṃ phaṇaṃ pasāretvā. ‘‘Phaṇaṃ karitvā’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
据说那位龙王当时这样想:世尊正坐在我住处附近的树根下,而这七日大雨又下个不停,应该给他提供一个住处。他虽然有能力化现出一座七宝宫殿,却想:这样做只是护住了外表,不算真正护持身体,我要亲自服侍十力者。于是他化出巨大的身躯,用蛇身把导师盘绕七圈,又在上面撑起蛇冠。这里说,他所环绕的内部空间,有铜殿中库房那么大。不过《中部注释》中说:巴利
Tassa kira nāgarājassa etadahosi ‘‘bhagavā ca mayhaṃ bhavanasamīpe rukkhamūle nisinno, ayañca sattāhavaddalikā vattati, vāsāgāramassa laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. So sattaratanamayaṃ pāsādaṃ nimminituṃ sakkontopi ‘‘evaṃ kate kāyasāro gahito na bhavissati, dasabalassa kāyaveyyāvaccaṃ karissāmī’’ti mahantaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā satthāraṃ sattakkhattuṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvā upari phaṇaṃ dhāresi. ‘‘Tassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ lohapāsāde bhaṇḍāgāragabbhappamāṇaṃ ahosī’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) pana –
龙王盘绕所围的内部空间,其下方有铁制殿堂那么大。龙王的心意是:“导师将以随他喜欢的姿势安住。”因此他围出了这么大的空间。中间铺设了宝座,上方悬着用金色星星装饰、缀满香花与香布的天盖,四角点着香油灯,四个方向都敞开,放着栴檀香盒。巴利
‘‘Parikkhepassa anto okāso heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo ahosi, ‘icchiticchitena iriyāpathena satthā viharissatī’ti nāgarājassa ajjhāsayo ahosi, tasmā evaṃ mahantaṃ okāsaṃ parikkhipi, majjhe ratanapallaṅko paññatto hoti, upari suvaṇṇatārakavicittaṃ samosaritagandhadāmakusumacelavitānaṃ ahosi, catūsu koṇesu gandhatelena dīpā jalitā, catūsu disāsu vivaritvā candanakaraṇḍakā ṭhapitā’’ti –
已宣说。所谓“将以自己想要的姿势安住”,这只是龙王心里的愿望罢了;而世尊就以原本坐着的姿势,度过了整整七天。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Icchiticchitena iriyāpathena viharissatīti ca nāgarājassa ajjhāsayamattametaṃ, bhagavā pana yathānisinnova sattāhaṃ vītināmesi.
虽然……但……在这里,有些人说:“提到热,是为了说明让蛇身缠绕的范围变得宽广的原因。因为如果那空间狭小,从龙王身体产生的热气就会困扰世尊;而通过把范围做得宽广,那样的热就不会造成困扰。”带有前缀的词,即使去掉前缀也能理解其含义,所以说“viddhaṃ就是ubbiddhaṃ”。而那种高远的状态,是通过远离烦恼而显得遥远,因此说“如云消散而远去”。像因陀罗尼蓝宝石一样闪耀、发光,所以叫“天”,也就是虚空。“知道”是指知道“现在虚空已经没有云,世尊没有寒冷等灾患”。“解开”是指移除。“自己的形态”是指自己的龙形。“收回”是指消失。“青年模样”是指童子的形态。巴利
Kiñcāpi…pe… cintetuṃ yuttanti ettha keci vadanti ‘‘uṇhaggahaṇaṃ bhogaparikkhepassa vipulabhāvakaraṇe kāraṇakittanaṃ. Khuddake hi tasmiṃ bhagavantaṃ nāgarājassa sarīrasambhūtā usmā bādheyya, vipulabhāvakaraṇena pana tādisaṃ mā uṇhaṃ bādhayitthā’’ti. Saupasaggapadassa attho upasaggena vināpi viññāyatīti āha ‘‘viddhanti ubbiddha’’nti, sā cassa ubbiddhatā upakkilesavigamena dūrabhāvena upaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘meghavigamena dūrībhūta’’nti. Indanīlamaṇi viya dibbati jotatīti devo, ākāso. Viditvāti ‘‘idāni vigatavalāhako ākāso, natthi bhagavato sītādiupaddavo’’ti ñatvā. Viniveṭhetvāti apanetvā. Attanorūpanti attano nāgarūpaṃ. Paṭisaṃharitvāti antaradhāpetvā. Māṇavakavaṇṇanti kumārakarūpaṃ.
明白了“这个意义”之后,就是说:已经完全知道“体验到远离之乐的人,无论在哪里都只有快乐”这个意义。他宣说了这首感兴语,即这首显示远离之乐力量的感兴语。听闻正法的人,就是正法声名远扬的人。因此说“显扬正法的人”。不动性,就是不被扰动的本性。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti ‘‘vivekasukhapaṭisaṃvedino yattha katthaci sukhameva hotī’’ti etaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārena jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ vivekasukhānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Sutadhammassāti vissutadhammassa. Tenāha ‘‘pakāsitadhammassā’’ti. Akuppanabhāvoti akuppanasabhāvo.
王处故事注释巴利
Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
6 奉上药诃子:不只是奉上药诃子,还奉上了齿木。对于“paccagghe”这个词,有些人不接受前面那种解释,所以阿阇梨护法长老说:“paccagghe,意思是新鲜的。有些人说,因为各自都很珍贵,所以叫paccagghe,这并不妥当,因为诸佛世尊并不接受或享用贵重之物。”巴利
6.Osadhaharītakaṃ upanesīti na kevalaṃ osadhaharītakameva, dantakaṭṭhampi upanesi. Paccaggheti ettha purimaṃ atthavikappaṃ keci na icchanti, teneva ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccaggheti abhinave. Paccekaṃ mahagghatāya paccaggheti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Na hi buddhā bhagavanto mahagghaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti paribhuñjanti vā’’ti.
梵天劝请故事注释巴利
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
7 “已习行、已正习行”的意思是:已经实行过,而且被实行者们正确地实行过。这里要说明的是:这种思惟确实在一切诸佛初成正觉时生起,这就是此处的法性。甚深的法,通过破除对立面就能变得很清楚;但破除对立面要依靠正确的修行,正确的修行又依赖于听闻正法,而听闻正法则取决于对师和法的净信。这种净信,尤其以对世间值得尊敬、值得重视者的希求为因。这样辗转相续,为了引导众生依法修行,梵天神的劝请就成了一个因缘。为了显示这一点,所以说“因梵天劝请而想说法”等话。巴利
7.Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti ācarito ceva ācarantehi ca sammadeva ācaritoti attho. Etena ayaṃ parivitakko sabbabuddhānaṃ paṭhamābhisambodhiyaṃ uppajjatevāti ayamettha dhammatāti dasseti. Gambhīropi dhammo paṭipakkhavidhamanena supākaṭo bhaveyya, paṭipakkhavidhamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammasavanādhīnā, taṃ satthari dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ. So visesato loke sambhāvanīyassa garukātabbassa abhipatthanāhetukoti paramparāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmuno yācanānimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyā’’tiādimāha.
“已证得”是指已经通达,以自觉智如实了知“这是苦”等,这就是它的意思。“法”是指四谛法,因为除了四谛之外,并没有另外需要通达的法。“甚深”是指像大海一样,除了那些已经积累并成熟了智慧资粮的人以外,其他人的智慧无法在其中找到立足处,就像用蚊子的嘴尖去测量大海一样。正因为甚深,所以难见,必须经过艰难才能见到,不可能轻轻松松就见到。凡是无法找到立足处者,因为无法深入,所以从自相和共相上都难以被见到,只有经过艰难才偶尔能见到。正因为难见,所以难觉,必须经过艰难才能觉悟,不可能轻轻松松就觉悟。连见都见不到,更不用说深入之后去觉悟了,因为觉悟本身就是很难的事。在这里应当引用经文:“比丘们,你们怎么想?什么更难行、更难成就?”巴利
Adhigatoti paṭividdho, sayambhūñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Dhammoti catusaccadhammo tabbinimuttassa paṭivijjhitabbadhammassa abhāvato. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho. Gambhīrattāva duddaso dukkhena daṭṭhabbo, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Yo hi alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho, so ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato ca visesato ca sukhena passituṃ na sakkā, atha kho kicchena kenaci kadācideva daṭṭhabbo. Duddasattāva duranubodho dukkhena avabujjhitabbo, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ. Yañhi daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anubujjhane kathā eva natthi avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) suttapadaṃ vattabbaṃ.
被称为“寂静”,是因为烦恼和诸行这些躁动不安的本质不存在,一切热恼都已止息,所以是寂静、涅槃;或者是因为以寂静为所缘,所以是寂静。在这里,灭谛是寂静的,又是所缘,所以是“寂静所缘”;道谛既是寂静,又是以寂静为所缘,所以也是“寂静所缘”。已达到殊胜的状态,所以是“微妙”。或者说“微妙”,就像美味的食物一样,因为不会让人感到厌足,所以是无厌足。在这里,正因为寂静和微妙,就应当理解其不混杂和无厌足。这两者只是针对出世间法而说的。“非思量所行境”,因为它是至上智慧的对象,所以不能靠思量去行、去深入,只能靠智慧去行。正因如此,它以极其精妙的智慧为行境,又具有微细的本质,所以是“微细”“微妙”。“唯智者所觉”,因为不是愚者的境界,只有真正修行正道的智者才能觉知。巴利
Santoti anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato vūpasantasabbapariḷāhatāya santo nibbuto, santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti paṇīto. Atha vā paṇītoti atittikaraṇaṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Santapaṇītabhāveneva cettha asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Idañhi dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacaroti uttamañāṇavisayattā takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabbo. Tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo saṇho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti bālānaṃ avisayattā sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi eva veditabbo.
众生执著于五种欲乐,因为它们是令人欢喜、应当亲近的对象,所以称为“执著处”,也就是五种欲乐。因此说:“众生执著于五种欲乐,所以它们被称为执著处。”这里,“执著于五种欲乐”就是亲近五种欲乐的意思。“这些”指的就是五种欲乐。“欢喜”就是获得快乐、嬉戏、玩耍。“执著”就是以欢喜的方式去亲近,所以叫“执著处”,也就是一百零八种渴爱的活动。欢喜于这些执著处,所以叫“欢喜执著处”——这里应当这样理解。因为这些众生,就像对欲乐一样,对贪爱也品味、欢喜。就像国王走进一座布置精美、花果繁茂的园林,对种种美好享受感到快乐,满心欢喜、兴高采烈,不觉得厌倦,到了傍晚也不想离开;同样,这些众生欢喜于欲执著和渴爱执著,在轮回中欢喜地住着,不觉得厌倦。因此,世尊把这两种执著比作园林来显示,说“欢喜执著处”等话。“欢喜”就是深深耽著。“极其欢喜”就是因为不厌倦而极度欢喜。巴利
Allīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena seviyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇāti āha ‘‘sattā pañcakāmaguṇe allīyanti, tasmā te ālayāti vuccantī’’ti. Tattha pañcakāmaguṇe allīyantīti pañcakāmaguṇe sevantīti attho. Teti pañca kāmaguṇā. Ramantīti ratiṃ vindanti kīḷanti laḷanti. Ālīyanti abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni, tehi ālayehi ramantīti ālayarāmāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ime hi sattā yathā kāmaguṇe, evaṃ rāgampi assādenti abhinandantiyeva. Yatheva hi susajjitapupphaphalabharitarukkhādisampannaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho rājā tāya tāya sampattiyā ramati, sammudito āmoditapamodito hoti, na ukkaṇṭhati, sāyampi nikkhamituṃ na icchati, evamimehi kāmālayataṇhālayehi sattā ramanti, saṃsāravaṭṭe sammoditā anukkaṇṭhitā vasanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā duvidhampi ālayaṃ uyyānabhūmiṃ viya dassento ‘‘ālayarāmā’’tiādimāha. Ratāti niratā. Suṭṭhu muditāti ativiya muditā anukkaṇṭhanato.
说到“处”这个词,是指“处”这个说法本身。但从义理上说,这里“处”所指的其实就是缘起。“果在这里安住,因为它依存于此而运作”,所以叫“处”,也就是作为诸行等之缘的无明等。“这些诸行等的缘”,就是“以此为缘”,指的正是无明等。“以此为缘”本身就是“以此为缘性”,就像“天人”本身就是“天神”一样。或者说,“以此为缘性”是指无明等这些“以此为缘”的法,依于自身的果而具有缘的性质,也就是具有令果生起的能力。这样一来,缘起就被显示为“具有有效缘用”这一特征。“果依此而生起”,所以叫“缘起”。通过这两个词,诸法的缘之义就被阐明了。“以此为缘性”和“缘起”,都是对作为诸行之缘的无明等的称呼。“一切行的止息”等,从义理上说,指的就是涅槃。因为依靠它、缘于它,对于圣道来说它成为所缘缘,所以一切行的动乱都止息、平息下来,因此称为“一切行的止息”。在远离一切有为法的涅槃中,与行的平息同义,这是合乎道理的。这里对它的词义解释是:一切行在这里止息,所以叫“一切行的止息”。巴利
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhānasaddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ṭhānanti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto . Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā devo eva devatā. Idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ paṭicca paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā. Tena samatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenapi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Saṅkhārādipaccayānañhi avijjādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ atthato nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti vuccati. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyutte hi nibbāne saṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo ñāyāgatoyevāti. Idaṃ panettha nibbacanaṃ – sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti.
因为依靠它,一切执取都通过彻底断除的方式被舍弃、被抛弃,一百零八种表现形式的全部渴爱都灭尽,一切烦恼贪染都离染,老死等所摄的一切轮回之苦都止息,所以称为“一切执取的弃舍、渴爱的灭尽、离染、止息”。而那个渴爱,因为在每一种生存中以对另一种生存的渴望状态而编织、缝合,或者说业与果报一起编织、缝合,所以称为“编织”。从那个编织中出离,就是涅槃。“疲劳”是指身体的疲劳。“苦恼”也只是身体的苦恼。但在佛陀心中,这两者都不存在,因为在菩提树下就已经彻底断除了。在这里应当知道,由于久坐、久说法等,以背部酸痛、上颚干燥等方式产生的身体疲劳和身体苦恼,这只是针对不了解说法意义的人和不修行的人而言。对于了解意义的人和修行的人来说,说法时导师的身体劳累也根本不算劳累,所以世尊说:“法的因缘不会让我苦恼。”正因为如此才说:“所谓对不了解者的说法,那才是我的疲劳。”巴利
Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā samucchedavasena pariccattā honti, aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā khīyanti, sabbe kilesarāgā virajjanti, jarāmaraṇādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā ‘‘sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho’’ti vuccati, yā panesā taṇhā tena tena bhavena bhavantaraṃ bhavanikantibhāvena vinati saṃsibbati, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatoti nibbānaṃ. Kilamathoti kāyakilamatho. Vihesāpi kāyavihesāyeva, citte pana ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā. Ettha ca ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca veditabbā, sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānañca appaṭipajjantānañca vasena. Jānantānaṃ pana paṭipajjantānañca desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova, tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesetī’’ti. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti.
“Apissu”这个词是表示总括的不变词。它说明:不只是生起了这个念头,这些偈颂也同时浮现在他心中。“Bhagavantanti”因为与“paṭi”这个词结合,表示所属关系,所以用宾格,因此说成“bhagavato”。已经达到增长成就的,既可以称为稀有,也可以称为不稀有。因为“a”这个字母也有增长的含义,比如“asekkhā dhammā”(无学之法)。应当知道:在四无数劫又十万劫中,为了与有天神的世界分享正法而圆满诸巴拉密、如今已证得法王的他,在这里所显示的不过是微不足道的事,因此这首偈颂的含义并不稀有;他的增长成就也应如此理解。从含义方面来说,这些偈颂并不稀有。“成为行境”就是现前、呈现;现前就是应当思惟,所以说“达到了应当思惟的状态”。巴利
Apissūti sampiṇḍanatthe nipāto. So na kevalaṃ etadahosi, imāpi gāthā paṭibhaṃsūti dīpeti. Bhagavantanti paṭisaddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti. Vuddhippattā acchariyā vā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi a-kāro hoti yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti. Kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni samadhigatadhammarajjassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanattā gāthātthassa anuacchariyatā tassa vuddhippatti ca veditabbā. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahaṃsu, upaṭṭhānañca vitakkayitabbatāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbabhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
“艰难”不是指苦行道。诸佛的四道其实都是乐行道。不过,这是就圆满巴拉密的时期来说的:那时菩萨还有贪嗔痴,对络绎不绝前来乞求的人,他割下装饰庄严的头,引出喉中鲜血,剜出涂过油的眼睛,把像家族明灯一样的儿子和举止可爱的妻子等施舍出去,又在像忍辱仙人等那些生中遭受割截等苦。这是就他一路走来的修行之道而说的。“Ha”是表示“确实”“明了”义的不变词。有人说是“决定”义。“Ha byattaṃ”或者“ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ”,意思是:如此艰难才证得的法,宣说也没有用,这样连接。“Halaṃ”或“alaṃ”,与此同义,就像“halanti vadāmi”等中那样。也有人读作“pakāsitaṃ”,意思是“已说”。因此,如此艰难证得的法,已经宣说、已经周遍宣说、已经开示,再说还有什么用?这就是所说的意思。“Rāgadosaparetehi”指被贪与嗔所触、所胜伏,就像被毒触到的蛇一样;或者说,指随贪嗔而行,被贪与嗔所追随。这是它的含义。巴利
Kicchenāti na dukkhappaṭipadāya. Buddhānañhi cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadāva honti. Pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatāgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa aññāni ca khantivādisadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ha-iti vā byattanti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Ekaṃsattheti keci. Ha byattaṃ ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigataṃ dhammaṃ desetunti yojanā. Halanti vā alanti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Pakāsita’’ntipi paṭhanti, desitanti attho. Evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa alaṃ desitaṃ pariyattaṃ desitaṃ, ko attho desitenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosaphuṭṭhehi, phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehīti attho. Atha vā rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosānugatehi, rāgena ca dosena ca anubandhehīti attho.
“逆流而行”是指:对执著恒常等想法逆流而上,也就是朝着无常、苦、无我、不净的方向趣入、运转,这就是四圣谛之法,意思是这样。“为贪所染”是指被欲贪、有贪和见贪所染污。“他们将不能见”是指他们不能以无常、苦、无我、不净这样的真实本质去看见;对那些看不见的人,谁能让他们以“无常”等本质如实地了知法呢?这就是这段话的意旨。由于他们还被贪和嗔所控制,处在愚痴的状态,所以说“被黑暗之蕴所覆盖”,意思是被无明之蕴彻底笼罩。巴利
Paṭisotagāminti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.65; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.281; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.172) niccagāhādīnaṃ paṭisotaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti evaṃ gataṃ pavattaṃ catusaccadhammanti attho. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgena bhavarāgena diṭṭhirāgena ca rattā. Na dakkhantīti aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti iminā sabhāvena na passissanti, te apassante ko sakkhissati aniccantiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhammaṃ jānāpetunti adhippāyo. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammuḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti, avijjārāsinā ajjhotthaṭāti attho.
他的心倾向于少事无为,为什么他会这样倾向呢?难道不是因为他曾这样想:我已经解脱,我要让别人也解脱;我已经渡过,我要让别人也渡过,巴利
Appossukkatāya cittaṃ namatīti kasmā panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami, nanu esa ‘‘muttohaṃ mocessāmi, tiṇṇohaṃ tāressāmi,
以隐名证得法,于我复有何用?
待圆成一切知智,普度诸天世间。巴利
Kiṃ me aññātavesena, dhammaṃ sacchikatenidha; Sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇitvā, tārayissaṃ sadevaka’’nti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.55) –
他修了愿行,圆满了诸巴拉密,才证得一切知智,难道不是这样吗?确实如此。不过,正是因为他审察的力量,他的心才这样倾向。因为他证得一切知智之后,审察众生的烦恼深重和法的甚深时,众生的烦恼深重和法的甚深就完全清楚地显现出来了。于是他想:“这些众生就像装满酸粥的葫芦、装满酪浆的罐子、浸透油膏的破布、涂满眼膏的手一样,充满了烦恼,极度染污,被贪染污,被嗔败坏,被痴迷惑,他们到底能通达什么呢?”即使因为审察烦恼深重的力量,他的心也这样倾向了。巴利
Patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ pattoti? Saccameva, tadeva paccavekkhaṇānubhāvena panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Tassa hi sabbaññutaṃ patvā sattānaṃ kilesagahanataṃ dhammassa ca gambhīrataṃ paccavekkhantassa sattānaṃ kilesagahanatā ca dhammagambhīratā ca sabbākārena pākaṭā jātā. Athassa ‘‘ime sattā kañjiyapuṇṇalābu viya takkabharitacāṭi viya vasātelapītapilotikā viya añjanamakkhitahattho viya ca kilesabharitā atisaṃkiliṭṭhā rāgarattā dosaduṭṭhā mohamuḷhā, te kiṃ nāma paṭivijjhissantī’’ti cintayato kilesagahanapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ nami.
这个法就像支撑大地的水界一样深,像被山遮住的芥子一样难见,像劈成一百份的马尾尖一样细微。我为了证悟这个法而努力时,确实没有未施过的布施,没有未守护的戒,没有哪一项巴拉密未圆满。可是,即使我像是毫不费力地摧破魔军,大地也没有震动;在初夜分回忆宿世时,也没有震动;在中夜分净化天眼时,也没有震动;只有在后夜分证悟缘起的那一刻,我这十千世界才震动了。像这样,连我这样锐利智慧的人,都是费尽艰辛才证悟这个法,世间的凡夫大众又怎么能证悟呢?应当知道,正是由于审察法之甚深的威力,他的心也这样倾向了。巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo pathavīsandhārakaudakakkhandho viya gambhīro, pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapito sāsapo viya duddaso, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭi viya aṇu. Mayā hi imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantena adinnaṃ dānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ nāma natthi, aparipūritā kāci pāramī nāma natthi, tassa me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassapi pathavī na kampittha, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantassapi na kampittha, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhentassapi na kampittha, pacchimayāme pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭivijjhantasseva me dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Iti mādisenapi tikkhañāṇena kicchenevāyaṃ dhammo paṭividdho, taṃ lokiyamahājanā kathaṃ paṭivijjhissantī’’ti dhammagambhīratāya paccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ namīti veditabbaṃ.
不过,当梵天请求时,因为想要说法,他的心也这样倾向了。因为世尊确实知道:“当我的心倾向于少事时,大梵天王会来请求说法。而这些众生敬重梵天神,他们会想:‘听说导师本来不想说法,后来大梵天请求他,他才说法。这法确实是善妙、殊胜的。’这样想了之后,他们就会愿意来听。”应当知道,也正是因为这个原因,他的心倾向于少事,而不是因为不想说法。巴利
Apica brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyapissa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Jānāti hi bhagavā ‘‘mama appossukkatāya citte namamāne mahābrahmā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, ime ca sattā brahmagarukā, te ‘satthā kira dhammaṃ na desetukāmo ahosi, atha naṃ mahābrahmā yācitvā desāpeti, santo vata bho dhammo paṇīto’ti maññamānā sussūsissantī’’ti. Idampissa kāraṇaṃ paṭicca appossukkatāya cittaṃ nami, no dhammadesanāyāti veditabbaṃ.
8 关于“娑婆主”:据说,在迦叶世尊的教法中,有一位名叫娑诃迦的长老,他修成初禅后,投生到初禅地,成为寿命长达一劫的梵天神。在那里,人们称他为娑婆主梵天。针对他,经文说“娑婆主梵天的”。“哎,要毁灭了”:据说他发出这样的声音,使得一万个世界的梵天神听到后全都聚集过来。“眼中少尘垢性”:在慧所成的眼中,这些人的贪、嗔、痴尘垢很少、很微薄,具有这样的性质,所以叫眼中少尘垢性。或者说,那些贪等尘垢很少的人,其本性就是眼中少尘垢性。这里的含义应当这样理解。“由于不闻”:就像“自己证知”等说法一样,这里是主格形式用于具格意义,意思是“由于不闻”。“将会有”:他指出,那些在过去诸佛那里通过十种福行事积累了善根的人,就像已经成熟、只等阳光照射的莲花,一心期盼着说法。他们不是一两个,而是数十万、数百千人,将在四句偈结束时证入圣者之境,成为法的证悟者。巴利
8.Sahampatissāti so kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto, tatra naṃ sahampati brahmāti sañjānanti. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’ti. Nassati vatāti so kira imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāreti, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sabbe sannipatiṃsu. Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ te sabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Assavanatāti ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu viya karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, assavanatāyāti attho. Bhavissantīti purimabuddhesu dasapuññakiriyavasena katādhikārā paripākagatapadumāni viya sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ dhammadesanaṃyeva ākaṅkhamānā catuppadikagāthāvasāne ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanārahā na eko, na dve, anekasatasahassā dhammassa aññātāro bhavissantīti dasseti.
“出现了”,就是显现了。“被污秽者所思惟”,是被布拉纳·咖萨巴等六位污秽的导师所思惟。因为他们更早出世,在整个阎浮提洲,像在铺开荆棘、像在喷洒毒液一样,宣说污秽的邪见之法。据说,他们因为听到佛陀出世的传闻而生起好奇,欺骗世人,安住在诈伪中,自称是一切知者,把任何非法都宣说成法。“请开启”,就是打开它。“不死之门”,就是作为不死涅槃之门的圣道。这里说的是:从迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,这扇通往涅槃大城的宏伟之门——圣道——就被关闭了。请用宣说正法之手打开它、推开它、敞开它。“愿他们听闻由无垢者所证悟之法”:愿这些众生听闻由无垢的正自觉者所证悟的四圣谛法,因为远离了贪等垢秽,所以是无垢。他这样向世尊请求。巴利
Pāturahosīti pātubhavi. Samalehi cintitoti samalehi pūraṇakassapādīhi chahi satthārehi cintito. Te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā sakalajambudīpe kaṇṭake pattharamānā viya visaṃ siñcamānā viya ca samalaṃ micchādiṭṭhidhammaṃ desayiṃsu. Te kira buddhakolāhalānussavena sañjātakutūhalā lokaṃ vañcetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānantā yaṃ kiñci adhammaṃyeva dhammoti dīpesuṃ. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānanagarassa mahādvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ saddhammadesanāhatthena apāpura vivara ugghāṭehīti. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu tāva bhagavāti yācati.
石山又高又坚固,不是土山,也不是混合土石的山,所以说“像站在石山顶上”。这句话的意思是:就像站在一座纯石构成、整块坚固的山顶上一样。因为站在那里的人,不需要抬头、伸脖子之类的动作,就能把一切看得清清楚楚。“如是譬喻”,就是与那石山相似的比喻。法殿,说的是出世间法。因为它能带来完全的清净信心,又因为超越一切法而高耸,所以像殿堂一样;或者,这里的“法”是智慧的别名。因为智慧以高耸之义,在阿毗达摩中被说为殿堂。正如所说:巴利
Selapabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato missakapabbato vāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. Tassattho ‘‘selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova. Na hi tattha ṭhitassa dassanatthaṃ gīvukkhipanapasāraṇādikiccaṃ atthī’’ti. Tathūpamanti tappaṭibhāgaṃ selapabbatūpamaṃ. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi sabbaso pasādāvaho sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca, paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo. Paññā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādoti abhidhamme niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
“ 登上智慧的高台,无忧的人俯视着被忧愁缠住的众生;
就像站在山上的人俯视站在地面上的人,智者也是这样看待愚者。”巴利
‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
这里的简要含义是:就像有个眼睛好的人,站在石山顶上,能四面看到人群;同样,善慧者啊,你具足美妙的智慧,以一切知智而成为遍眼者——世尊,登上法所成、慧所成的殿堂后,自己已经远离忧悲,请你俯视、观察、审查那些沉溺于忧悲、被生老所制伏的众生。
这里的意思是:譬如在山脚下四面开出一大片田地,在田埂上搭起小屋,夜里点起火来,又有具足四支的黑暗;这时,有个眼睛好的人站在那座山顶上往下看大地,因为田地、田埂、小屋和躺在那里的人都不发光,所以都看不见,只能看见小屋里火焰的光,因为它明亮耀眼。同样,登上法殿俯视众生界的如来,对那些没有造作善业的众生,即使他们坐在同一个住处里、就在右膝旁边,也不会进入佛眼的视野,因为他们的智慧之火没有燃烧,不发光,也不殊胜,就像夜里射出的箭一样。而那些已经造作善业、堪受教化的个人,即使站在很远的地方,也会进入他的视野,因为他们成熟的智慧之火正在燃烧,光明而相续殊胜,就像火焰,又像雪山一样。正如所说的:巴利
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā selapabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tathā tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ paññāmayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtaṃ janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya upaparikkhāti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā hi pabbatapāde samantā mahantaṃ khettaṃ katvā tattha kedārapāḷīsu kuṭikāyo katvā rattiṃ aggiṃ jāleyyuṃ, caturaṅgasamannāgatañca andhakāraṃ assa, atha tassa pabbatassa matthake ṭhatvā cakkhumato purisassa bhūmiṃ olokayato neva khettaṃ, na kedārapāḷiyo, na kuṭiyo, na tattha sayitamanussā paññāyeyyuṃ anujjalabhāvato, kuṭikāsu pana aggijālāmattameva paññāyeyya ujjalabhāvato, evaṃ dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha sattanikāyaṃ olokayato tathāgatassa ye te akatakalyāṇā sattā, te ekavihāre dakkhiṇajāṇupasse nisinnāpi buddhacakkhussa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti ñāṇagginā anujjalabhāvato anuḷārabhāvato ca, rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Ye pana katakalyāṇā veneyyapuggalā, te evassa dūrepi ṭhitā āpāthamāgacchanti paripakkañāṇaggitāya samujjalabhāvato uḷārasantānatāya ca, so aggi viya himavantapabbato viya ca. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 善人从远处显现,犹如雪山一般;
不善者于此不显现,犹如夜间射出的箭。”巴利
‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato; Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā’’ti. (dha. pa. 304);
起来吧!这是有人在恳求世尊为了说法而四处游化时说的话。或者说,起来吧的意思是:从因为说法而生的、被称为少事性的退缩和疲惫状态中奋起。
在勇者等词中:世尊因为具足四种正勤精进且超胜殊妙,所以是勇者;因为战胜了天子、死魔、烦恼和诸行,所以是战胜者;因为能把应受教化的众生从生死的旷野等处运渡出来,有能力将他们送到名为涅槃的安稳之地,所以是商队主;因为不存在欲贪之债,所以应知为无债。
好比有人借了别人的债来挥霍,即使被债主们逼着说还债,被粗话辱骂、被轻蔑、甚至被打,也无法还手反抗,一切都只能忍受。那笔债务就是他忍受的原因。同样地,如果有人对某样东西生起欲贪,以渴爱执取那件事物,即使因此被粗话辱骂、被轻蔑、甚至被打,也无法还手反抗,一切都只能忍受。那欲贪就是他忍受的原因,就像被丈夫们欺辱的妇女们一样。为什么?因为欲贪和债务是相似的。巴利
Uṭṭhehīti bhagavato dhammadesanatthaṃ cārikacaraṇaṃ yācanto bhaṇati. Uṭṭhehīti vā dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha. Vīrātiādīsu bhagavā sātisayacatubbidhasammappadhānavīriyavantatāya vīro, devaputtamaccukilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāmo, jātikantārādito veneyyasatthaṃ vāhanasamatthatāya nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemappadesaṃ sampāpanasamatthatāya satthavāho, kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇoti veditabbo. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi ‘‘iṇaṃ dehī’’ti tajjamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti, evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāgahaṇena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa so kāmacchando hoti gharasāmikehi viheṭhiyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viya. Kasmā? Iṇasadisattā kāmacchandassa.
9 “劝请”是指亲近值得恭敬的人之后,为了更崇高的目标而发起的希求,它本质上就是乞求。“以佛眼”是指以根上下智和意乐随眠智。因为这两种智就叫佛眼,而一切知智叫普眼。下三道的智叫法眼。在“尘垢少”等说法中,按照前面所说的方式,那些在智慧眼中贪等尘垢微薄的人,就是尘垢少者;那些尘垢厚重的人,就是尘垢多者;那些信等诸根锐利的人,就是利根者;那些诸根软弱的人,就是钝根者;那些信等行相美好的人,就是善行相者;那些能领会所说之义、容易教导的人,就是易教导者;那些把来世和过失看作可怕的人,就叫作见来世与过失可怖者。巴利
9.Ajjhesananti garuṭṭhānīyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato yācanā eva. Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassa samantacakkhūti . Heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ dhammacakkhūti. Apparajakkhetiādīsu yesaṃ vuttanayeneva paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ, te apparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ, te mahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni, te tikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni, te mudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā, te svākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā. Ye paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passanti, te paralokavajjabhayadassāvino nāma.
这里生长着青莲花,所以叫青莲池。它既可以指陆地,也可以指水域,但这里指的是水域,因此应当理解为“青莲池”,也就是“青莲林”的意思。后面几个词也应当这样理解。“内沉而生者”是指那些完全沉在水里生长、开放的花。“超出水面而住者”是指已经升出水面而挺立的花。其中,那些已经升出水面而挺立、正等着阳光照射的,是今天会开的花;那些与水面齐平而立的,是明天会开的花;那些还没有升出水面、在水里生长的,是第三天会开的花。另外,还有一些没有升出水面的花,比如“病青莲”等,它们根本不会开放,只会成为鱼和乌龟的食物。这些花虽然没有出现在经文里,但注释书指出应当把它们也提出来说明。正如花有这四种,人也有四种:略说即悟者、广说即悟者、应被引导者、以文句为最者。巴利
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippeto, tasmā uppaliniyanti uppalavaneti evamattho gahetabbo. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pussanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīni. Udakaṃ accuggamma tiṭṭhantīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā tiṭṭhanti. Tattha yāni accuggamma ṭhitāni sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni, tāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakā anuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma atthi, yāni neva pupphissanti macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷiṃ nāruḷhāni, āharitvā pana dīpetabbānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni. Yatheva hi tāni catubbidhāni pupphāni, evameva ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā.
在这里,如果某人在法刚刚被宣说的当下就证悟了法,那么当“四念处”等纲目被略说时,此人便能顺着说法的引导运用智慧,从而证得阿拉汉果,这种人称为“略说即悟者”。如果某人在略说之义被详细分别时证悟了法,这种人称为“广说即悟者”。如果某人通过听受、请问、如理作意,亲近、交往、承事善知识,逐渐证悟了法,这种人称为“应被引导者”。如果某人虽然多听、多说、多受持、多诵读,却在这一生中不能证悟法,以这个身体不能生起道或果,甚至不能生起禅那或毗婆舍那,这种人称为“以文句为最者”。在这里,世尊观察一万个世界时,看见略说即悟者就像今日将开的花,广说即悟者就像明日将开的花,应被引导者就像第三日将开的花,以文句为最者就像被鱼和龟吃掉的花。观察时,他这样从一切方面看见:“有这么多是少尘垢者,有这么多是多尘垢者,其中又有这么多是略说即悟者。”巴利
Tattha yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ugghaṭitaññūti vuccati. Yassa puggalassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamo. Tattha bhagavā uppalavanādisadisaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokento ajja pupphanakāni viya ugghaṭitaññū, sve pupphanakāni viya vipañcitaññū, tatiyadivase pupphanakāni viya neyye, macchakacchapabhakkhapupphāni viya padaparame ca addasa, passanto ca ‘‘ettakā apparajakkhā, ettakā mahārajakkhā, tatrāpi ettakā ugghaṭitaññū’’ti evaṃ sabbākāratova addasa.
在这里,世尊对三类人说法,能在他们这一生中就带来利益;而对那些以文句为最上的人,则成为未来世的习气种子。然后,世尊知道为这四类人说法能带来利益,生起想要说法的意愿,又把三界中一切众生按堪能或不堪能分成两类。关于这一点曾这样说:“那些众生具足业障、具足果报障、具足烦恼障,无信、无欲、智慧低劣,不能进入善法中的正性决定,这些众生是不堪能的。哪些众生是堪能的呢?那些众生不具足业障……这些众生是堪能的。”在这里,世尊舍弃一切不堪能的众生,只以智慧把握堪能的众生,又把他们分成六类:“这么多是贪行者,这么多是嗔行者、痴行者、寻行者、信行者、慧行者。”这样分好之后,世尊心想:“我要为他们说法。”应当知道,当世尊以少尘垢者、堪能者等角度作意时,那些众生是成群成堆地出现在他心中,而不是一个一个地出现。巴利
Tattha tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imasmiññeva attabhāve bhagavato dhammadesanā atthaṃ sādheti. Padaparamānaṃ anāgatatthāya vāsanā hoti. Atha bhagavā imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ viditvā desetukamyataṃ uppādetvā puna sabbepi tīsu bhavesu satte bhabbābhabbavasena dve koṭṭhāse akāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ye te sattā kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatā kilesāvaraṇena samannāgatā assaddhā acchandikā duppaññā abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ, ime te sattā abhabbā. Katame te sattā bhabbā? Ye te sattā na kammāvaraṇena…pe… ime te sattā bhabbā’’ti (vibha. 826-827). Tattha sabbepi abhabbapuggale pahāya bhabbapuggaleyeva ñāṇena pariggahetvā ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā, ettakā dosa, moha, vitakka, saddhā, buddhicaritā’’ti cha koṭṭhāse akāsi, evaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintesi. Ettha ca apparajakkhādibhabbādivasena āvajjentassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
回应就是回话。已开启就是打开。不死之门就是圣道。因为圣道确实是通向被称为不死的涅槃的门,世尊表明:我以大悲为依靠,以自觉智证得此门,将它开启并安立。有些人读作已为他们开启不死之门。放出信心就是让所有人都放出、舍出、宣示自己的信心,意思是:对我所说的法以及对我,生起自己信受的方式。最后两句的意思是:我先前顾虑身体和言语的疲劳,没有宣说、也不打算宣说这熟练、善巧的殊胜无上法;如今愿所有人都把信心的容器带来,我要满足他们的心愿。消失就是:梵天神以香花等供养大师后便消失,意思是回到了自己的住处。因为前来亲近大师的诸天神与梵天神,在大师面前消失,就是回到自己的住处。巴利
Paccabhāsīti patiabhāsi. Apārutāti vivaṭā. Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ, so mayā vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhūñāṇena adhigatattāti dasseti. ‘‘Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra’’nti keci paṭhanti. Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ muñcantu vissajjentu pavedentu, mayā desite dhamme mayi ca attano saddahanākāraṃ uṭṭhāpentūti attho. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho – ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattitampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā na bhāsiṃ, na bhāsissāmīti cintesiṃ, idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti. Antaradhāyīti satthāraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā antarahito, sakaṭṭhānameva gatoti attho. Satthusantikañhi upagatānaṃ devānaṃ brahmānañca tassa purato antaradhānaṃ nāma sakaṭṭhānagamanameva.
五比丘故事注释巴利
Pañcavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
10 “他生起了这样的念头”意思是:他生起了这样一个与说法有关的寻思——“我应当先为谁说法呢?”这就是其含义。“Āḷāra”是他的名字。据说他身材高挑、眼睛黄褐。因为他身材高耸,所以叫“高”;因为眼睛黄褐,所以叫“黄褐”;因此他的名字就叫“Āḷāra”。“Kālāma”是族姓。“智者”指具有智慧,也就是具备由证得禅定所成就的、被称为证得与多闻的智者素质,这是其含义。“明达”指具备明达,也就是具备由获得禅定之缘所成就的、称为“运持慧”意义上的明达素质,这是其义。“有慧”指具足适时生起之慧。“有慧”指具足称为“三因结生慧”以及能成办各各自应作之事的智慧,此处当如此理解其义。“少尘垢者”指因禅定镇伏烦恼而无垢、清净的众生。巴利
10.Etadahosīti etaṃ ahosi, ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti ayaṃ dhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko udapādīti attho. Āḷāroti tassa nāmaṃ. Dīghapiṅgalo kiresa. So hi tuṅgasarīratāya dīgho, piṅgalacakkhutāya piṅgalo, tenassa ‘‘āḷāro’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Kālāmoti gottaṃ. Paṇḍitoti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) paṇḍiccena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhasaṃsiddhena adhigamabāhusaccasaṅkhātena paṇḍitabhāvena samannāgatoti attho. Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhapaccayena pārihārikapaññāsaṅkhātena byattabhāvena samannāgatoti attho. Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato. Atha vā medhāvīti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātāya taṃtaṃitikattabbatāpaññāsaṅkhātāya ca medhāya samannāgatoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitattā nikkilesajātiko visuddhasatto. Ājānissatīti sallakkhessati paṭivijjhissati.
世尊的智也生起了,意思是:世尊的一切知智也生起了。据说,世尊并没有只凭天神所说就下结论,而是自己以一切知智观察,看到此人将在第七天结束时命终,投生到无所有处。就是针对这件事才说“世尊的智也生起了”。“大损失者”:因为在七天之内就从本可证得的道果上退失了,所以有巨大的损失、退失,因此叫“大损失者”。投生在非时处:在这里,他连前来闻法的机会都没有;就算我去那里,到了之后,他也没有能听闻所说之法的耳根净色。这样就表明他成了大损失者。那么,难道世尊不能靠自己的佛陀威神力让他了知法吗?是的,不能。因为如果没有他人的音声,声闻弟子就不可能证悟法;否则,即使不具足其他条件,也应该能证悟法,但事实并非如此。正如所说:“比丘们,有两种缘能生起正见:他人的音声和内在的如理作意。”巴利
Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti bhagavatopi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uppajji. Bhagavā kira devatāya kathiteneva niṭṭhaṃ agantvā sayampi sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ito sattamadivasamatthake kālaṃ katvā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbattoti addasa. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti. Mahājāniyoti sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni parihāni assāti mahājāniyo. Akkhaṇe nibbattatthā idha dhammadesanaṭṭhānaṃ āgamanapādāpi natthi, athāhaṃ tattha gaccheyyaṃ, gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotapasādopi natthi, evaṃ mahājāniyo jātoti dasseti. Kiṃ pana bhagavatā taṃ attano buddhānubhāvena dhammaṃ ñāpetuṃ na sakkāti? Āma na sakkā, na hi paratoghosamantarena sāvakānaṃ dhammābhisamayo sambhavati, aññathā itarapaccayarahitassapi dhammābhisamayena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca taṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya parato ca ghoso ajjhattañca yonisomanasikāro’’ti (a. ni. 2.127).
伍达咖是他的名字;因为他是拉玛的儿子,所以叫拉玛子。Abhidosakālakatoti 意思是半夜命终。所谓“世尊的智也生起了”,这里据说世尊也没有因为天神所说的话就下结论,而是以一切知智观察,见到“伍达咖·拉玛子昨天半夜命终,投生到非想非非想处”,因此这样说。其余部分和前面一样。巴利
Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ, rāmassa pana puttatāya rāmaputto. Abhidosakālakatoti aḍḍharatte kālakato. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti idhāpi kira bhagavā devatāya kathitavacanena sanniṭṭhānaṃ akatvā sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ‘‘hiyyo aḍḍharatte kālaṃ katvā udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti addasa, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
“帮助很大”就是利益很多。所谓“他们以已投入精勤的心来侍奉”,意思是:为了精勤修行,他们以被派去服务的心态,住在住处,通过打扫精舍庭院、拿取衣钵并跟随在后、提供洗脸水和齿木等方式来侍奉。那么,这被称为五群比丘的到底是哪些人呢?就是那些——巴利
Bahūpakārāti bahuupakārā. Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsūti padhānatthāya pesitattabhāvaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne pariveṇasammajjanena pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā anubandhanena mukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādinā ca upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Ke panete pañcavaggiyā nāma? Ye te –
拉玛、幢幡、勒迦那与曼帝;
孔丹尼亚、婆阇、须耶摩和苏达达;
那时,这八位婆罗门
具足六支,解说了真言。巴利
Rāmo dhajo lakkhaṇo cāpi mantī; Koṇḍañño ca bhojo suyāmo sudatto; Ete tadā aṭṭha ahesuṃ brāhmaṇā; Chaḷaṅgavā mantaṃ viyākariṃsūti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284; jā. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā);
菩萨出生的时候,有八位婆罗门,既是解梦的人,也是看相的人。其中三位做了两种解释:“具足这些相的人,如果在家,就会成为转轮王;如果出家,就会成佛。”五位婆罗门则做了确定的判断:“具足这些相的人不会留在家里,一定会成佛。”这三位是按真言的原话来解的。他们没法根据“看相的真言所说的吠陀语句,只有两种去向,没有别的”这个规定来下结论,所以就照着原话来说,并没有预期这位大士会成佛。而孔丹尼亚等五位则已经确定“他一定会成佛”,所以超越了真言的原话。他们把自己得到的丰厚供养送给亲属,心里认定“这位大士不会留在家里,一定会成佛”,毫无疑惑,为了菩萨而出家修行;也有人说他们是那些婆罗门的儿子,但注释书里已经否定了这个说法。据说他们年纪很小的时候就通晓许多真言,所以婆罗门们把他们放在老师的位置上。他们想:“以后我们要是被妻儿缠住,就没办法出家了。”于是年纪轻轻就出了家,四处游历,住在舒适的地方。他们时不时会问:“朋友,大士出家了吗?”人们说:“你们到哪里能见到大士?他就像天神一样,在三座宫殿里,在种种歌舞中享受荣华。”他们听了之后,心想“大士的智慧还没成熟”,于是就安安静静地待着。巴利
Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapaṭiggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvedhā byākariṃsu ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasamāno rājā hohiti cakkavattī, pabbajamāno buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ekaṃsabyākaraṇā ahesuṃ ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapadaṃ gatā. Ete hi lakkhaṇamantasaṅkhātavedavacanānurūpaṃ paṭipannā dve gatiyo bhavanti anaññāti vuttaniyāmena nicchinituṃ asakkontā vuttameva paṭipajjiṃsu, na mahāpurisassa buddhabhāvappattiṃ paccāsīsiṃsu. Ime pana koṇḍaññādayo pañca ‘‘ekaṃsato buddho bhavissatī’’ti jātanicchayattā mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Te attanā laddhaṃ tuṭṭhidānaṃ ñātakānaṃ vissajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpuriso agāre na ajjhāvasissati, ekantena buddho bhavissatī’’ti nibbematikā bodhisattaṃ uddissa samaṇapabbajjaṃ pabbajitā, tesaṃ puttātipi vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Ete kira daharakāleva bahū mante jāniṃsu, tasmā ne brāhmaṇā ācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapayiṃsu. Te ‘‘pacchā amhehi puttadārajaṭaṃ chinditvā na sakkā bhavissati pabbajitu’’nti daharakāleyeva pabbajitvā ramaṇīyāni senāsanāni paribhuñjantā vicariṃsu. Kālena kālaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ bho mahāpuriso mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto’’ti pucchanti. Manussā ‘‘kuhiṃ tumhe mahāpurisaṃ passissatha, tīsu pāsādesu vividhanāṭakamajjhe devo viya sampattiṃ anubhotī’’ti vadanti. Te sutvā ‘‘na tāva mahāpurisassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gacchatī’’ti appossukkā vihariṃsuyeva.
为什么世尊在这里说“五群比丘对我帮助很大”呢?难道他只对有帮助的人说法,对没有帮助的人就不说法吗?不是不说法。他其实是出于熟悉亲近的关系,才先去看阿罗罗·迦罗摩和伍达咖·拉玛子。但在这个佛陀的教法领域里,除了阿若·阿若憍陈如之外,没有别人能第一个证悟法。为什么呢?因为他具有那样的亲依止缘。据说过去在积福行善的时候,有兄弟两人,他们一起种庄稼。其中哥哥心想:“在一块田的庄稼里,我要做九次最上等的布施。”他在播种时布施了种子中最上等的;在结穗时和弟弟商量:“结穗的时候我要破开穗子来布施。”弟弟说:“你是想毁掉嫩庄稼啊。”哥哥知道弟弟不肯听从,就把田分开,从自己那份里破开穗子取出乳汁,配上酥油和糖蜜来布施;在嫩苗时,做成嫩苗来布施;在收割时布施收割中最上等的;在捆束时布施捆束中最上等的;把束按一个人能挑的量捆好后,在成捆时布施成捆中最上等的;在打谷场上堆放捆的那天,布施场上最上等的;在捣谷堆成谷堆那天,布施场上物品中最上等的;在谷仓里存放谷物的那天,布施谷仓中最上等的。就这样,在一块田的庄稼里做了九次最上等的布施。弟弟则是在从打谷场取出谷物、拿回家的那天才布施。他们两人当中,哥哥后来成为阿若憍陈如长老,弟弟成为苏跋达游行者。正因为在一块田的庄稼里做了九次最上等布施,所以除了这位长老之外,没有别人能第一个证悟法。“因为做了九次最上等布施”这句话,是就他成为知旧者中第一的、与所发之愿相应的、在声闻巴拉密圆满之际所生起的情况而说的。因为三位菩萨各自的巴拉密达到顶点时所生起的善业或不善业,果报都极为重大;而如果不首先证悟法,又怎么能成就知旧者中第一的地位呢?至于“五群比丘对我帮助很大”这句话,仅仅是出于忆念恩德而说的。巴利
Kasmā panettha bhagavā ‘‘bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti āha. Kiṃ upakārakānaṃyeva esa dhammaṃ deseti, anupakārakānaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Paricayavasena hesa āḷārañceva kālāmaṃ udakañca rāmaputtaṃ olokesi. Etasmiṃ pana buddhakkhette ṭhapetvā aññāsikoṇḍaññaṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kasmā? Tathāvidhaupanissayattā. Pubbe kira puññakaraṇakāle dve bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te ca ekato sassaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha jeṭṭhassa ‘‘ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggasassadānaṃ mayā dātabba’’nti ahosi. So vappakāle bījaggaṃ nāma datvā gabbhakāle kaniṭṭhena saddhiṃ mantesi ‘‘gabbhakāle gabbhaṃ phāletvā dassāmī’’ti. Kaniṭṭho ‘‘taruṇasassaṃ nāsetukāmosī’’ti āha. Jeṭṭho kaniṭṭhassa ananuvattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā khettaṃ vibhajitvā attano koṭṭhāsato gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ nīharitvā sappiphāṇitena yojetvā adāsi, puthukakāle puthukaṃ kāretvā adāsi , lāyane lāyanaggaṃ, veṇikaraṇe veṇaggaṃ, veṇiyo purisabhāravasena bandhitvā kalāpakaraṇe kalāpaggaṃ, khale kalāpānaṃ ṭhapanadivase khalaggaṃ, madditvā vīhīnaṃ rāsikaraṇadivase khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ, koṭṭhāgāre dhaññassa pakkhipanadivase koṭṭhagganti evaṃ ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggadānaṃ adāsi. Kaniṭṭho pana khalato dhaññaṃ uddharitvā gahaṇadivase adāsi. Tesu jeṭṭho aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero jāto, kaniṭṭho subhaddaparibbājako. Iti ekasmiṃ sasse navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā ṭhapetvā theraṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. ‘‘Navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā’’ti idañca tassa rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvatthāya katābhinīhārānurūpaṃ pavattitasāvakapāramiyā ciṇṇante pavattitattā vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇampi hi bodhisattānaṃ taṃtaṃpāramiyā sikhāppattakāle pavattitaṃ puññaṃ apuññaṃ vā garutaravipākameva hoti, dhammassa ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ sacchikiriyāya vinā kathaṃ rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvasiddhīti? ‘‘Bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttaṃ.
在仙人堕处鹿野苑:据说,在佛陀还没出世的时候,那个地方有独觉佛在香醉山以灭尽定度过七天,从灭尽定出来以后,嚼了龙蔓齿木,在阿耨达池洗了脸,拿起衣钵,从空中飞来降落在这里。他们在这里披上袈裟,进城乞食,吃完饭要离开的时候,也是从那里腾空而去。就这样,仙人们在这里降落、腾空,所以那个地方就得名“仙人堕处”;又因为那里是为了让鹿群无所畏惧而施设的,所以叫“鹿野苑”。因此说“在仙人堕处鹿野苑”。其他佛陀初次去说法时,是从空中飞去,就在那里降落;但我们的世尊观察到伍巴咖邪命外道的亲依止缘,知道:“伍巴咖正走在这条路上,他见到我、跟我交谈之后就会离开,后来心生厌离,回来证得阿拉汉果。”于是世尊步行走了十八由旬的路。所以说“向波罗奈方向游行而去”。巴利
Isipatane migadāyeti tasmiṃ kira padese anuppanne buddhe paccekasambuddhā gandhamādanapabbate sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā vītināmetvā nirodhā vuṭṭhāya nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya ākāsena āgantvā nipatanti. Tattha cīvaraṃ pārupitvā nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakiccā gamanakālepi tatoyeva uppatitvā gacchanti. Iti isayo ettha nipatanti uppatanti cāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘isipatana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ, migānaṃ pana abhayatthāya dinnattā ‘‘migadāyo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘isipatane migadāye’’ti. Aññe buddhā paṭhamaṃ dhammadesanatthāya gacchantā ākāsena gantvā tattheva otaranti, amhākaṃ pana bhagavā upakassa ājīvakassa upanissayaṃ disvā ‘‘upako imaṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno, so maṃ disvā sallapitvā gamissati, atha puna nibbinno āgamma arahattaṃ sacchikarissatī’’ti ñatvā aṭṭhārasayojanaṃ maggaṃ padasāva agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yena bārāṇasī, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmī’’ti.
11 从伽耶到菩提道场之间,也就是伽耶和菩提道场中间相隔三伽浮的地方。从菩提道场到伽耶是三伽浮,到波罗奈是十八由旬。伍巴咖在菩提道场和伽耶之间见到了世尊。因为与“antarā”这个词搭配,所以用了业格。在这类场合,文法家们只用一个“antarā”,例如“antarā gāmañca nadiñca yāti”;但它必须与第二个词也相连。一旦不相连,就构不成业格,而会落入属格——因为“antarā”一旦构成搭配,所要求的正是业格。而此处,正是把两者连接之后才这样说的。“addhānamagga”即被称为“addhāna”的道路,意思是长途。在“addhānagamana”的分析中,从“addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabbaṃ”等语来看,半由旬也是“addhānamagga”。从菩提道场到伽耶是三伽浮。“vippasannāni”即非常清净。“indriyāni”即以意为第六的诸根。“parisuddho”即无过失。“pariyodāto”是它的同义词。因为完全无杂染,这才被称为“pariyodāto”,并非因为白色。正是看到这种清净,才了知诸根的清净;据说那位邪命外道具有把握方法之智。巴利
11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhissa ca vivare tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni, bārāṇasī aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarā-saddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Idha pana yojetvā eva vutto. Addhānamagganti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, dīghamagganti attho. Addhānagamanasamayassa vibhaṅge ‘‘addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) addhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Bodhimaṇḍato pana gayā tigāvutaṃ. Vippasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni. Parisuddhoti niddoso. Pariyodātoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirupakkilesatāyeva hi esa ‘‘pariyodāto’’ti vutto, na setabhāvena. Etassa pariyodātataṃ disvāva indriyānaṃ vippasannataṃ aññāsi, nayaggāhīpaññā kiresā tassa ājīvakassa.
征服了一切:他征服了一切三界之法而安住。了知了一切:他了知、遍知了一切四界之法,因为一切所知障都已断除。于一切法无染着:对于一切三界之法,他不被贪染、瞋害、愚痴等烦恼垢秽所染。舍离了一切:他舍离了一切三界之法而安住。即使是本不该舍的善法和无记法,由于与之相应的烦恼已断除,也就成了已舍,所以说为已舍。于渴爱灭尽得解脱:他在渴爱灭尽的涅槃中,以涅槃为所缘而解脱。自证知:他自己了知了一切四界之法。还能指认谁:还能指认其他什么人作“这是我师”呢?巴利
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Sabbavidūti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ avediṃ aññāsiṃ sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇassa pahīnattā. Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalittoti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu rajjanadussanamuyhanādinā kilesalepena alitto. Sabbañjahoti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito. Appahātabbampi hi kusalābyākataṃ tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānena pahīnattā na hotīti jahitameva hoti. Taṇhakkhaye vimuttoti taṇhakkhaye nibbāne ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vimutto. Sayaṃ abhiññāyāti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ attanāva jānitvā. Kamuddiseyyanti kaṃ aññaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddiseyyaṃ.
在出世间法上,我没有老师,所以说“我没有老师”。虽然对于世间法,世间导师也有某种程度的证得,但不存在那样[高深]的证得是由他人教导而来的;而在出世间法上,他连一点点别人的教导都没有。没有能和我相比的人,就是说,没有一个人在戒等功德上能和我相提并论。正自觉者,是说通过因和理,自己觉悟了四谛。清凉,是说通过熄灭一切烦恼之火而变得清凉,也就是因为烦恼本身已经止息,所以是寂灭。巴利
Na me ācariyo atthīti lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthi. Kiñcāpi hi lokiyadhammānampi yādiso lokanāthassa adhigamo, na tādiso adhigamo parūpadeso atthi, lokuttaradhamme panassa lesopi natthi. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ sīlādīhi guṇehi paṭinidhibhūto puggalo nāma natthi. Sammāsambuddhoti hetunā nayena cattāri saccāni sayaṃ buddho . Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesagginibbāpanena sītibhūto, kilesānaṃ yeva nibbutattā nibbuto.
卡西那城,就是卡西国里的城市。“我将击打”,意思是“我要敲响”。“不死鼓”,是说为了让应当受教化的人证得不死,世尊先作宣告等,然后说法,这说法就被称为“不死鼓”;意思是,为了获得法轮,我要敲响那面不死之鼓而前去。巴利
Kāsinaṃpuranti kāsiraṭṭhe nagaraṃ. Āhañchanti āhanissāmi. Amatadundubhinti veneyyānaṃ amatādhigamāya ugghosanādiṃ katvā satthu dhammadesanā ‘‘amatadundubhī’’ti vuttā, dhammacakkapaṭilābhāya taṃ amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
你堪当成为无边胜者。意思是:你也有资格成为无边胜者。具足无尽智慧、已战胜烦恼的人,就是无边胜者。贤友,也可以成为这样的人。意思是:对于如此殊胜的色身之宝,应当以这样的智慧来成就。这正是他出家的因缘。他确实已经积累了资粮。因此,世尊为了与他相会,亲自踏上了那条路。他出发了:他前往名为弯颈的地区。巴利
Arahasi anantajinoti anantajinopi bhavituṃ yuttoti attho. Anantañāṇo jitakilesoti anantajino. Hupeyyapāvusoti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya, evaṃvidhe nāma rūparatane īdisena ñāṇena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ayañhissa pabbajjāya paccayo jāto. Katādhikāro hesa. Tathā hi bhagavā tena samāgamanatthaṃ padasāva taṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji. Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi.
在那里,他靠着一个猎人小村住下来,一个年长的猎人照料他。那个地方有很多凶猛的苍蝇,于是大家就让他住进一口大缸里。猎人要去远处打猎,临走前吩咐女儿恰巴说:“别怠慢了我们这位阿拉汉。”然后就带着儿子和兄弟们走了。他的女儿长得漂亮,身材匀称。第二天,伍巴咖回到家里,看见那个少女做好一切侍奉,准备上前来,心里被贪欲压倒,连饭都吃不下,便用容器装了饭,带回住处,把饭放在一边,心想:“我要是能得到恰巴,就能活下去;要是得不到,还不如死了。”于是不吃不喝地躺着。到了第七天,猎人打猎回来,问女儿伍巴咖的情况。她说:“他只来过那一天,后来就再也没来过了。”巴利
Tatthekaṃ migaluddakagāmakaṃ nissāya vāsaṃ kappesi, jeṭṭhakaluddako taṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiñca janapade caṇḍā makkhikā honti. Atha naṃ ekāya cāṭiyā vasāpesuṃ. Migaluddako dūraṃ migavaṃ gacchanto ‘‘amhākaṃ arahante mā pamajjī’’ti cāpaṃ nāma dhītaraṃ āṇāpetvā agamāsi saddhiṃ puttabhātukehi. Sā cassa dhītā dassanīyā hoti koṭṭhāsasampannā. Dutiyadivase upako gharaṃ āgato taṃ dārikaṃ sabbaṃ upacāraṃ katvā parivisituṃ upagataṃ disvā rāgena abhibhūto bhuñjitumpi asakkonto bhājanena bhattaṃ ādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhattaṃ ekamantaṃ nikkhipitvā ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi. No ce, marāmī’’ti nirāhāro sayi. Sattame divase māgaviko āgantvā dhītaraṃ upakassa pavattiṃ pucchi. Sā ‘‘ekadivasameva āgantvā puna nāgatapubbo’’ti āha.
猎人心里想:“我一回来就直接去找他,问个清楚。”于是他立刻赶过去,一边摸着他的脚一边问:“尊者,您哪里不舒服吗?”伍巴咖只是呻吟着,翻来覆去。猎人说:“尊者,您说吧,只要我能做到的,我一定全都去做。”伍巴咖说:“如果我能得到遮波,我就能活下去;要是得不到,我还不如死了好。”猎人问:“尊者,您会什么手艺吗?”伍巴咖说:“不会。”猎人说:“尊者,一个人什么手艺都不会,是没办法成家过日子的。”伍巴咖说:“我什么手艺都不会,不过我可以给你们当搬肉的人,帮你们卖肉。”猎人说:“这也正合我们的心意。”于是给了他一件上衣,把他带回家,把女儿嫁给了他。两人一起生活后,生了一个儿子,给他取名叫“苏跋达”。遮波在孩子哭的时候,唱着哄孩子的歌来嘲笑伍巴咖:“搬肉人的儿子,猎人的儿子,别哭,别哭……”伍巴咖说:“贤女,你以为我没有依靠吗?我有一位叫‘无量胜者’的朋友,我要去投奔他。”遮波明白“他是觉得丢脸了”,于是一次又一次地说这些话来嘲弄他。终于有一天,伍巴咖没有告诉任何人,就朝着中部地区出发了。巴利
Māgaviko āgataveseneva naṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmīti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, aphāsuka’’nti pāde parāmasanto pucchi. Upako nitthunanto parivattatiyeva. So ‘‘vada bhante, yaṃ mayā sakkā kātuṃ, sabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti āha. Upako ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi, no ce, mayhameva maraṇaṃ seyyo’’ti āha. Jānāsi kira, bhante, kiñci sippanti? Na jānāmīti. Na, bhante, kiñci sippaṃ ajānantena sakkā gharāvāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātunti. So āha ‘‘nāhaṃ kiñci sippaṃ jānāmi, apica tumhākaṃ maṃsahārako bhavissāmi, maṃsañca vikkiṇissāmī’’ti. Māgaviko ‘‘amhākampi etadeva ruccatī’’ti uttarasāṭakaṃ datvā gharaṃ ānetvā dhītaraṃ adāsi. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya putto vijāyi, ‘‘subhaddo’’tissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Cāpā tassa rodanakāle ‘‘maṃsahārakassa putta migaluddakassa putta mā rodi mā rodī’’tiādīni vadamānā puttatosanagītena upakaṃ uppaṇḍesi. ‘‘Bhadde tvaṃ maṃ anāthoti maññasi, atthi me anantajino nāma sahāyo, tassāhaṃ santikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti āha. Cāpā ‘‘evamayaṃ aṭṭīyatī’’ti ñatvā punappunaṃ kathesi. So ekadivasaṃ anārocetvāva majjhimadesābhimukho pakkāmi.
那时,世尊正住在舍卫城的祇园精舍。当时,世尊事先就吩咐比丘们:“比丘们,如果有人来问‘无边胜者’在哪里,你们就带他来见我。”伍巴咖也一路打听“无边胜者住在哪里”,逐渐来到舍卫城,站在寺院中央问道:“无边胜者在哪里?”比丘们就把他带到世尊面前。他见到世尊后说:“世尊,您认得我吗?”世尊说:“是的,伍巴咖,我认得你。不过,你之前住在哪里?”伍巴咖答:“世尊,我住在弯颈地区。”世尊说:“伍巴咖,你已经老了,还能出家吗?”伍巴咖说:“世尊,我能出家。”世尊就让他出家,并给了他修行的方法。他依照方法精勤修行,证得不来果,命终之后投生到无烦天,在投生的那一刹那就证得了阿拉汉果。因为在无烦天投生的众生中,有七个人刚一投生就证得阿拉汉果,他就是其中之一。正如所说的那样——巴利
Bhagavā ca tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane, atha kho bhagavā paṭikacceva bhikkhū āṇāpesi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, anantajinoti pucchamāno āgacchati, tassa maṃ dasseyyāthā’’ti. Upakopi kho ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino vasatī’’ti pucchanto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ āgantvā vihāramajjhe ṭhatvā ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino’’ti pucchi. Taṃ bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ nayiṃsu. So ca bhagavantaṃ disvā ‘‘sañjānātha maṃ bhagavā’’ti āha. Āma upaka sañjānāmi, kuhiṃ pana tvaṃ vasitthāti. Vaṅkahārajanapade, bhanteti. Upaka mahallakosi jāto, pabbajituṃ sakkhissasīti. Pabbajissāmi, bhanteti. Bhagavā pabbājetvā tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi. So kammaṭṭhāne kammaṃ karonto anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya kālaṃ katvā avihesu nibbatto, nibbattikkhaṇeyeva ca arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Avihe nibbattamattā hi satta janā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, tesaṃ so aññataro. Vuttañhetaṃ –
投生到无烦天的七位比丘,已经解脱了;
贪与嗔已经彻底断尽,他们已越过世间的执著。
“ 伍巴咖、帕罗犍陀和布咕萨提,这三位;
跋迪亚、康陀提婆、巴胡拉吉和僧祇耶;
他们舍弃了人身,超越了天界的相应。”巴利
‘‘Avihaṃ upapannāse, vimuttā satta bhikkhavo; Rāgadosaparikkhīṇā, tiṇṇā loke visattikaṃ. ‘‘Upako palagaṇḍo ca, pukkusāti ca te tayo; Bhaddiyo khaṇḍadevo ca, bāhuraggi ca saṅgiyo; Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upaccagu’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.50, 105);
12 他们定下约定说“不应礼敬”等等,就这样达成了协议。多事者,是指为了袈裟等众多资具而行事的人。从精进中退堕者,是指从精进、从先前未曾修过的难行中退失、堕落、退减的人。转向多事,是指为了袈裟等众多资具而转向。再者,他们说“然而座位应当设置”,意思是说,对于投生在高贵家族的他,至少应当设一个座位。不能确立,是指被佛陀的威神力、佛陀的威力所制伏,无法坚持自己定下的约定。以名字和朋友之语相称,是指他们称他“乔达摩”,称他“贤友”,并且说:“贤友乔达摩,从前我们在优楼频螺精进修习时,曾为你拿衣钵、给你漱口水、给你齿木、打扫你住过的精舍。后来是谁照顾你的起居?我们离开后,你可曾想念我们?”他们说了这样的话,这就是其含义。巴利
12.Saṇṭhapesunti ‘‘neva abhivādetabbo’’tiādinā katikaṃ akaṃsu. Bāhullikoti cīvarabāhullādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato pubbe anuṭṭhitadukkaracaraṇato vibbhanto bhaṭṭho parihīno. Āvatto bāhullāyāti cīvarādibahubhāvatthāya āvatto. Apica kho āsanaṃ ṭhapetabbanti apica kho panassa uccakule nibbattassa āsanamattaṃ ṭhapetabbanti vadiṃsu. Asaṇṭhahantāti buddhānubhāvena buddhatejena abhibhūtā attano katikāya ṭhātuṃ asakkontā. Nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācarantīti ‘‘gotamā’’ti ca ‘‘āvuso’’ti ca vadanti, ‘‘āvuso gotama, mayaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhānakāle tuyhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarimha, mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ adamha, vutthapariveṇaṃ sammajjimha, pacchā te ko vattapaṭipattiṃ akāsi, kacci amhesu pakkantesu na cintayitthā’’ti evarūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.
“不久”就是没过多久。“善男子”有两种:出身好的善男子和品行好的善男子,而这两种人都算善男子。“从家”就是从居家生活出来。“在家”是指对家有益的事,说的是种田、养牛这类养家糊口的事。这里没有在家的事,所以叫“无家”,这是出家的别名。“出家”就是趣向、靠近。“那无上的”就是那无与伦比的。“梵行圆满”是指修行梵行的终点,也就是阿拉汉果。善男子正是为了这个才出家的。“就在现世”就是指在现在这个生命里。“自己以证智作证后”就是自己以智慧亲证之后,成为不依他人者。“具足而住”就是证得、成就之后而住。巴利
Na cirassevāti acireneva. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ācārakulaputtā ca, ete pana ubhayathāpi kulaputtāyeva. Agārasmāti gharā. Agārāya hitaṃ agāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādi kuṭumbaposanakammaṃ vuccati. Natthi ettha agāriyanti anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pabbajantīti upagacchanti upasaṅkamanti. Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, arahattaphalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi atthāya kulaputtā pabbajanti. Diṭṭheva dhammeti tasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayaṃ katvāti attho. Upasampajja viharissathāti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharissatha.
“以威仪”是指以难行的威仪。“以行道”是指以难行的行道。“以难行作”是指通过食用少量豆羹等食物来行难行。“上人法”是指超越常人之法。“足以成为圣”是指堪为圣者,意思是说有能力成就圣位。智见本身就是智见的殊胜,而堪为圣者又具有这种智见殊胜,所以称为“堪为圣的智见殊胜”。所谓“智见”,可以指天眼通、观智、道、果、省察智,也可以指一切知智。比如“不放逸者成就智见”这句里,天眼通称为智见;“引导心、令心倾向智见”这句里,指的是观智;“他们不可能为智见、为无上正觉”这句里,指的是道;“我证得这另一种上人法、堪为圣的智见殊胜、安乐住”这句里,指的是果;“我心中生起智与见:我的解脱不动摇,这是最后一生,从此不再有后有”这句里,指的是省察智;“我心中生起智与见:阿喇拉·迦罗摩在七天后命终”这句里,指的是一切知智。而在这里,指的是以一切知智为近因的圣道,或者就是指一切知智本身。巴利
Iriyāyāti dukkarairiyāya. Paṭipadāyāti dukkarapaṭipattiyā. Dukkarakārikāyāti pasatapasatamuggayūsādiāharaṇādinā dukkarakaraṇena. Uttari manussadhammāti manussadhammato upari. Alaṃ ariyaṃ kātunti alamariyo, ariyabhāvāya samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti, ñāṇadassanameva ñāṇadassanaviseso, alamariyo ca so ñāṇadassanaviseso cāti alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Ñāṇadassananti ca dibbacakkhupi vipassanāpi maggopi phalampi paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi vuccati. ‘‘Appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.311) hi ettha dibbacakkhu ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.235) ettha vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbā te ñāṇadassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.196) ettha maggo. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘akuppā me cetovimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘sattāhakālakato āḷāro kālāmo’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284; 2.340; mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Idha pana sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhāno ariyamaggo sabbaññutaññāṇameva vā adhippetaṃ.
“你们是否忆念我”就是问“你们是否认得我”。“我曾说过这样那样的话”在这里的意思是:有没有说过这类不同的话。也就是说,我在优楼频螺修苦行时,为了摄受你们、为了让你们不厌倦,夜里或白天来到你们那里,有没有说过这样的话:“贤友们,你们不要想着‘我们要去哪里’,我的光明或业处之相显现了。”他们只听这一句就获得了正念,生起恭敬,确信“这个人一定已经成佛了”,于是说“没有,尊者,没有这回事”。世尊未能使五比丘信服,就是世尊未能使五比丘知道“我是佛”。他们令心倾向于正智,就是他们为了证得正智、达到阿拉汉果,而令心倾向于、导向正智。巴利
Abhijānātha me noti abhijānātha nu me. Evarūpaṃ pabhāvitametanti ettha evarūpaṃ vākyabhedanti attho, api nu ahaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhāne tumhākaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ rattiṃ vā divā vā āgantvā ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ yattha katthaci gamissāmāti mā vitakkayittha, mayhaṃ obhāso vā kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ vā paññāyatī’’ti evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsinti adhippāyo. Te ekapadeneva satiṃ labhitvā uppannagāravā ‘‘addhā esa buddho jāto’’ti saddahitvā ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti āhaṃsu. Asakkhi kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū ‘‘buddho aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ asakkhi. Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpesunti aññāya arahattappattiyā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapesuṃ abhinīhariṃsu.
《转法轮经》的注释巴利
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttavaṇṇanā
13 比丘们,这是两种极端。意思是:比丘们,这是两种部分,两种类别。这里“极端”这个词是“部分”的意思,就像“前际的智、后际的智”等说法中的用法一样。而当这句话被说出的时候,随着发音的同时,以佛陀的威力,声音向下到达无间地狱,向上到达有顶天,遍满一万个世界之后停住了。就在那个时候,善根已经成熟、为了证悟诸谛而积累了许多功德的十八俱胝梵天神聚集到了一起。西边的太阳落下了,东边与阿沙陀星宿相合的满月升起来了。就在那个时候,世尊开始讲述《转法轮经》,说出了“比丘们,这是两种极端”等等的话。巴利
13.Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti dve ime, bhikkhave, koṭṭhāsā, dve bhāgāti attho. Bhāgavacano hettha anta-saddo ‘‘pubbante ñāṇaṃ aparante ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 1063) viya. Imassa pana padassa uccāraṇasamakālaṃ pavattanigghoso buddhānubhāvena heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ patvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃyeva samaye paripakkakusalamūlā saccābhisambodhāya katādhikārā aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno samāgacchiṃsu. Pacchimadisāya sūriyo atthameti, pācīnadisāya āsāḷhanakkhattena yutto puṇṇacando uggacchati. Tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā dhammacakkappavattanasuttaṃ ārabhanto ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“出家者”是指断除了在家束缚、已经出家的人。“不应习行”就是不应亲近、不应沉溺其中。“于诸欲中耽著欲乐”这句话,是指在事欲中对烦恼欲乐的沉溺,意思是追随与烦恼欲相应的快乐。“卑劣”就是低劣。“粗俗”是指属于村民的、被他们所惯行的。“凡夫法”是指凡夫、愚痴之人所惯行的。“非圣”是指不是圣者、不清净、不殊胜,或者不属于圣者所有。“无利益”是指不带来利益,不依靠能带来利益安乐之因。“自苦行”是指自我折磨的沉溺,意思是造成痛苦、产生痛苦。“苦”是指由卧荆棘床等自我折磨所带来的苦。“中道”是就圣道而说的。因为这条道不接近、不落入耽著欲乐和自苦行这两个极端,从这两个极端中解脱出来,所以称为“中道”。由于处于这两者中间,所以叫“中”;又因为是希求从轮回之苦中出离的人应当行持的道,所以叫“行道”。同样地,贪是一个极端,嗔是一个极端;常见是一个极端,断见是一个极端——应当按前面的方式详细展开。巴利
Tattha pabbajitenāti gihibandhanaṃ chetvā pabbajjupagatena. Na sevitabbāti na vaḷañjetabbā nānuyuñjitabbā. Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti yo ca ayaṃ vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasukhassa anuyogo, kilesakāmasaṃyuttassa sukhassa anugatoti attho. Hīnoti lāmako. Gammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ santako tehi sevitabbatāya. Pothujjanikoti puthujjanena andhabālajanena āciṇṇo. Anariyoti na ariyo na visuddho na uttamo, na vā ariyānaṃ santako. Anatthasaṃhitoti na atthasaṃhito, hitasukhāvahakāraṇaṃ anissitoti attho. Attakilamathānuyogoti attano kilamathassa anuyogo, dukkhakaraṇaṃ dukkhuppādananti attho. Dukkhoti kaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādīhi attabādhanehi dukkhāvaho. Majjhimā paṭipadāti ariyamaggaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Maggo hi kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, attakilamathānuyogo eko anto, ete dve ante na upeti na upagacchati, vimutto etehi antehi, tasmā ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattā majjhimā, vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi paṭipajjitabbato ca paṭipadāti, tathā lobho eko anto, doso eko anto. Sassataṃ ekaṃ antaṃ, ucchedo eko antoti purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.
用“能作眼”等话,是在赞叹那条行道本身。它能造出智慧之眼,所以叫“能作眼”。因为它能导向对四圣谛的观见,也就是让遍知、现观等各类的见生起,所以称为“能作眼”。应当知道,这个意义虽然和行道本身没有差别,但它是按组成部分来成立,再依整体来说的,所以是借代的说法。第二个词是它的同义词。“为寂静”,是为了让烦恼止息。“为证智”,是为了了知四圣谛。“为等觉”,是为了觉悟这些谛。“为涅槃”,是为了证得涅槃。或者,“为涅槃”是指无余涅槃,因为“为寂静”这个词已经包含了有余涅槃。巴利
Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Sā hi catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanāya saṃvattati pariññābhisamayādibhedassa dassanassa pavattanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’ti vuccati. Tayidaṃ satipi paṭipadāya anaññatte avayavavasena sijjhamāno attho samudāyena kato nāma hotīti upacāravasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesupasamatthāya. Abhiññāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti tesaṃyeva sambujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti nibbānasacchikiriyāya. Atha vā nibbānāyāti anupādisesanibbānāya. ‘‘Upasamāyā’’ti hi iminā saupādisesanibbānaṃ gahitaṃ.
现在,为了直接显示那条中道本身的样貌,先问“那是什么呢”,然后以“就是这”等方式来回答。其中,“就是这”是一个限定用语,目的是否定还有别的通向涅槃的道路。因为在这里,由于找不到别的道,所以否定别的道就等于否定有其他道存在。称为“圣”,是因为它远离烦恼,这是依词源来说的;也可以说,因为它能导向断除怨敌,所以是“圣”——所谓“怨敌”,就是恶法,通过它,这些恶法离去、消失,因此是“圣”。又因为它是圣者世尊所宣说的,所以属于圣者,这也是“圣”;还因为它能导向获得圣者的境界,所以也是“圣”。不过在这里应当知道,“圣”这个词的成立,是通过省略后分,以“圣所作”来解释的。因为具足八个支分,所以是“八支”。这是在道支的集合上安立“道”这个名称,而集合就是具足各个集合支分的意思。这里词义是:属于它自己的八个支分存在于它之中,所以是“八支”。从究竟意义上说,支本身就是道,就像五支乐器等那样,而不是像六支吠陀那样离开支分另有别体。能杀烦恼而行,所以依词源称为“道”;或者,寻求、探索涅槃,所以是“道”。因为圣道以涅槃为所缘时,就像在寻求一样。或者,被追求涅槃的人所寻求,所以是“道”——从作为转起之缘的福业开始,直到为此而修行。又或者,被他们行走、实践,所以是“道”。在这里,应当知道此词是通过首尾颠倒而成立的。巴利
Idāni taṃ majjhimappaṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetukāmo ‘‘katamā ca sā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayamevā’’tiādinā nayena vissajjesi. Tattha ayamevāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ aññassa nibbānagāmimaggassa atthibhāvapaṭisedhanatthaṃ. Sattāpaṭikkhepo hi idha paṭisedhanaṃ alabbhamānattā aññassa maggassa. Ariyoti kilesānaṃ ārakattā ariyo niruttinayena. Aripahānāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo arayo pāpadhammā yanti apagacchanti etenāti katvā. Ariyena bhagavatā desitattā ariyassa ayantipi ariyo, ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo. Ettha pana ariyakaro ariyotipi uttarapadalopena ariya-saddasiddhi veditabbā. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā aṭṭhaṅgiko. Maggaṅgasamudāye hi maggavohāro, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi samannāgato nāma hoti. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhaṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgikoti. Paramatthato pana aṅgāniyeva maggo pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viya, na ca aṅgavinimutto chaḷaṅgo vedo viya. Kilese mārento gacchatīti maggo niruttinayena, nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti vā maggo. Ariyamaggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karonto gavesanto viya hoti. Nibbānatthikehi maggīyatīti vā maggo vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthapaṭipattito. Gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatīti maggo. Ettha pana ādiantavipariyāyena saddasiddhi veditabbā.
“Seyyathidaṃ”是一个虚词,它的意思是“那是什么”或者“哪些是那八支”。因为这个虚词通用于一切性、格、数的表达。每一支本身就是道。正如经中所说:“正见既是道,也是因。”(《法集论》1039)古代论师也说:“见是道,即正见;安立是道,即正思惟……乃至……不散乱是道,即正定。”难道不是诸支合在一起才叫道吗?因为连缺少七支的圣道都不存在啊。确实如此,这是在证悟真谛的时候说的;但从道缘的角度来说,由于每一支各自执行自己的作用,所以单独来看,它们本身就是道,否则即使是合在一起,它们也无法完成道的作用。在正见等当中:正确地看,就是正见;正确地思惟,把相应法安立在名为涅槃的所缘上,就是正思惟;通过它正确地说话,就是正语;通过它正确地做事,就是正业,也就是正业道;通过它正确地活命,就是正命;正确地精勤、努力,就是正精进;正确地忆念、随念,就是正念;通过它让心正确地等持,就是正定——应该这样理解词义解释。现在,“比丘们,这就是那”这句话,是总结那条修行之道而说的。它的意思是:把四条出世间道合在一起而说的八支道,比丘们,这就是那……乃至……导向涅槃。巴利
Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa katamo so iti ceti attho, katamāni vā tāni aṭṭhaṅgānīti. Sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanasādhāraṇo hi ayaṃ nipāto. Ekamekampi aṅgaṃ maggoyeva. Yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Porāṇāpi bhaṇanti ‘‘dassanamaggo sammādiṭṭhi, abhiniropanamaggo sammāsaṅkappo…pe… avikkhepamaggo sammāsamādhī’’ti. Nanu ca aṅgāni samuditāni maggo antamaso sattaṅgavikalassa ariyamaggassa abhāvatoti? Saccametaṃ saccasampaṭivedhe, maggappaccayatāya pana yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena paccekampi tāni maggoyeva, aññathā samuditānampi tesaṃ maggakiccaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Sammādiṭṭhiādīsu sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme nibbānasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe abhiniropetīti sammāsaṅkappo, sammā vadati etāyāti sammāvācā, sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadeva sammākammanto, sammā ājīvati etenāti sammāājīvo, sammā vāyamati ussahatīti sammāvāyāmo, sammā sarati anussaratīti sammāsati, sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenāti sammāsamādhīti evaṃ nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāni ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhaveti tameva paṭipadaṃ nigamento āha. Tassattho – yvāyaṃ cattāropi lokuttaramagge ekato katvā kathito aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhave…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattatīti.
14 14. 这样从自相上显示了中道之后,现在为了显示四圣谛,就说“然而,比丘们,这是……”等话。其中,在“苦”这个词里,“du”这个音表示可厌。人们把可厌的儿子叫做“恶子”;而“kha”这个音表示空,因为虚空被称为“空”。这第一谛,因为是一切灾祸的依处,所以可厌;因为远离了凡夫所构想的常、净、乐、我性,所以是空。因此,由于可厌和空,就称为“苦”。又因为佛等圣者通达它,所以称为“圣谛”。应当被圣者通达的谛,在前一词中省略后一词,就说成“圣谛”。或者说,是圣者如来的谛,所以是“圣谛”。因为它是如来自己证得并宣说的,也因此能被其他人证得,所以它属于他。或者,因为通达它就能成就圣者的地位,所以它是令成圣的谛,也像前面那样省略后一词而说为“圣谛”。或者,由于不虚妄、应当了知、应当证得,所以是圣者的谛,也就是“圣谛”。至于谛的含义,后面会把四谛合在一起显示。巴利
14. Evaṃ majjhimapaṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetvā idāni cattāri ariyasaccāni dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.530) dukkhanti ettha du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ ‘‘duputto’’ti vadanti, khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘‘kha’’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekaupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato, tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati. Yasmā panetaṃ buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuccati. Ariyapaṭivijjhitabbañhi saccaṃ purimapade uttarapadalopena ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyassa tathāgatassa saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ. Tathāgatena hi sayaṃ adhigatattā paveditattā tato eva ca aññehi adhigamanīyattā taṃ tassa hotīti. Atha vā etassa abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhito ariyasādhakaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ pubbe viya uttarapadalopena . Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā adhigantabbattā ariyaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ. Saccatthaṃ pana catunnampi saccānaṃ parato ekajjhaṃ dassayissāma.
现在,为了如实显示这个苦圣谛,世尊说“生也是苦”等等。这里,“生”这个词有多种含义。比如在“一生、二生”中,它指的是“存在”;在“毗舍佉,有称为尼干陀的沙门种类”中,它指的是“种类”;在“生由二蕴所摄”中,它指的是“有为相”;在“于母胎中,最初生起的心、最初显现的识,依此而有他的生”中,它指的是“结生”;在“阿难,菩萨刚刚出生”中,它指的是“分娩”;在“不被关于出生的言论所轻视、所责难”中,它指的是“家族”。而在这里,对于胎生者,应当理解为从结生开始直到从母胎出来为止,这期间相续生起的诸蕴;对于其他众生,则只取结生那一刹那的诸蕴。这也只是一种方便说法;如果从究竟意义上说,则是在各处投生的众生,其诸蕴显现出来,那些蕴的最初显现,就叫做“生”。巴利
Idāni taṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ jāti-saddo anekattho. Tathā hesa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.148) ettha bhave āgato. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāye. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇe. ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, tadupādāya sāvassa jātī’’ti (mahāva. 124) ettha paṭisandhiyaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūtiyaṃ. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.303) ettha kule. Svāyamidha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchimhā nikkhamanaṃ, tāva pavattesu khandhesu, itaresaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇesvevāti daṭṭhabbo. Ayampi ca pariyāyakathāva, nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti nāma.
为什么它还是苦呢?因为它是许多苦的依托处。苦确实有很多种,比如:苦苦、变易苦、行苦、隐蔽苦、不隐蔽苦、方便说的苦、究竟说的苦。其中,身体的苦受和心的苦受,无论从自性上说还是从名称上说都是苦,所以叫苦苦。乐受,因为它是变易苦生起的原因,所以是变易苦。舍受以及其余三界的一切行,因为被生灭逼迫,所以是行苦。耳痛、牙痛、贪欲的热恼、嗔恨的热恼等身心疾病,要问了才知道,而且发病的原因不明显,所以是隐蔽苦。由三十二种业刑等所产生的疾病,不用问就能知道,而且发病的原因很明显,所以是不隐蔽苦。除了苦苦之外,在《谛分别》里说到的其余苦,比如生等一切,因为它们是各种苦的依托处,所以是方便说的苦。而苦苦则叫做究竟说的苦。在这里,这个“生”之所以是苦,是因为它正是世尊在《愚人贤者经》等经里用譬喻所说明的地狱之苦,也是在善趣人间以入胎等为根本而生起的种种苦的依托处。因此,古德们说:巴利
Kasmā panesā dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhaṃ paṭicchannadukkhaṃ appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ pariyāyadukkhaṃ nippariyāyadukkhanti. Tattha kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanā sabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmadukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhā vedanā ceva sesā ca tebhūmakā saṅkhārā udayabbayapīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādikāyikacetasikā ābādhā pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesadukkhaṃ saccavibhaṅge āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati. Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –
众生若不生于地狱则已;
一旦生于彼处,烈火焚烧等苦实难堪忍。
苦将无处可得立足。
如是,牟尼在此说:生就是苦。
畜生道中苦种种,
鞭杖刺棒捶打生。
彼处云何得有生?
离彼生已,彼亦是苦。
而在饿鬼道中,则有饥渴带来的痛苦,
风、热等所生的种种苦;
因为对于尚未出生的人来说,在那里[苦]并不存在。
所以牟尼也说生是苦。
于极黑闇、难忍严寒之中,
于诸世间间隙,阿修罗众所受之苦——
不在那种有里,也不会有生。
既然有生,就也是苦。
犹如在粪尿地狱,亦如在母胎中;
众生久居彼处,经久方从外出。
离生,则此极可怖之苦亦无;
此生实即是苦。
“ 多说何用?此间无论何处何时,
凡有毫厘之苦生起,岂非皆是此苦?
离生则无苦,
是故大仙最初说此即生。”巴利
‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto; Tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ na kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ; Iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jātiṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda- Daṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ; Vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā- Vātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi; Tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayha sīte; Lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti; Yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātu gabbhe; Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi; Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci; Atthīdha kiñcidapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahena yato mahesi; Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti. (visuddhi. 2.541; vibha. aṭṭha. 191; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
关于“老也是苦”:这里的老有两种,一种是有为相,另一种是在同一生命相续中,被认可为“衰败”等的、属于一生所摄诸蕴的陈旧状态。这里指的是后者。而此老,因为属于行苦,又是苦的所依,所以是苦。因为肢节松弛、诸根变异、容貌丑陋、青春毁坏、精力衰退、念与慧远离、受人轻蔑等种种原因,身心的苦生起,老就是它的所依。因此古德们说:巴利
Jarāpidukkhāti ettha pana duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakkhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca, sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā jarā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca dukkhā. Yañhi aṅgapaccaṅgasithilabhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatāyobbanavināsavīriyāvisādasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekapaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenāhu porāṇā –
因为肢体变得松弛,感官功能也发生衰变;
青春消逝,体力衰败。
“ 凡人无论体验到何种苦,身的或心的,
这一切都以老为因,所以老就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.542; vibha. aṭṭha. 192; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
“病也是苦”这一句,在《分别论》解说苦谛的经文里并没有出现,所以《清净道论》在解说苦谛时也没有引用它,只有在《转法轮经》的经文中才能找到。因此,应该探究为什么它在这里被说到、而在别处却没有被说到。巴利
Byādhipi dukkhoti idaṃ padaṃ vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddesapāḷiyaṃ na āgataṃ, teneva visuddhimaggepi dukkhasaccaniddese taṃ na uddhaṭaṃ, dhammacakkapavattanasuttantapāḷiyaṃyeva pana upalabbhati, tasmā tatthevimassa vacane aññattha ca avacane kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
死也是苦。这里说的死同样有两种:一种是有为相,另一种是在一生当中命根相续的断绝。前者是针对“老死由二蕴所摄”这句话说的;后者是针对“常因死而有怖”这句话说的,这里指的就是后者。生缘死、横死、自然死、寿尽死、福尽死,这些也都是它的名称。应当知道,因为它是苦的所依,所以说为苦。因此古德们说:巴利
Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581; jā. 1.11.88), taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Tayidaṃ dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –
正在观察恶业等相的恶人,
与所爱之人分离,是善人难以忍受的。
临终者所受的苦,主要是心苦,无有分别;
一切众生亦复如是,凡骨节筋腱断截等苦。
身体受伤的人,就会产生身体上的苦受。
“ 因为这苦确实让人无法承受,也没有办法对治;
因为死亡是它的依据,所以这才被说成是苦。”巴利
‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādi-nimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhi-bandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ, hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti. (visuddhi. 2.543; vibha. aṭṭha. 193; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
而在这里,在《分别论》解说苦谛的地方,虽然提到了“愁、悲、苦、忧、恼也是苦”,但这里却没有它,那里的理由也应该去探究。巴利
Imasmiñca ṭhāne ‘‘sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā’’ti vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddese āgataṃ, idha pana taṃ natthi, tatthāpi kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.
“与不喜欢的人相遇是苦”,这里说的“与不喜欢的人相遇”,就是和不可意的众生以及种种造作聚合在一起。这种聚合本身,从苦的根基来说就是苦。所以古德们说:巴利
Appiyehi sampayogo dukkhoti ettha appiyasampayogo nāma amanāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Sopi dukkhavatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 从所依上看也是两种苦,是故大牟尼说之为苦,
与不可爱者相会,当如是了知。”巴利
‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi; Tadupakkamasambhūta-matha kāye yato idha. ‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā; Dukkho vuttoti viññeyyo, appiyehi samāgamo’’ti.
“与喜爱的人分离是苦。”在这里,所谓“与喜爱的人分离”,就是和那些可意的行相分开。它本身也是愁苦的依处,所以是苦。所以古人们说:巴利
Piyehi vippayogo dukkhoti ettha pana piyavippayogo nāma manāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Sopi sokadukkhassa vatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 与亲人、财富等分离,
被愁箭射中,他们备受折磨;
愚者由是,
与所爱者别离,是名为苦。”巴利
‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā; Sokasarasamappitā vitujjanti; Bālā yato tatoyaṃ; Dukkhoti mato piyavippayogo’’ti.
对于“想要却得不到”这一句:在这里,像“啊,但愿我们不是有生的法”这类话里,对得不到的事物生起的欲求,就被说成“想要却得不到,那也是苦”,而这种欲求本身也因为它是苦的依处,所以是苦。因此古德们说:巴利
Yampicchaṃ na labhatīti ettha ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāmā’’tiādīsu alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva ‘‘yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkha’’nti vuttā, sāpi dukkhavatthuto dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –
那些渴望这个那个的人,因为得不到所想要的东西;
众生在这里生起的,那种由忧恼组成的苦。
“ 对得不到的东西生起渴求,就是那苦的成因。
因此,胜者说:求不得就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato; Yaṃ vighātamayaṃ dukkhaṃ, sattānaṃ idha jāyati. ‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ; Yasmā tasmā jino dukkhaṃ, icchitālābhamabravī’’ti.
简单说,五取蕴就是苦。在这里,就像火依柴薪而燃,箭依靶而射,虻蚊之类依牛而咬,收割者依田而割,屠村者依村而毁一样,生等种种苦正是以种种方式恼害这五取蕴,并在五取蕴中生起——就像杂草等长在大地上,花果嫩叶等长在树上。五取蕴最初的苦是生,中间的苦是老,最后的苦是死;对于心愿受挫的人,求不得就是愿望受挫的苦。这样从种种方面去审察时,只有五取蕴是苦。如果要一个一个地展示来说明,即使经过许多劫也说不完。所以,世尊把这一切苦都收摄在五取蕴里来显示,就像把整个大海的水味收摄在一滴水里一样,因此说“简单说,五取蕴就是苦”。因此古德们说:巴利
Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhāti ettha pana yasmā indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti, upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, manorathavighātappattānañca icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcupādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavā avoca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
从出生开始就有的苦,正如那位世尊在此处所说的那样;
凡是没有说到的,离开这些也都不存在。
“ 是故,略说此诸取蕴:
被称为‘苦’,乃由宣说苦边际之大牟尼所说。”巴利
‘‘Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā; Avuttaṃ yañca taṃ sabbaṃ, vinā ete na vijjati. ‘‘Yasmā tasmā upādāna-kkhandhā saṅkhepato ime; Dukkhāti vuttā dukkhanta-desakena mahesinā’’ti.
像这样,从自相的角度显示了苦谛之后,现在为了显示集谛,而说了“诸比丘,这就是苦集”等话。其中,“saṃ”这个音,在“samāgamo、sameta”等词里表示结合;“u”这个音,在“uppannaṃ、udita”等词里表示生起;而“aya”这个音则表示原因。这第二谛,就是在其余诸缘和合时,成为苦生起的原因。因为它是苦的结合与生起之因,所以称为“苦集”。所谓“此渴爱”,就是指这一渴爱。所谓“导致再有”:令再有生起就是“再有”,这是省略了后分词;“以再有为习性”的,就是“导致再有”。“与喜贪俱行”:就是与欢喜和贪染相伴而行。这里说的是:以在任何状态下都不舍弃喜悦与染着的喜贪方式,与之俱行。“于处处欣喜”:无论在哪里结生,就在那里感到欣喜。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato dukkhasaccaṃ dassetvā idāni samudayasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudaya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha saṃ-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo sameta’’ntiādīsu saṃyogaṃ dīpeti, u-iti ayaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu uppattiṃ. Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassuppattikāraṇanti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā ‘‘dukkhasamudaya’’nti vuccati. Yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobbhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punabbhavo uttarapadalopena, punabbhavo sīlametissāti ponobbhavikā. Nandīrāgena sahagatāti nandīrāgasahagatā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘nandanato rajjanato ca nandīrāgabhāvaṃ sabbāsu avatthāsu appaccakkhāya vuttiyā nandīrāgasahagatā’’ti. Tatratatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatratatrābhinandinī.
“即所谓”是一个不变词,它的意思是“那是哪一种呢?”按照色渴爱等的区别,渴爱共有六种;如果按它生起的行相来区分,则说为欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱三种。也就是说:当色渴爱以欲乐的方式生起,品尝着出现在眼前的色所缘时,这时就叫欲渴爱。当色渴爱与认为“那同一所缘是常、是恒”而转起的常见一起生起时,这时就叫有渴爱。与常见相应的贪,就称为“有渴爱”。当色渴爱与认为“那同一所缘断灭、毁坏”而转起的断见一起生起时,这时就叫无有渴爱。与断见相应的贪,就称为“无有渴爱”。对声渴爱等,这个道理也同样适用。巴利
Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamāti ceti ayamattho. Rūpataṇhādibhedena chabbidhāyeva taṇhā pavattiākārabhedato kāmataṇhādivasena tividhā vuttā. Rūpataṇhāyeva hi yadā cakkhussa āpāthamāgataṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayamānā pavattati, tadā kāmataṇhā nāma hoti. Yadā tadevārammaṇaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti pavattāya sassatadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadā bhavataṇhā nāma hoti. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘bhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Yadā pana tadevārammaṇaṃ ucchijjati vinassatīti pavattāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadā vibhavataṇhā nāma hoti. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Esa nayo saddataṇhādīsupi.
那么,为什么这里只把渴爱说成集谛呢?因为它是苦最关键的成因。无明会遮蔽诸有的过患,而见取等执取又在各处紧紧抓住不放,于是让渴爱不断增长;嗔恚等法虽然也是造业的成因,但渴爱却希求各种不同的有、生趣、识住、有情居、众生类别、家族、财富、主权等种种差别,它作为种种业最有力的依止缘,又是业的伙伴,由此决定了后有等的种种差异。所以,虽然经藏和对阿毗达摩中也说到无明、取、业等其他烦恼和不善根等苦因,但由于渴爱是苦最关键的成因,因此唯独说渴爱是“集谛”。应当这样理解。巴利
Kasmā panettha taṇhāva samudayasaccaṃ vuttāti? Visesahetubhāvato. Avijjā hi bhavesu ādīnavaṃ paṭicchādentī diṭṭhiādiupādānañca tattha tattha abhinivisamānaṃ taṇhaṃ abhivaḍḍheti, dosādayopi kammassa kāraṇaṃ honti, taṇhā pana taṃtaṃbhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāāvāsasattanikāyakulabhogissariyādivicittataṃ abhipatthentī kammavicittatāya upanissayataṃ kammassa ca sahāyabhāvaṃ upagacchantī bhavādivicittataṃ niyameti, tasmā dukkhassa visesahetubhāvato aññesupi avijjāupādānakammādīsu sutte abhidhamme ca avasesakilesākusalamūlādīsu vuttesu dukkhahetūsu vijjamānesu taṇhāva ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
现在为了开示苦灭圣谛,世尊说了“诸比丘,此是苦灭”等话。在这里,因为“ni”这个词表示不存在,“rodha”这个词表示牢狱,所以此处称为“苦灭”:因为在一切趣中,被称为轮回牢狱的苦之牢狱完全不存在;或者因为当它被证得时,被称为轮回牢狱的苦之牢狱就不存在了,因为它是其对立面。又或者因为苦的不生与灭尽以此为缘,所以是苦灭。在这里,开示苦灭的人以“即彼渴爱”等方式说了集之灭,为什么这样说呢?因为由集灭而有苦灭。就像病因止息则病止息一样,由因灭故果灭,所以只有由集灭而苦灭,不是由其他方式。因此说:巴利
Idāni dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yasmā ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti, tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, samadhigate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati. Dukkhassa vā anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodhaṃ. Dukkhanirodhaṃ dassentena cettha ‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāyā’’tiādinā nayena samudayanirodho vutto, so kasmā vuttoti ce? Samudayanirodhena dukkhanirodho. Byādhinimittavūpasamena byādhivūpasamo viya hi hetunirodhena phalanirodho, tasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, na aññathā. Tenāha –
“ 就像树根没有受损、还很坚固时,
即使树被砍断,它还是会重新长出来;
同样地,当渴爱的随眠还没有被断除时,
这个苦一次又一次地生起。”巴利
‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe; Chinnopi rukkho punareva rūhati; Evampi taṇhānusaye anūhate; Nibbattatī dukkhamidaṃ punappuna’’nti. (dha. pa. 338);
正因为只有集灭,苦才灭,所以世尊开示苦灭时,是依集灭来教导的。如来确实有和狮子一样的作风。他们在灭苦和开示苦灭时,都从因上下手,而不是从果上下手。就像狮子,当箭射向自己时,它就在那里展示自己的力量,而不是对着箭使劲;同样,诸佛的修行着力处在因,不在果。而外道则像狗一样。他们在灭苦和说苦灭时,通过自我折磨等教说,从果上下手,而不是从因上下手。就像狗被人扔土块时,一边吠叫一边去咬那土块,却不去扑向扔土块的人;同样,其他外道想灭苦,却一味让身体疲惫,而不是灭尽烦恼。这样,就应当知道,世尊以集灭来讲说苦灭,其用意就在这里。巴利
Iti yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā bhagavā dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena desesi. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Yathā hi sīho yenattani saro khitto, tattheva attano balaṃ dasseti, na sare, tathā buddhānaṃ kāraṇe paṭipatti, na phale. Titthiyā pana suvānavuttino. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā attakilamathānuyogadesanādīhi phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhi. Yathā hi sunakhā kenaci leḍḍuppahāre dinne bhussantā leḍḍuṃ khādanti, na pahāradāyake uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ aññatitthiyā dukkhaṃ nirodhetukāmā kāyakhedamanuyujjanti, na kilesanirodhanaṃ, evaṃ tāva dukkhanirodhassa samudayanirodhavasena desanāya payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这里的意思是:“即那渴爱”——说的是前面称为“导致再有”的渴爱,也就是按欲渴爱等分类而说的渴爱。“离贪”指道,因为经中说“由离贪而解脱”。由离贪而灭,就是离贪灭;由于彻底根除随眠而无余的离贪灭,就是无余离贪灭。或者,“离贪”指断除,因此,从随眠的根除来说,无余的离贪、无余的灭——这里的搭配应当这样理解。但从义理上说,所有这些其实都是涅槃的同义词。因为从究竟意义上说,苦灭圣谛就称为涅槃。然而,由于依靠它,渴爱既离染又灭尽,所以称为“离贪”和“灭”。又因为依靠它,才有对渴爱的舍等,而且在这里对欲乐等没有任何执著,所以称为舍、遣离、解脱、无执著。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha attho. Tassāyeva taṇhāyāti tassā ‘‘ponobbhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattataṇhāya. Virāgo vuccati maggo. ‘‘Virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12, 59) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodho asesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā anusayasamugghātato aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā, atthato pana sabbāneva etāni nibbānassa vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodho ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā virajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, tasmā ‘‘virāgo’’ti ca ‘‘nirodho’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā ca tadeva āgamma tassā cāgādayo honti, kāmaguṇālayādīsu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmā cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati.
现在,为了开示导至苦灭之道圣谛,世尊说了“诸比丘,此是导至苦灭之道”等话。因为这条圣谛以所缘之力朝向苦灭、面向苦灭,又是达到苦灭的修行之道,所以称为“导至苦灭之道”。这里剩下的内容跟前面所说的一样。那么,这些苦等的谛相是什么呢?当用智慧之眼仔细考察时,它们并不像幻术那样颠倒,不像阳焰那样欺骗人,也不像外道所说的“我”那样根本没有可得的自性;相反,它们以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离的方式,真实而不颠倒地成为圣智的境界。应当知道,这种真实而不颠倒的状态就是谛相,就像火的特性、世间法性一样。这里,火的特性就是暖热。无论柴火等所依之物怎样变化,暖热从来不会欺骗、颠倒或虚假。应当知道,“有生法、有老法、有死法”这样所说的生等,就是世间法性。有人说:“某些畜生横向生长,人类等纵向生长,达到生长极限后就不再增长,诸如此类也是世间法性。”巴利
Idāni dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāariyasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā panetaṃ ariyasaccaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasaena tadabhimukhabhūtattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Ko pana nesaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ saccaṭṭhoti? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhiyamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīciva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ attā viya anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanappabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva, esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Ettha ca aggilakkhaṇaṃ nāma uṇhattaṃ. Tañhi katthaci kaṭṭhādiupādānabhede visaṃvādakaṃ viparītaṃ abhūtaṃ vā kadācipi na hoti, ‘‘jātidhammā jarādhammā, atho maraṇadhammino’’ti (a. ni. 5.57) evaṃ vuttajātiādikā lokapakatīti veditabbā. ‘‘Ekaccānaṃ tiracchānānaṃ tiriyaṃ dīghatā, manussādīnaṃ uddhaṃ dīghatā, vuddhiniṭṭhappattānaṃ puna avaḍḍhananti evamādikā ca lokapakatī’’ti vadanti.
因为凡是苦,就没有不逼迫人的;而除了苦之外,再没有别的什么能逼迫人。
以能逼迫的决定法则来看,由此认定这才是真理。
苦离彼则不从他处生,彼亦非由彼而来;
依苦因之定律,是故缠缚即谛。
涅槃之外无寂静,彼涅槃亦非无寂;
依寂静性之定则,是故此义名为真。
除道之外别无出离,此道亦非无出离;
以具真实出离性故,彼即共许为真谛。
如是,于四者中皆为真实、不颠倒、如实之性;
以苦等无差别故,智者说此为谛义。巴利
Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ; Bādhakattaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato; Dukkhahetuniyāmena, iti saccaṃ visattikā. Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato; Santabhāvaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so; Tacchaniyyānabhāvattā, iti so saccasammato. Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsupi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitāti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 189);
15 “先前未曾听过”是指:在这之前,对“这是苦”等四谛之法没有听过、以前从未听过。“眼”等只是智的不同叫法。这里,智以现前亲见的含义称为“眼”,以了知的含义称为“智”,以辨别了知的含义称为“慧”,以通达的含义称为“明”,以破除遮蔽四谛的愚痴黑暗、带来光明的含义称为“光”。应当知道,这是就四谛而言,把世间与出世间混合在一起说的。巴利
15.Pubbe ananussutesūti ito pubbe ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā na anussutesu assutapubbesu catusaccadhammesu. Cakkhuntiādīni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇameva hettha paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu viyāti cakkhu, ñāṇaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pakārato jānanaṭṭhena paññā, paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, saccappaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa vidhamanato obhāsanaṭṭhena ālokoti vuttaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ catūsu saccesu lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.
16 “Yāvakīvañca”的意思是“直至,即多少时间”。“三转”是指由谛智、应作智、已作智这三种转所构成的三转。因为依谛智等而有三种转,所以智见被称为三转。其中,对四圣谛——“这是苦圣谛,这是苦集圣谛”——如实了知的智慧,叫谛智。对它们——“应遍知、应断、应证、应修”——了知应做之事的智慧,叫应作智。了知“已遍知、已断、已证、已修”这一已做之事的智慧,叫已作智。“十二行相”是指每一谛各有三种行相,共十二行相。“智见”是指依这三转、十二行相而生起的智所构成的见。巴利
16.Yāvakīvañcāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ. Tiparivaṭṭanti saccañāṇakiccañāṇakatañāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parivaṭṭānaṃ vasena tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Saccañāṇādivasena hi tayo parivaṭṭā etassāti tiparivaṭṭanti vuccati ñāṇadassanaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudaya’’nti evaṃ catūsu saccesu yathābhūtañāṇaṃ saccañāṇaṃ nāma. Tesuyeva ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabba’’nti evaṃ kattabbakiccajānanañāṇaṃ kiccañāṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvita’’nti evaṃ tassa katabhāvajānanañāṇaṃ katañāṇaṃ nāma. Dvādasākāranti tesaṃyeva ekekasmiṃ sacce tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena dvādasākāraṃ. Ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ tiparivaṭṭānaṃ dvādasannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena uppannañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ.
“无上正等菩提”是指没有比它更高的、最殊胜的、正确且自己觉悟的菩提。或者也可以说,是值得称赞的、美好的菩提。这里的“菩提”,指的是世尊的阿拉汉道。那么,声闻的阿拉汉道能不能叫无上菩提呢?不能。为什么?因为它不能带来一切功德。对某些声闻来说,阿拉汉道只带来阿拉汉果;对某些来说,带来三明;对某些来说,带来六神通;对某些来说,带来四无碍解;对某些来说,带来声闻巴拉密智。独觉佛的菩提也只带来独觉菩提智。但诸佛的菩提则能带来一切功德,如同灌顶令国王获得全世间自在地位。因此,对任何其他人都不是无上菩提。再者,“我已正觉”,是指我宣称:“我已正觉,已证得、已通达而住。”如此宣称。“而且我生起了智与见”,是指能如实照见所证功德的省察智在我中生起。“我的解脱不动摇”,是指我这阿拉汉果解脱是不动摇的,不被敌对法所动摇,如此之智生起。其中,应以两种方式了知不动摇性:从作为道的原因以及从所缘两方面。它确实以四种道断除烦恼后不再退转,因此从原因方面说是不动摇的;又以不动摇法涅槃为所缘而转起,因此从所缘方面说是不动摇的,因为不存在以不动摇为所缘的世间等至。最后是指最后的。现在不再有后有,即现在再也没有别的有。巴利
Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ. Atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ. Bodhīti ca bhagavato arahattamaggo idhādhippeto. Sāvakānaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti, buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti. Abhisambuddhoti paccaññāsinti abhisambuddho ahaṃ patto paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitoti evaṃ paṭijāniṃ. Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādīti adhigataguṇānaṃ yāthāvato dassanasamatthaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca pana me udapādi. Akuppā me vimuttīti ayaṃ mayhaṃ arahattaphalavimutti akuppā paṭipakkhehi na kopetabbāti evaṃ ñāṇaṃ udapādi. Tattha dvīhākārehi akuppatā veditabbā maggasaṅkhātakāraṇato ca ārammaṇato ca. Sā hi catūhi maggehi samucchinnakilesānaṃ puna anivattanatāya kāraṇatopi akuppā, akuppadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattatāya ārammaṇatopi akuppā anākuppārammaṇānaṃ lokiyasamāpattīnaṃ tadabhāvato. Antimāti pacchimā. Natthi dāni punabbhavoti idāni puna añño bhavo nāma natthīti.
“在这个解说里”就是指在这部没有偈颂的经里。因为无偈颂的经包含提问和回答,所以称为“解说”。所谓“正在诵说时”,就是正在念诵、正在宣说的时候。“离尘”是指远离了会导向恶趣的贪欲等尘垢,所以叫离尘。“离垢”是指彻底去除了见和疑的垢染,所以叫离垢。或者说,因为脱离了初道所断的烦恼尘,所以叫离尘;因为去除了五种恶戒的垢,所以叫离垢。“法眼”:在《布拉玛优经》里说的是下面三道,在《小罗睺罗教诫经》里说的是漏尽,而这里指的是入流道。在称为四圣谛的诸法中,以“见”这些法的意义为眼,所以叫法眼;或者在下面三道的法中,以入流道这一道为眼,所以叫法眼;又因为是由止观之法产生的,或者因为是戒等三类法蕴所成,所以是法所成的眼,也叫法眼。为了显示它生起的方式,所以说“凡是集起之法,那一切都灭尽”。难道道智不是以无为法为所缘,而是以有为法为所缘吗?确实如此,但因为它以涅槃为所缘,又通过作用门通达一切有为法,以不愚痴的通达方式而通达,所以这样说。巴利
Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ niggāthake sutte. Niggāthakañhi suttaṃ pucchāvissajjanasahitaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Bhaññamāneti bhaṇiyamāne, desiyamāneti attho. Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ. Vītamalanti anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamena vītamalaṃ . Paṭhamamaggavajjhakilesarajābhāvena vā virajaṃ, pañcavidhadussīlyamalāpagamena vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383 ādayo) heṭṭhimā tayo maggā vuttā, cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) āsavakkhayo, idha pana sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. Catusaccasaṅkhātesu dhammesu tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, heṭṭhimesu vā tīsu maggadhammesu ekaṃ sotāpattimaggasaṅkhātaṃ cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, samathavipassanādhammanibbattatāya sīlāditividhadhammakkhandhabhūtatāya vā dhammamayaṃ cakkhūtipi dhammacakkhu, tassa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti āha. Nanu ca maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti? Saccametaṃ, yasmā taṃ nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena sabbasaṅkhataṃ asammohappaṭivedhavasena paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tathā vuttaṃ.
17 17. 所谓“法轮”,是指证悟之智和宣说之智,以“转动”的含义称为“轮”,所以叫法轮。因为,坐在菩提座上时对四圣谛生起的十二种形式的证悟之智,以及坐在仙人堕处时以十二种形式宣说圣谛而转起的宣说之智,这两者都叫法轮。这两者其实都是十力尊心中转起的智。世尊通过这次宣说开示这两者,就称为转了法轮。而这个法轮,直到具寿阿若憍陈如与十八亿梵天众一起立足于入流果为止,世尊还只是在“正在转”,因为转动的作用尚未完成。当它立足时,则称为“已转”,因为从迦叶正自觉者的教法隐没开始,直到佛陀出世,这么长的时间里未曾转起的法轮如今转起了。关于此,说“当世尊转法轮时,地居诸天神发出了声音……”等等。其中,“地居”指地居天神。“发出了声音”指他们立刻发出赞叹,说“这是世尊……”等等而宣告。光明,是由一切知智的威力所生起的心缘时节所生的光明。那时,它超越了诸天神的天威而照耀。阿若憍陈如确实了知了,尊者们,这感叹之声也传遍了一万世界,停留下来。因为,世尊在法轮转动结束时,如同在开始时一样,生起了极其殊胜的喜与悦。巴利
17.Dhammacakketi paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa hi catūsu saccesu uppannaṃ dvādasākāraṃ paṭivedhañāṇampi, isipatane nisinnassa dvādasākārāya saccadesanāya pavattakaṃ desanāñāṇampi dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Ubhayampi hetaṃ dasabalassa ure pavattañāṇameva. Tadubhayaṃ imāya desanāya pakāsentena bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāti, tāva bhagavā pavatteti nāma pavattanakiccassa aniṭṭhitattā. Patiṭṭhite pavattitaṃ nāma kassapasammāsambuddhassa sāsanantaradhānato paṭṭhāya yāva buddhuppādo, ettakaṃ kālaṃ appavattapubbassa pavattitattā. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pavattite ca pana bhagavatā dhammacakke bhummā devā saddamanussāvesu’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhummāti bhūmaṭṭhakadevatā. Saddamanussāvesunti ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘etaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādīni vadantā anussāvayiṃsu. Obhāsoti sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvena pavatto cittapaccayautusamuṭṭhāno obhāso. So hi tadā devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ atikkamitvā virocittha. Aññāsi vata bho koṇḍaññoti imassapi udānassa udāharaṇaghoso dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavato hi dhammacakkappavattanassa ārambhe viya parisamāpanepi ativiya uḷāratamaṃ pītisomanassaṃ udapādi.
18 18. 因为已经见到了圣谛之法,所以称为“见法者”。这个道理也适用于其余几个词。在这里,“见”除了智见之外还有其他含义,为了排除那种含义,所以说“得法者”。而“得”除了智的成就之外也还有其他情况,为了加以区分,所以说“了知法者”。然而这种了知法性也可能只是部分了知,为了显示无余了知,所以说“彻入法者”,以此表明他正是现观圣谛。因为道智以一次现观就完成遍知等作用,所以算是无余地、全面地彻入四圣谛之法。就像充满恐怖的旷野,十六事和八事所摄的疑惑已被他越过,所以是“度疑者”。在生起等情形中,“是这样呢,还是不是这样呢”这样的犹豫已经消失、已经断除,所以是“离犹豫者”。已得无畏:因为断除了令人怯懦的恶法,又善巧安住于其对立面的戒等功德中,所以已经获得、已经证得无畏和明敏。这无畏善安住的状态在哪里呢?所以说“于大师的教法中”。因为是自己现量证得的,所以不依从他人,不会因他人的信仰而在这里生起,没有他人可供他依从,所以是“不依他者”。巴利
18. Diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ettha ca dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti taṃnivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññāpi vijjatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā ekadesatopi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenassa saccābhisambodhiṃyeva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāḷhaṃ nāma hoti. Sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā aṭṭhavatthukā ca tiṇṇā vicikicchā anenāti tiṇṇavicikiccho. Pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nukho na nukho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā vigatā samucchinnā kathaṃkathā assāti vigatakathaṃkatho. Vesārajjappattoti sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā tappaṭipakkhesu ca sīlādīsu guṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto adhigato. Svāyaṃ vesārajjappattisuppatiṭṭhitabhāvo katthāti āha ‘‘satthusāsane’’ti. Attanā paccakkhato adhigatattā na paraṃ pacceti, parassa saddhāya ettha nappavattati, na tassa paro paccetabbo atthīti aparappaccayo.
愿我能得到意思是愿我得到,这是乞求的话。来吧这句话,是为了表明对所乞求的出家与达上的同意,所以意思是:来吧,按照你所乞求的,接受出家与达上这一殊胜之事吧。iti这个词,表示他获得善来比丘达上的因缘之语到此结束,因为他的比丘身份正是以这句话为终点。所以这样说:以世尊说来吧,比丘这句话而成就,那位尊者就是这样获得善来比丘达上的。修习梵行吧,意思是证得称为上三道的梵行。为了什么目的?为了正确地终结苦。这里也应当把说了连接起来。依照九俱胝千等所说的种种分类,受持并践行数千条律仪防护,由此达到最上、最胜的成就,所以叫达上。巴利
Labheyyāhanti labheyyaṃ ahaṃ, āyācanavacanametaṃ. Ehīti āyācitānaṃ pabbajjūpasampadānaṃ anumatabhāvappakāsanavacanaṃ, tasmā ehi sampaṭicchāhi yathāyācitaṃ pabbajjūpasampadavisesanti attho. Iti-saddo tassa ehibhikkhūpasampadāpaṭilābhanimittavacanapariyosānadassano. Tadavasāno hi tassa bhikkhubhāvo. Tenevāha ‘‘ehi bhikkhūti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannā sāva tassa āyasmato ehibhikkhūpasampadā ahosī’’ti. Cara brahmacariyanti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyaṃ samadhigaccha. Kimatthaṃ? Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāya. Idhāpi ‘‘avocā’’ti sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Nava koṭisahassānī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.20; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) vuttappabhedānaṃ anekasahassānaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ samādiyitvā vattanena uparibhūtā aggabhūtā sampadāti upasampadā.
19 19.“带回来的食物”是指带回的食物,意思是:从村里把饭食带出来之后,比丘们带回的食物。因为世尊像照顾幼童一样护持那些比丘,从初分日(初一)那天开始,即使是为了乞食也不进入村庄,只住在精舍内部。巴利
19.Nīhārabhattoti nīhaṭabhatto, gāmato bhikkhaṃ nīharitvā bhikkhūhi dinnabhattoti attho . Bhagavā hi daharakumārake viya te bhikkhū pariharanto pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya piṇḍapātatthāyapi gāmaṃ apavisitvā antovihāreyeva vasi.
《无我相经》注释巴利
Anattalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
20 “告知”是指:从阿沙荼月满月那天转法轮开始,次第地让以阿若憍陈如为首的五比丘众安住于入流果之后,心想“现在我要为他们宣说灭尽诸漏的法”,于是在半月第五日召集了他们。
“无我”,是从不自在、无主、空、遮破我这四个层面来说的。其中,所谓“愿已生起的色不要存续,已存续的不要衰老,已衰老的不要坏灭,不要被生灭所逼迫”——在这里,任何人都没有主宰力,这就是不自在的含义。没有作为所有者的任何人,就是无主的含义。因为没有居住者、造作者、感受者、支配者,所以是空,这就是空的含义。没有他人所构想出来的我的自性,就是遮破我的含义。
现在,为了阐明无我本身,而说了“诸比丘,此色……”等。其中,“如果是我”的意思是:如果是造作者、感受者、能自主的我。如果真是这样,那么色导致疾病就不合理了。这里虽然看起来是以“诸比丘,因为色是无我,所以色导致疾病”来显示由色的无我性而有的苦性,但实际上是以“因为色导致疾病,所以是无我”——通过致病性这一明显事实,显示了色没有我的坚实性,也正是由此显示了“于色中得不到‘愿我的色如此,愿我的色不如此’”,即于色中没有任何人的主宰力,以及它不自在的形态。受等其余诸蕴也应同样理解。巴利
20.Āmantesīti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamadivase dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya anukkamena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhite aññāsikoṇḍaññappamukhe pañcavaggiye ‘‘idāni tesaṃ āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti pañcamiyā pakkhassa āmantesi. Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena asāmikaṭṭhena suññataṭṭhena attapaṭikkhepaṭṭhenāti evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi anattā. Tattha ‘‘uppannaṃ rūpaṃ ṭhitiṃ mā pāpuṇātu, ṭhānappattaṃ mā jīratu, jarappattaṃ mā bhijjatu, udayabbayehi mā kilamayatū’’ti na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo atthi, svāyamassa avasavattanaṭṭho. Sāmibhūtassa kassaci abhāvo asāmikaṭṭho. Nivāsīkārakavedakaadhiṭṭhāyakavirahena tato suññatā suññataṭṭho. Paraparikappitaattasabhāvābhāvo eva attapaṭikkhepaṭṭho. Idāni anattataṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha attā abhavissāti kārako vedako sayaṃvasīti evaṃbhūto attā abhavissāti adhippāyo. Evañhi sati rūpassa ābādhāya saṃvattanaṃ ayujjamānakaṃ siyā. Kāmañcettha ‘‘yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattatī’’ti rūpassa anattatāya dukkhatā vibhāvitā viya dissati, tathāpi ‘‘yasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, tasmā anattā’’ti pākaṭāya sābādhatāya rūpassa attasārābhāvo vibhāvito, tato eva ca ‘‘na ca labbhati rūpe ‘evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’ti’’ rūpe kassaci anissaratā tassa ca avasavattanākāro dassito. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
21 “诸比丘,你们对此怎么想?”这句话是为什么而说的呢?应当知道:到这里为止,只讲了无我相,还没有讲无常相和苦相。现在,为了把这两者展示出来,再把三相合起来显示,所以才开始说这一段。
“尊者,是无常”——因为曾经存在之后便不再存在,所以是无常。因为先前并不存在,依靠各种条件聚合才生起,生起之后又走向坏灭而不再存在,所以不是恒常的,这就是无常,意思是不能持久。或者说,因为具有生灭性、只是暂时存在、终究会变坏、否定恒常——以这些理由,所以是无常。其中,因为一刹那又一刹那地生起和灭去,所以具有生灭性。因为是刹那性的,所以只是暂时存在。因为会变坏,所以终究会变坏。因为色法经历生起等变化而变坏,最终走向毁灭。没有恒常的自性,就是否定恒常。诸法确实是无常的,因此,就以它们自身的无常性,在意义上否定了恒常。巴利
21.Taṃ kiṃmaññatha bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Ettakena ṭhānena anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, na aniccadukkhalakkhaṇāni, idāni tāni dassetvā samodhānetvā tīṇipi lakkhaṇāni dassetuṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Aniccaṃ bhanteti bhante yasmā hutvā na hoti, tasmā aniccaṃ. Yasmā pubbe asantaṃ paccayasamavāyena hutvā uppajjitvā puna bhaṅgupagamanena na hoti, tasmā na niccanti aniccaṃ, addhuvanti adhippāyo. Atha vā uppādavayavantatāya tāvakālikatāya vipariṇāmakoṭiyā niccappaṭikkhepatoti imehipi kāraṇehi aniccaṃ. Ettha khaṇe khaṇe uppajjanavasena nirujjhanavasena ca pavattanato uppādavayavantatā. Taṅkhaṇikatāya tāvakālikatā. Vipariṇāmavantatāya vipariṇāmakoṭi. Rūpañhi uppādādivikārāpajjanena vipariṇāmantaṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti. Niccasabhāvābhāvo eva niccapaṭikkhepo. Aniccā hi dhammā, teneva attano aniccabhāvena atthato niccataṃ paṭikkhipanti nāma.
尊者,所谓“苦”,是以逼迫的方式成为苦。因为色法以生、老、坏灭的方式不间断地逼迫着,所以它以逼迫的方式而具有苦性。或者,也可以从四个角度说它是苦:热恼之义、苦之义、苦所依之义、排斥乐之义。这里,“热恼”是指以苦苦等方式来煎逼、烧灼。正因如此,它难以忍受,所以有苦之义。因为它是三种苦和轮回苦的所依处,所以有苦所依之义。乐的自性根本不存在,这就是排斥乐。
“变坏法”,是指因老和死而具有变坏的性质。
“是否合理?”就是“是否恰当?”。“那”指的是这样无常、苦、变坏法的色。
“这是我的”,是渴爱的执取,来自“我所”的执著。“我是这个”,是慢的执取,来自“我”的执著。“这是我的自我”,是见的执取,来自对自身颠倒的执取。这里,渴爱执应依一百零八种渴爱行相来理解,慢执应依九种慢来理解,见执应依六十二种邪见来理解。正是依这三种渴爱、慢、见的执取,才说“那样观察是否合理?”巴利
Dukkhaṃ bhanteti bhante paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhaṃ. Uppādajarābhaṅgavasena hi rūpassa nirantaraṃ bādhati, paṭipīḷanākārenassa dukkhatā. Atha vā santāpaṭṭhena dukkhamaṭṭhena dukkhavatthukaṭṭhena sukhapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena cāti catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhaṃ. Ettha ca santāpo nāma dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Tato evassa dussahatāya dukkhamatā. Tissannaṃ dukkhatānaṃ saṃsāradukkhassa ca adhiṭṭhānatāya dukkhavatthukatā. Sukhasabhāvābhāvo eva sukhapaṭikkhepo. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya maraṇena ca vipariṇāmasabhāvaṃ. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Tanti evaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ rūpaṃ. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho mamaṅkārabhāvato. Esohamasmīti mānagāho ahaṅkārabhāvato. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho attabhāvavipallāsaggāhato. Taṇhāgāho cettha aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena, mānagāho navavidhamānavasena, diṭṭhigāho dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhivasena veditabbo. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhigāhānaṃ vasena yuttaṃ nu taṃ samanupassitunti vuttaṃ hoti.
世尊就这样,通过无常和苦这两个角度,来显示无我相。世尊有时候从无常的角度来说明无我,有时候从苦的角度,有时候从这两个角度一起说明。比如在《六六经》里说:“如果有人说‘眼是我’,这是站不住的,因为眼的生起和灭去都能被看到。凡是生起和灭去都能被看到的东西,就会让人产生‘我的我在生起、在灭去’这样的想法,所以这是站不住的。如果有人说‘眼是我’,由此可知眼是无我的。”这就是从无常的角度来说明无我。在《无我相经》里说:“比丘们,如果这个色是我……愿我的色不要这样。”这就是从苦的角度来说明无我。在《阿拉汉经》里说:“比丘们,色是无常的,凡是无常的就是苦,凡是苦的就是无我,凡是无我的,就应该以正确的智慧如实观察:‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。’”这就是从两个角度一起说明无我。为什么呢?因为无常和苦是明显的,而无我并不明显。比如器皿之类的东西打碎了,人们会说“哎呀,无常”,却没有人会说“哎呀,无我”。身上长了疮或者被刺扎了,人们会说“哎呀,苦”,却没有人会说“哎呀,无我”。为什么呢?因为这个无我相是不明显的、很难看到的、很难讲清楚的。就连萨拉班嘎那些外道老师都没能看到,更别说讲清楚了。所以世尊才通过无常、苦或者两者一起来显示无我。在这三转法轮里,也是通过无常和苦来显示的。受蕴等其余诸蕴,也是同样的道理。巴利
Iti bhagavā aniccadukkhavasena anattalakkhaṇaṃyeva dassesi. Bhagavā hi katthaci aniccavasena anattataṃ dasseti, katthaci dukkhavasena, katthaci ubhayavasena. Tathā hi ‘‘cakkhu attāti yo vadeyya, taṃ na upapajjati, cakkhussa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ceva veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ na upapajjati. ‘Cakkhu attā’ti yo vadeyya, iti cakkhu anattā’’ti imasmiñca chachakkasutte (ma. ni. 3.422) aniccavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa…pe… evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’ti imasmiṃyeva anattalakkhaṇasutte dukkhavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā, yadanattā, taṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na me so attā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba’’nti imasmiṃ arahantasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.76-77) ubhayavasena anattataṃ dassesi. Kasmā? Aniccaṃ dukkhañca pākaṭaṃ, anattā apākaṭaṃ. Paribhogabhājanādīsu hi bhinnesu ‘‘aho anicca’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Sarīre gaṇḍapiḷakāsu vā uṭṭhitāsu kaṇṭakena vā viddhā ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Kasmā? Idañhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ nāma avibhūtaṃ duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tathā hi sarabhaṅgādayopi satthāro nāddasaṃsu, kuto paññāpanā, tena naṃ bhagavā aniccavasena vā dukkhavasena vā ubhayavasena vā dassesi. Tayidaṃ imasmimpi teparivaṭṭe aniccadukkhavaseneva dassitaṃ. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
22 因此,“所以”这个词只是表达“因此”的意思。“ti”和“ha”这两个是语气词。因为色、受、想、行、识这五蕴是无常、苦、无我的,所以说“因此”。“无论什么”则是毫无遗漏地全部涵盖。其中“凡”是以笼统的方式表示不确定,“什么”则是从种类上区分之后表示不确定。这两者合起来,就把一切应当用中性词来表达的法全都包含进去了——无论是过去的、未来的、现在的,内在的、外在的,粗的、细的,低劣的、殊胜的,远的、近的,少的、多的,也不管是什么形态的。所以“无论什么”就是毫无遗漏地全部涵盖。既然如此,为了避免对其他也应当用中性词来表达的法产生过度的牵扯,也为了限定这里真正要说的意思,就特别指出了“色”。这样一来,通过这两个词,就对色作了毫无剩余的把握。接着,开始对色作过去等的分类,说“过去、未来、现在”等等。也就是说,任何色,有些是过去的,有些是未来的,等等。受等其他蕴也是同样的道理。巴利
22.Tasmātihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ. Ti-kāra ha-kārā nipātā, yasmā ime pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā, tasmāti attho. Yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānametaṃ. Yanti hi sāmaññena aniyamadassanaṃ, kiñcīti pakārato bhedaṃ āmasitvā aniyamadassanaṃ. Ubhayenapi atītaṃ vā…pe… santike vā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā yādisaṃ vā tādisaṃ vā napuṃsakaniddesārahaṃ sabbaṃ byāpetvā saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā anavasesapariyādānametaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti. Evañca sati aññesupi napuṃsakaniddesārahesu pasaṅgaṃ disvā tattha adhippetatthaṃ adhicca pavattanato atippasaṅgassa niyamanatthaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ padadvayenapi rūpassa asesapariggaho kato hoti. Athassa atītādivibhāgaṃ ārabhati ‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinā. Tañhi kiñci atītaṃ kiñci anāgatādibhedanti. Esa nayo vedanādīsupi.
在这里,色首先按时间段、相续、时节、刹那这四种方式,被称为过去、未来、现在。按时间段来说:某一个有情在某一期生命里,从结生之前是过去,从死亡之后是未来,两者之间是现在。按相续来说:同类的温度所生、食所生之色,按前后次第持续生起时是现在;在那之前,由不同类的温度、食所生的是过去;在那之后是未来。心所生之色:同一条心路、同一速行、同一定境所生的是现在;在那之前是过去;在那之后是未来。业所生之色,并没有单独按相续来分过去等的区别;不过应当依据温度生、食生、心生这些色对它的支持作用,来理解它的过去等状态。按时节来说:在某一须臾、上午、下午、夜晚、白天等时节中,按相续持续生起的、属于那个时节的那些色,叫做现在;在那之前是过去;在那之后是未来。按刹那来说:属于生、住、灭这三个刹那的是现在;在那之前是过去;在那之后是未来。这里只有按刹那说的这一种才是究竟的说法,其余那些都是方便的说法。巴利
Tattha rūpaṃ tāva addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā atītaṃ nāma hoti, tathā anāgatapaccuppannaṃ. Tattha addhāvasena tāva ekassa ekasmiṃ bhave paṭisandhito pubbe atītaṃ, cutito uddhamanāgataṃ, ubhinnamantare paccuppannaṃ. Santativasena sabhāgekautusamuṭṭhānaekāhārasamauṭṭhānañca pubbāpariyavasena vattamānampi paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Cittajaṃ ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Kammasamuṭṭhānassa pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi. Tesaṃyeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhakavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattidivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānaṃ taṃtaṃsamayavantaṃ rūpaṃ paccuppannaṃ nāma, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Khaṇavasena uppādādikkhaṇattayapariyāpannaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ, idamevettha nippariyāyaṃ, sesā pariyāyakathā.
“内或外”:眼等五种色,因为是依自身相续而生起的,所以是内;其余的色,因为相对于自身相续是外在的,所以是外。此外还应知道:属于自己相续的,在这里也算内;属于他人相续的,也算外。“粗或细”:眼等九种色,以及除了水界以外的三界,这十二种色因为可以依碰触而被执取,所以是粗;其余的色因为与此相反,所以是细。“劣或胜”:这里,劣和胜可以从方便说和究竟说两方面来理解。其中,相对于阿迦尼吒天的色,善见天的色是劣;而同样的善见天的色,相对于善现天的色又是胜。这样一路比较下去,直到地狱众生的色,都应知道是方便说意义上的劣胜。若依究竟说,凡是作为所缘而使不善异熟识生起的色,因为不可爱,所以是劣;凡是作为所缘而使善异熟识生起的色,因为可爱,所以是胜。就像不善异熟本身是不可爱的,只会在不可爱的所缘上生起,不会在可爱的所缘上生起;同样,善异熟本身是可爱的,也只会在可爱的所缘上生起,不会在不可爱的所缘上生起。“远或近”:凡是细色,因为其自性难以通达,所以是远;其余的色因为其自性容易通达,所以是近。此外,这里也应依处所相对来理解远和近。“那一切”:就是指上面按过去等句分别说明的那一切色。“应以正慧观见”:就是应以与毗婆舍那俱行的道慧来观见。巴利
Ajjhattaṃvā bahiddhā vāti cakkhādipañcavidhaṃ rūpaṃ attabhāvaṃ adhikicca pavattattā ajjhattaṃ, sesaṃ tato bāhirattā bahiddhā. Apica niyakajjhattampi idha ajjhattaṃ, parapuggalikampi ca bahiddhāti veditabbaṃ. Oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vāti cakkhādīni nava, āpodhātuvajjā tisso dhātuyo cāti dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbato oḷārikaṃ, sesaṃ tato viparītattā sukhumaṃ. Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti ettha hīnapaṇītabhāvo pariyāyato nippariyāyato ca. Tattha akaniṭṭhānaṃ rūpato sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ hīnaṃ, tadeva sudassānaṃ rūpato paṇītaṃ. Evaṃ yāva narakasattānaṃ rūpaṃ, tāva pariyāyato hīnapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nippariyāyato pana yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā akusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ aniṭṭhabhāvato. Yaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ katvā kusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ paṇītaṃ iṭṭhabhāvato. Yathā hi akusalavipāko sayaṃ aniṭṭho aniṭṭhe eva uppajjati, na iṭṭhe, evaṃ kusalavipākopi sayaṃ iṭṭho iṭṭheyeva uppajjati, na aniṭṭhe. Yaṃ dūre santike vāti yaṃ sukhumaṃ, tadeva duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā dūre, itaraṃ suppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā santike. Apicettha okāsatopi upādāyupādāya dūrasantikatā veditabbā. Taṃ sabbanti taṃ atītādīhi padehi visuṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ sabbaṃ rūpaṃ. Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbanti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在“任何受”等句中,应当知道:依相续和依刹那,受有过去、未来、现在的状态。其中,依相续来说:属于同一心路、同一速行、同一等至,并与同一类所缘相应而生起的受——比如一个人即使一整天都在看佛像或听法,期间生起的与信等相应的心所伴随的受——是现在;在那之前的,是过去;在那之后的,是未来。依刹那来说:属于三个刹那的,是现在;在那之前的,是过去;在那之后的,是未来。内外的区分,应依自相续来了知。粗与细的区分,应依照《分别论》中所说的“不善受是粗,善受和无记受是细”等方式,从种类、自性、补特伽罗、世间与出世间这几个方面来了知。先就种类来说:不善受,因为从有罪的业因生起、以烦恼热恼为自性、且转起时不寂静,所以比善受粗;因为带有嗔害、带有勤策、带有异熟、以烦恼热恼为自性、且有过失,所以比异熟无记受粗;因为带有异熟、以烦恼热恼为自性、带有损害、且有过失,所以比唯作无记受粗。而善受和无记受,按相反的道理,比不善受细。善和不善两种受,因为带有嗔害、带有勤策、带有异熟,各各比两种无记受粗;两种无记受按相反的道理,比那两种受细。这样,先就种类来说,应当知道粗与细。巴利
Yākāci vedanātiādīsu pana santativasena ca khaṇavasena ca vedanāya atītānāgatapaccuppannabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.497 ādayo) santativasena ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattipariyāpannā ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca divasampi buddharūpaṃ passantassa dhammaṃ suṇantassa pavattasaddhādisahitavedanā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Khaṇavasena khaṇattayapariyāpannā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ajjhattabahiddhābhedo niyakajjhattavasena veditabbo. Oḷārikasukhumabhedo ‘‘akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 11) vuttena jātisabhāvapuggalalokiyalokuttaravasena veditabbo. Jātivasena tāva akusalavedanā sāvajjakiriyahetuto kilesasantāpasabhāvato ca avūpasantavuttīti kusalavedanāya oḷārikā, sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sāvajjato ca vipākābyākatāya oḷārikā, savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sabyāpajjato sāvajjato ca kiriyābyākatāya oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalāya sukhumā. Dvepi kusalākusalavedanā sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato ca yathāyogaṃ duvidhāyapi abyākatāya oḷārikā, vuttavipariyāyena duvidhāpi abyākatā tāhi sukhumā. Evaṃ tāva jātivasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
从自性来看,苦受因为没有可品味之处、带有逼迫性、令人厌恶、能压制其他感受,所以比另外两种受更粗;另外两种受则因为适意、寂静、殊胜、可意、中性,各自相应地比苦受更细。而苦受和乐受这两种,因为有逼迫性、能引起动荡、又明显,所以比不苦不乐受更粗;不苦不乐受则按相反的道理,比那两种受更细。这样,应当从自性的角度来理解粗和细。
从个人来看,未入定者的受,因为心散乱在种种所缘上,所以比入定者的受更粗;反过来,另一种受就更细。这样,应当从个人的角度来理解粗和细。
从世间和出世间的角度来看,有漏受是世间的。它因为是诸漏生起的原因、被暴流所摄、被轭所摄、被系缚所摄、被盖所摄、被取所摄、有杂染、与凡夫共通,所以比无漏受更粗;无漏受则按相反的道理,比有漏受更细。这样,应当从世间和出世间的角度来理解粗和细。巴利
Sabhāvavasena pana dukkhavedanā nirassādato savipphārato ubbejanīyato abhibhavanato ca itarāhi dvīhi oḷārikā, itarā pana dve sātato santato paṇītato manāpato majjhattato ca yathāyogaṃ dukkhāya sukhumā. Ubho pana sukhadukkhā savipphārato khobhakaraṇato pākaṭato ca adukkhamasukhāya oḷārikā, sā vuttavipariyāyena tadubhayato sukhumā. Evaṃ sabhāvavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Puggalavasena pana asamāpannassa vedanā nānārammaṇavikkhittabhāvato samāpannassa vedanāya oḷārikā, vipariyāyena itarā sukhumā. Evaṃ puggalavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Lokiyalokuttaravasena pana sāsavā vedanā lokiyā. Sā āsavuppattihetuto oghaniyato yoganiyato ganthaniyato nīvaraṇiyato upādāniyato saṃkilesikato puthujjanasādhāraṇato ca anāsavāya oḷārikā, sā vipariyāyena sāsavāya sukhumā. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
在这里,要避免因为种类等角度而混在一起。与不善异熟身识相应的受,从种类上说,因为是无记,所以虽然是细的,但从自性等角度说,它又是粗的。确实有这样的说法:“无记受是细的,苦受是粗的。未得定的人的受是粗的,有漏受是粗的。”就像苦受一样,乐受等受从种类上说是粗的,从自性等角度说是细的。因此,应当像这样了解诸受的粗细:不要从种类等角度把它们混在一起。比如,无记受从种类上说,比善受和不善受细。在这里,不应该从“哪个是无记?哪个是苦?哪个是乐?哪个是得定的人的?哪个是未得定的人的?哪个是有漏的?哪个是无漏的?”这样从自性等角度去执取分别。这个道理适用于一切地方。巴利
Tattha jātiādivasena sambhedo pariharitabbo. Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttā hi vedanā jātivasena abyākatattā sukhumāpi samānā sabhāvādivasena oḷārikā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā’’ti (vibha. 11). Yathā ca dukkhavedanā, evaṃ sukhādayopi jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvādivasena sukhumā honti. Tasmā yathā jātiādivasena sambhedo na hoti, tathā vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ – abyākatā jātivasena kusalākusalāhi sukhumā. Na tattha ‘‘katamā abyākatā, kiṃ dukkhā, kiṃ sukhā, kiṃ samāpannassa, kiṃ asamāpannassa, kiṃ sāsavā, kiṃ anāsavā’’ti evaṃ sabhāvādibhedo parāmasitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.
另外,按照“应当依着每一种受,来看待受是粗还是细”这种说法,在不善等受当中,与嗔相应的受就像火一样会烧掉自己的所依,所以是粗的;与贪相应的受则是细的。与嗔相应的受当中,决定的是粗的,不定的是细的。决定当中,住劫的是粗的,其余的是细的。住劫当中,无行的是粗的,其余的是细的。与贪相应的受当中,与见相应的是粗的,其余的是细的。那些当中,决定、住劫、无行的也是粗的,其余的是细的。总的来说,不善当中能感得多异熟的是粗的,感得少异熟的是细的;善当中感得少异熟的是粗的,感得多异熟的是细的。巴利
Apica ‘‘taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā oḷārikā sukhumā daṭṭhabbā’’ti vacanato akusalādīsupi lobhasahagatāya dosasahagatavedanā aggi viya attano nissayadahanato oḷārikā, lobhasahagatā sukhumā. Dosasahagatāpi niyatā oḷārikā, aniyatā sukhumā. Niyatāpi kappaṭṭhitikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kappaṭṭhitikāsupi asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Lobhasahagatā pana diṭṭhisampayuttā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sāpi niyatā kappaṭṭhitikā asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā, avisesena akusalā bahuvipākā oḷārikā, appavipākā sukhumā. Kusalā pana appavipākā oḷārikā, bahuvipākā sukhumā.
另外,欲界的善法是粗的,色界的善法是细的,无色界的善法比色界更细,出世间的善法又比无色界更细。在欲界善法当中,布施所成的善法是粗的,持戒所成的善法是细的,比持戒更细的是修习所成的善法。在修习所成的善法当中,二因的善法是粗的,三因的善法是细的。在三因的善法当中,有行的善法是粗的,无行的善法是细的。在色界善法当中,初禅的善法是粗的……乃至第五禅的善法是细的。在无色界善法当中,与空无边处相应的善法是粗的……乃至与非想非非想处相应的善法是细的。在出世间善法当中,与入流道相应的善法是粗的……乃至与阿拉汉道相应的善法是细的。这个道理同样适用于各地各自的异熟与唯作之受,也适用于按苦受等、非等至等、有漏等分别所说的各种受。巴利
Apica kāmāvacarakusalā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā, tato arūpāvacarā, tato lokuttarā. Kāmāvacarā ca dānamayā oḷārikā, sīlamayā sukhumā, tato bhāvanāmayā. Bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā oḷārikā , tihetukā sukhumā. Tihetukāpi sasaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, asaṅkhārikā sukhumā. Rūpāvacarā paṭhamajjhānikā oḷārikā…pe… pañcamajjhānikā sukhumāva. Arūpāvacarā ākāsānañcāyatanasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasampayuttā sukhumāva. Lokuttarā ca sotāpattimaggasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… arahattamaggasampayuttā sukhumāva. Esa nayo taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyavedanāsu dukkhādiasamāpannādisāsavādivasena vuttavedanāsu ca.
从处所来看,地狱里的苦受是粗的,畜生道里的苦受是细的……乃至他化自在天的苦受也是细的。就像苦受一样,乐受也应当根据各处的情况相应地套用。从事物对象来看,凡是依于低劣对象的受就是粗的,依于殊胜对象的受就是细的。在粗与细、劣与胜的区分中,凡是粗的就是劣的,凡是细的就应当知道是殊胜的。至于“远”这一项,则是按“不善受与善受、无记受相隔远,不善受与不善受相近”这样的方式来分别的。因此,不善受因为类别不同、不相混杂、不相似,所以与善受和无记受相隔远;同样,善受和无记受与不善受也相隔远。这个道理适用于所有情况。而不善受因为类别相同、相混杂、相似,所以与不善受相近。与各种受相应的想等心所,也应当这样来理解。巴利
Okāsavasena cāpi niraye dukkhā oḷārikā, tiracchānayoniyaṃ sukhumā…pe… paranimmitavasavattī sukhumāva. Yathā ca dukkhā, evaṃ sukhāpi sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ yojetabbā. Vatthuvasena cāpi hīnavatthukā yā kāci vedanā oḷārikā, paṇītavatthukā sukhumā. Hīnappaṇītabhede yā oḷārikā, sā hīnā. Yā ca sukhumā, sā paṇītāti veditabbā. Dūrapadaṃ pana akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi vedanāhi dūre, santikapadaṃ akusalā vedanā akusalāya vedanāya santiketiādinā nayena vibhattaṃ. Tasmā akusalā vedanā visabhāgato asaṃsaṭṭhato asarikkhato ca kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tathā kusalābyākatā akusalāya. Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Akusalā pana vedanā sabhāgato ca saṃsaṭṭhato ca sarikkhato ca akusalāya santiketi. Taṃtaṃvedanāsampayuttānaṃ pana saññādīnampi evameva veditabbaṃ.
23 多闻者:因为具备被称为“闻持”和“证得”的多闻,所以是多闻者。厌离:就是厌倦。在这里,厌离指的是导向出起的观智。厌离者离染:在这里,依离染而说了四道。由离染而解脱:就是以离染之道为因,依寂止解脱而解脱。以此说了四沙门果。于解脱中有“已解脱”之智:以此说了省察智。“生已尽”等是它的范围。因为圣弟子以那智省察时,了知“生已尽”等。那么,他的什么生已尽?又如何了知?并不是他过去的生已尽,因为过去早已尽;也不是未来的生,因为未来没有精勤;也不是现在的生。然而,由于道未修习时,会在有一、四、五蕴的生命中生起的、分为一、四、五蕴的那种生,由于道已修习,成为无生法而尽灭。他省察由修道所断的烦恼,了知在烦恼不存在时,即使有业,未来也不结生,如此而了知。巴利
23.Sutavāti āgamādhigamasaṅkhātena bāhusaccena samannāgatattā sutavā. Nibbindatīti ukkaṇṭhati. Ettha ca nibbidāti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā adhippetā. Nibbindaṃ virajjatīti ettha virāgavasena cattāro maggā kathitā. Virāgā vimuccatīti virāgena maggeneva hetubhūtena paṭippassaddhivimuttivasena vimuccati. Iminā cattāri sāmaññaphalāni kathitāni. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā pana paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmi. Tena hi ñāṇena ariyasāvako paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni pajānāti. Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto pajānāti.
“已住”是指已经住过、完全住过,也就是已经做了、已经修了、已经完成的意思。“梵行”是指道的梵行。因为七有学以及凡夫善人都与道梵行共住,所以说他们“住于梵行”;而漏已尽的人则是已经住完了,所以圣弟子在回顾自己的梵行住时,知道“梵行已住”。
“应作已作”是指:在四谛上,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习这四种方式,应当完成的十六种作用都已经完成了。因为凡夫善人等人还在做这些事,而漏已尽的人则是应作已作。“不受后有”是指了知“现在,为了如此状态、如此十六种事的状态,或为了烦恼的灭尽,我已无道修习之事”。“如此状态”是指像这样的状态,从此现前持续的五蕴相续,我不再有另一五蕴相续,而这些五蕴已遍知,如断根之树般住立。巴利
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā maggabrahmacariyaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā ariyasāvako attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti pajānāti. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā ariyasāvako attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvā imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti pajānāti.
24 那些比丘满心欢喜,对世尊所说的话表示赞同。意思是:那些比丘自心欢喜、内心满足;或者说,他们因喜悦与愉悦而内心满足。世尊正以梵音说法,那声音像迦陵频伽鸟鸣一样悦耳,像甘露灌顶一样滋润智者心田;他们便以头顶受持的方式,对世尊所宣说的善说、妙语表示赞同和接受:“世尊,正是这样!善逝,正是这样!”这就是这段的意思。这里“abhinanda”这个词,在“abhinandati abhivadati”等用法中,也用来指渴爱;在“Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā”等用法中,则指欢迎。巴利
24.Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti te bhikkhū sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā, pītisomanassehi vā samattamanā hutvā karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsato bhagavato vacanaṃ sukathitaṃ sulapitaṃ ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti matthakena sampaṭicchantā anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cāti attho. Ayañhi abhinanda-saddo ‘‘abhinandati abhivadatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.114, 118) taṇhāyapi āgato. ‘‘Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.43) upagamanepi.
“ 一个离家很久的人,从远方平安归来,
亲戚、朋友和知己,都欢喜他回来了。”巴利
‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ; Ñātimittā suhajjā ca, abhinandanti āgata’’nti. (dha. pa. 219; vi. va. 861) –
在“等等”里,也用于接受。在“欢喜、随喜”等等里,也用于随喜。这里它适用于随喜和接受,所以说“既随喜又接受”。“心无执取,从诸漏解脱”:不执取,不抓取任何法为“我”或“我的”,不取着,从那些以不再生起的方式而灭尽的诸漏中,心就这样解脱了。“六位阿拉汉”:就是与世尊一起成为阿拉汉的六个人。不过,因为其他天神和梵天神也有证得阿拉汉的可能,这里是专指人间的阿拉汉而说的,所以讲“六位人间阿拉汉”。巴利
Ādīsu sampaṭicchanepi. ‘‘Abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) anumodanepi. Svāyamidha anumodanasampaṭicchanesu yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti. Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamānehi āsavehi anupādāya aggahetvā kañci dhammaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti anādiyitvāva cittāni vimucciṃsu. Cha arahantoti bhagavatā saddhiṃ cha janā arahanto. Aññesaṃ pana devabrahmānampi arahattappattisambhavato idaṃ manussaarahanteyeva sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘cha manussā arahanto hontī’’ti.
亚萨出家这件事的注释巴利
Yasassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
25 25. 现在为了说明亚萨的出家,开始讲“那时……”这一段。这里对其中不明显词句的解释如下:在“冬季的”等说法中(《长部注》2.42;《增支部注》2.3.39),凡是冬天住着舒服的地方,就叫“冬季的”。其余几个词也是同样的道理。这里的词义是:冬天居住的地方,省略后半个词,就成了“冬季”;适合冬天用的,就叫“冬季的”。其余几个词也是同样的道理。其中,雨季的殿堂不高也不低,门窗不多也不少,这里的地面铺设、覆盖物、嚼食和正餐也都搭配得恰到好处。冬季的殿堂,柱子和墙壁都低矮,门窗薄而细,有小孔,为了引进暖气而开有壁龛,这里的地面铺设、覆盖物、下衣和上衣则用能散发热气的毛毯之类,嚼食和正餐是油腻而带辛辣的。夏季的殿堂,柱子和墙壁都高大,这里的门窗又多又宽大,地面铺设用能散凉的亚麻织物,嚼食和正餐是甘甜清凉的,并且在窗边放上新瓮,装满水,用青莲花等盖住,在各个地方安设水轮,水就从那里流出来,像天上下雨时的水流一样。巴利
25. Idāni yasassa pabbajjaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – hemantikotiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.42; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.39) yattha sukhaṃ hoti hemantakāle vasituṃ, ayaṃ hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – hemante vāso hemantaṃ uttarapadalopena, hemantaṃ arahatīti hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha vassiko pāsādo nātiucco hoti nātinīco, dvāravātapānānipissa nātibahūni nātitanūni, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇakhajjabhojjānipettha missakāneva vaṭṭanti. Hemantike thambhāpi bhittiyopi nīcā honti, dvāravātapānāni tanukāni sukhumachiddāni, uṇhappavesanatthāya bhittiniyyūhāni hariyanti, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇanivāsanapārupanāni panettha uṇhavikiriyāni kambalādīni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjaṃ siniddhaṃ kaṭukasannissitañca. Gimhike thambhāpi bhittiyopi uccā honti, dvāravātapānāni panettha bahūni vipulajātāni honti, bhūmattharaṇāni sītavikiriyāni dukūlamayāni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjāni madhurarasasītavikiriyāni, vātapānasamīpesu cettha navā cāṭiyo ṭhapetvā udakassa pūretvā nīluppalādīhi sañchādenti, tesu tesu padesesu udakayantāni karonti, yehi deve vassante viya udakadhārā nikkhamanti.
“没有男人”是指没有男子。而且这里不只是奏乐的地方没有男人,所有地方都没有男人。守门的也是女人,做沐浴等杂役的也是女人。据说他父亲想:“要是让人看见他正享受着这样的权势和欲乐,难免会起疑心,但愿我儿子别碰上这种事。”所以一切事务都只安排女人去做。“以五种欲乐”是指色、声等五种欲的部分。“完全投入”是指正确地投入,也就是具备的意思。“具足”是同一个意思的另一种说法。“享受”是指四处周遍地活动,也就是在种种欲乐上运用诸根的意思。“Āḷambara”是指鼓。“Vikesika”是指头发散乱,即披头散发之意。“Vikkheḷika”是指流着口水。“Vippalapanti”是指颠倒胡言或哭泣。“视为冢墓”是指见自身眷属犹如见到新尸林,与此相应。“发优陀那”是指因悚惧而发出优陀那,即吐出由悚惧所转起之语的意思。巴利
Nippurisehīti purisavirahitehi. Na kevalañcettha tūriyāneva nippurisāni, sabbaṭṭhānānipi nippurisāneva. Dovārikāpi itthiyova, nahāpanādiparikammakarāpi itthiyova. Pitā kira ‘‘tathārūpaṃ issariyasukhasampattiṃ anubhavamānassa purisaṃ disvā parisaṅkā uppajjati, sā me puttassa mā ahosī’’ti sabbakiccesu itthiyova ṭhapāpesi. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti rūpasaddādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Samappitassāti sammā appitassa, upetassāti attho. Samaṅgībhūtassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paricārayamānassāti parito cārayamānassa, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāmaguṇe indriyāni cārayamānassāti attho. Āḷambaranti paṇavaṃ. Vikesikanti muttakesaṃ, vippakiṇṇakesanti attho. Vikkheḷikanti vissandamānalālaṃ. Vippalapantiyoti viruddhaṃ palapantiyo vā rudantiyo vā. Susānaṃ maññeti āmakasusānaṃ viya addasa sakaṃ parijananti sambandho. Udānaṃ udānesīti saṃvegavasena udānaṃ udānesi, saṃvegavasappavattaṃ vācaṃ nicchāresīti attho.
26 “这是耶舍啊”——世尊这句话是指着涅槃说的。因为涅槃确实不被渴爱等烦恼所逼迫、所缠附。“次第说法”(《长部注》2.75;《中部注》2.69),是指布施之后接着讲戒,戒之后接着讲天,天之后接着讲道,像这样按顺序依次而说。
其中,布施论是这样的:“这布施被称为安乐的因、成就的根本、财富的根基;对于误入歧途的人,它是救护、庇护、归趣、依止。在此世和他世,没有别的什么能像布施那样充当依怙、基址、所缘、救护、庇护、归趣、依止。这布施,从依怙的意义上说,如同宝石所成的狮子座;从基址的意义上说,如同大地;从所缘的意义上说,如同攀缘的绳索;从度脱苦难的意义上说,如同舟船;从安慰的意义上说,如同战场上的勇士;从防护怖畏的意义上说,如同善加修筑的城池;从不被悭吝之垢等染污的意义上说,如同莲花;从焚毁这些的意义上说,如同火;从难以靠近的意义上说,如同毒蛇;从无所畏惧的意义上说,如同狮子;从有力的意义上说,如同大象;从被公认为最吉祥的意义上说,如同白牛王;从到达安稳之地的意义上说,如同云马王。这布施是我所走过的路,是我的传承。我在圆满十巴拉密时,曾举行过毗罗摩大施、大果文达大施、大善见大施、韦桑德拉大施等许多大施;我曾生为兔时,在炽燃的火堆中献出自身,以此摄取了前来乞求者的心。布施在世间能带来帝释天神的成就、魔的成就、梵的成就、转轮王的成就、声闻巴拉密智、独觉菩提智、正等觉智。”——像这样,就是与布施功德相关的说法。巴利
26.Idaṃ kho yasāti bhagavā nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi taṇhādīhi kilesehi anupaddutaṃ anupassaṭṭhañca. Anupubbiṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.75; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.69) dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ, sīlānantaraṃ saggaṃ, saggānantaraṃ magganti evamanupaṭipāṭikathaṃ. Tattha dānakathā nāma ‘‘idaṃ dānaṃ nāma sukhānaṃ nidānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ, bhogānaṃ patiṭṭhā, visamagatassa tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ, idhalokaparalokesu dānasadiso avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi. Idañhi avassayaṭṭhena ratanamayasīhāsanasadisaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena mahāpathavīsadisaṃ, ārammaṇaṭṭhena ālambanarajjusadisaṃ, idañhi dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena nāvā, samassāsanaṭṭhena saṅgāmasūro, bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhena susaṅkhatanagaraṃ, maccheramalādīhi anupalittaṭṭhena padumaṃ, tesaṃ nidahanaṭṭhena aggi, durāsadaṭṭhena āsīviso, asantāsanaṭṭhena sīho, balavantaṭṭhena hatthī, abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhena setausabho, khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭhena valāhako assarājā. Dānaṃ nāmetaṃ mayā gatamaggo, mayheveso vaṃso, mayā dasa pāramiyo pūrentena velāmamahāyaññā mahāgovindamahāyaññā mahāsudassanamahāyaññā vessantaramahāyaññāti aneke mahāyaññā pavattitā, sasabhūtena jalite aggikkhandhe attānaṃ niyyātentena sampattayācakānaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ. Dānañhi loke sakkasampattiṃ deti, mārasampattiṃ brahmasampattiṃ cakkavattisampattiṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ abhisambodhiñāṇaṃ detī’’ti evamādinā dānaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.
因为布施的人能够受持戒,所以世尊在讲布施之后紧接着讲戒论。所谓布施,就是以利益应受供养者的心或恭敬的心,把属于自己的东西让给他人。因此,布施者是对众生一向怀着利益之心的善男子,绝不可能去夺取别人的东西,这是不可能的。所以,布施的人能够受持戒,因此说布施之后就是戒。再者,布施论在普通人中也广泛流传,是所有人都能共通的,容易实行,而且是安立于戒的方便,所以先讲。因为具有舍心之德的人,对所占有的东西没有执著,所以能轻松地受持诸戒,并且在戒上稳稳地安立。由戒而使施者和受者都清净,说了利他之后;又由止息害他之说而说应作之法;由说不应作之法而说财富与名声成就之因;再由说有成就之因之说,所以世尊在布施论之后讲戒论。巴利
Yasmā pana dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkoti, tasmā tadanantaraṃ sīlakathaṃ kathesi. Dānañhi nāma dakkhiṇeyyesu hitajjhāsayena pūjanajjhāsayena vā attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanaṃ, tasmā dāyako sattesu ekantahitajjhāsayo purisapuggalo, paresaṃ vā santakaṃ haratīti aṭṭhānametaṃ. Tasmā dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkotīti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Apica dānakathā tāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā sukarattā sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathitā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato bhogayasasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā.
戒论是这样的内容:“戒是依靠、是立足处、是所缘、是庇护、是洞穴、是归趣、是归宿。戒是我的世系——我在僧伽护龙王时、广财龙王时、瞻波耶龙王时、戒胜王时、养母象王时、六牙象王时,在无量生中都圆满了戒。在这个世界和来世的成就中,确实没有像戒这样的依靠,没有像戒这样的立足处、所缘、庇护、洞穴、归趣、归宿;没有像戒的庄严那样的庄严;没有像戒的花那样的花;没有像戒的香那样的香。因为用戒的庄严来庄严、佩戴戒的花鬘、涂上戒的香的人,即使连同天人在内的世间都来观看,也不会感到满足。”以上就是与戒的功德相关的论述。巴利
Sīlakathā nāma ‘‘sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ. Sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mama vaṃso, ahaṃ saṅkhapālanāgarājakāle bhūridattanāgarājakāle campeyyanāgarājakāle sīlavarājakāle mātuposakahatthirājakāle chaddantahatthirājakāleti anantesu attabhāvesu sīlaṃ paripūresiṃ. Idhalokaparalokasampattīnañhi sīlasadiso avassayo sīlasadisā patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi, sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi, sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthi, sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthi. Sīlālaṅkārena hi alaṅkataṃ sīlakusumapiḷandhanaṃ sīlagandhānulittaṃ sadevakopi loko olokento tittiṃ na gacchatī’’ti evamādisīlaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.
这段戒之后紧接着讲生天论,是为了说明:依靠这个戒,就能得到这样的天界。所谓生天论,就是讲与天界功德相关的一类话,比如:“此天界是可爱、可意、可悦的,那里永远有娱乐,永远能得到种种圆满。四大王天的天神们享受九百万年的天乐和天福,三十三天的天神们享受三千万年再加六百万年,合计三千六百万年……”诸佛在宣说天界福报时,嘴巴也讲不完。这也正如经文所说:“比丘们,我可以用多种方式讲说生天论”等等。巴利
Idaṃ pana sīlaṃ nissāya ayaṃ saggo labbhatīti dassanatthaṃ sīlānantaraṃ saggakathaṃ kathesi. Saggakathā nāma ‘‘ayaṃ saggo nāma iṭṭho kanto manāpo , niccamettha kīḷā, niccaṃ sampattiyo labbhanti, cātumahārājikā devā navutivassasatasahassāni dibbasukhaṃ dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhanti, tāvatiṃsā tisso ca vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasatasahassānī’’ti evamādisaggaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttakathā. Saggasampattiṃ kathayantānañhi buddhānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘anekapariyāyena kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, saggakathaṃ katheyya’’ntiādi.
先用天界的说法把人引诱过来,接着又像把大象打扮好再砍掉它的鼻子那样,为了说明“这天界也是无常、不持久的,不该对它生起欲贪”,就按“诸欲乐味少、苦多、忧恼多,这里的过患更大”这类经文的方式,讲说了诸欲的过患、卑劣和杂染。其中,“过患”就是过失,意思是由于无常等和乐味少等而被败坏的状态。或者,“过患”就是“流向卑下”,也就是极度可怜的状态。诸欲正是这样,在如实观察它们的人面前显现出来。“卑劣”就是低劣、下贱,是不殊胜的人所亲近的,殊胜的人不亲近。“杂染”就是众生被这些欲所染污,意思是应当被逼迫、应当被烧恼。巴利
Evaṃ saggakathāya palobhetvā puna hatthiṃ alaṅkaritvā tassa soṇḍaṃ chindanto viya ayampi saggo anicco addhuvo, na ettha chandarāgo kātabboti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.177; pāci. 417) nayena kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ kathesi. Tattha ādīnavoti doso, aniccatādinā appassādatādinā ca dūsitabhāvoti attho. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, paramakapaṇatā. Tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti. Okāroti lāmakabhāvo nihīnabhāvo aseṭṭhehi sevitabbatā seṭṭhehi na sevitabbatā ca. Saṃkilesoti tehi sattānaṃ saṃkilissanaṃ, vibādhetabbatā upatāpetabbatāti attho.
像这样用欲的过患来警吓之后,就开示出离的利益。诸欲中有多少过患,从相反的一面来说,出离中就有多少利益。再者,又依“出离即是不拥挤、不杂染,从欲中出离,从欲想中出离,从欲寻中出离,从欲热恼中出离,从事务中出离”等这样的方式,开示出离的利益,并对出家以及禅定等的功德加以阐明、称赞。在这里,说了天界之后,为了显示这个天界被贪等所杂染,而圣道在一切方面都无杂染,所以应当在天界之后讲说圣道。讲说圣道时,为了显示证得那圣道的方法,应当说:包括在天界之内的,更何况其他一切诸欲,都确实多过患、无常、不坚固、是变坏之法,这就是诸欲的过患;它们卑劣、粗俗、是凡夫所行、非圣者所行、与无义相应,这就是它们的卑劣与低劣;一切存在都是烦恼的依处,这就是其中的杂染;涅槃远离一切杂染,这就是出离的利益。应当知道,这样就是开示了诸欲中的过患、卑劣、杂染,以及出离中的利益。巴利
Evaṃ kāmādīnavena tajjetvā nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi. Yattakā ca kāmesu ādīnavā, paṭipakkhato tattakāva nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Apica ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpārato’’tiādinā nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi, pabbajjāya jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi. Ettha ca saggaṃ kathetvā svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbathāpi anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggo kathetabbo. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyasandassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso, sabbasaṃkilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti kāmesu ādīnavo okāro saṃkileso nekkhamme ca ānisaṃso pakāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“堪任心”是指适合作业的心。因为通过前面所说的教法,不信等心的过失已经离去,于是具备成为后面教法之法器的条件,所以叫堪任作业的心。或者说,不信等是心的病,那时这些病已经离去,因此“堪任心”就是无病的心。由于见、慢等烦恼离去,所以是柔软心;由于欲贪等离去,所以是无盖心;由于与正行道中广大的喜悦相应,所以是踊跃心。其中,以信成就故为净信心,当世尊了知时,应这样连接理解。或者,“堪任心”是因欲贪离去而无病的心。“柔软心”是因瞋恚离去而以慈心故不坚硬的心。“无盖心”是因掉举、恶作离去,散乱已去,因此不被它们覆盖的心。“踊跃心”是因惛沉、睡眠离去,以策励而不沉滞的心。“净信心”是因疑离去,于正行道决意之心——此处应如此了知义理。“Sāmukkaṃsikā”即“sāmaṃ ukkaṃsikā”,是自己拔取而执取的,是以自生智所见、不共于他人的意思。那又是什么呢?是圣谛的教法。因此说“苦、集、灭、道”。巴利
Kallacittanti kammaniyacittaṃ, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacittanti attho. Assaddhiyādayo vā yasmā cittassa rogabhūtā tadā tassa vigatā, tasmā kallacittaṃ arogacittanti attho. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamena muducittaṃ, kāmacchandādivigamena vinīvaraṇacittaṃ, sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogena udaggacittaṃ. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacittaṃ yadā bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vā kallacittanti kāmacchandavigamena arogacittaṃ. Muducittanti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akaṭhinacittaṃ. Vinīvaraṇacittanti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacittaṃ. Udaggacittanti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahavasena alīnacittaṃ. Pasannacittanti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacittanti evampettha attho veditabbo. Sāmukkaṃsikāti sāmaṃ ukkaṃsikā, attanāyeva uddharitvā gahitā, sayambhūñāṇena diṭṭhā asādhāraṇā aññesanti attho. Kā ca pana sāti? Ariyasaccadesanā. Tenevāha ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti.
“就像这样”等话,是通过譬喻来显示他断除烦恼和圣道的生起。“去除了黑垢”就是离开了黑垢。“完全地”就是好好地。“染色”就是青、黄等颜色的染料。“会接受”就是会拿取,会变得极光净。“就在那座具上”就是在那个座位上。由此显示了他观照的轻快、智慧的锐利、乐行道和快速通达。关于“离垢”等,和前面所说的一样。这里譬喻的对应是这样的:布好比心,布被外来的污垢弄脏,好比心被贪等污垢染污;洗衣石好比次第说法;水好比信;用水反复浸湿后,再用碱、牛粪、灰、草木灰揉搓黑垢的地方来洗衣,这个动作好比以信的润泽反复浸湿后,用念、定、慧使过失变弱,再以戒、闻等方法来净化心的精进努力;通过这个动作去除布上的黑垢,好比以精进努力镇伏烦恼;染料好比圣道;用染料使洗净的布变得极光净,好比以圣道使被镇伏了烦恼的心得到清净。巴利
Seyyathāpītiādinā upamāvasena tassa kilesappahānaṃ ariyamagguppādañca dasseti. Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ. Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva. Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ. Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya, pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya. Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tassaṃyeva nisajjāyaṃ. Etenassa lahuvipassakatā tikkhapaññatā sukhapaṭipadakhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti. Virajantiādi vuttanayameva. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo, dhovanasilā viya anupubbikathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udakena temetvā temetvā ūsagomayachārikakhārakehi kāḷakapadese sammadditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithile katvā sīlasutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho, tena payogena vatthe kāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti.
27 “乘马使者”是指骑在马上的使者。“神通加行”是指神通的作用。“作了加行”就是作了、造作了的意思。目的是什么呢?是为了遮止两人各自应当获得的殊胜果证之障碍。因为如果他见到儿子,那么儿子证得阿拉汉、长者获得法眼,就都不会发生。因为一个还没见谛的人,在被哀求“把你母亲的生命还回来”时,怎么可能排除散乱,随顺佛陀说法的引导而运用智慧、获得法眼呢?而耶舍在被这样哀求时,又怎么可能排除那种散乱而安住在阿拉汉果中呢?巴利
27.Assadūteti āruḷhaasse dūte. Iddhābhisaṅkhāranti iddhikiriyaṃ. Abhisaṅkharesīti abhisaṅkhari, akāsīti attho. Kimatthanti ce? Ubhinnaṃ paṭilabhitabbavisesantarāyanisedhanatthaṃ. Yadi hi so puttaṃ passeyya, puttassapi arahattappatti seṭṭhissapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho na siyā. Adiṭṭhasaccopi hi ‘‘dehi te mātuyā jīvita’’nti yācanto kathañhi nāma vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā bhagavato dhammadesanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā dhammacakkhuṃ paṭilabheyya, yaso ca evaṃ tena yāciyamāno kathaṃ taṃ vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya.
“说了此”是指:为了随喜世尊的说法,而说出“太殊胜了,尊者”等这番话。这里的“殊胜”一词在此处是随喜的意思,因此所说的就是“萨度萨度,尊者”。巴利
Etadavocāti bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno etaṃ ‘‘abhikkantaṃ bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Abhikkanta-saddo cāyamidha abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.
“ 害怕时、愤怒时、称赞时,匆忙时、好奇张望时;
在欢笑时、忧愁时、净信时,智者会重复地说。”巴利
‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti. –
正是以这个特征,这里因为净信和赞叹的缘故,才把这句话重复说了两次,应当这样理解。接着以“譬如”等四种比喻来赞叹世尊的教说。其中,“倒覆”是指口朝下放着,或者变成朝下的状态。“会翻正”是指让它朝上。“被覆盖”是指被草、叶子等遮住。“会揭开”是指把它打开。“对迷路者”是指对迷失方向的人。“会指示道路”是指牵着他的手说“这就是路”。“在黑暗中”是指黑半月的十四日、半夜、密林、厚云这四种情况同时出现的黑暗。巴利
Imināva lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Seyyathāpītiādinā catūhi upamāhi bhagavato desanaṃ thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharatti ghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅgatame.
他这样赞叹了这番教导之后,对三宝生起清净信心,为了表达这份净信,便说出“我此”等话。其中,“我此”就是“这个我”。“愿世尊忆持我为近事男”,意思是愿世尊这样忆持我、知道我——“这是近事男”。“从今日起”里,这个“agga”是“开端”的意思,所以“从今日起”就是“以今天为开端”的意思。“今日”就是“今天”的状态。也有人写作“ajjadagge”,其中的“da”是连接音,意思是“以今天为开端”。“具命者”指具有生命。只要我的生命还在延续,我就以此皈依,愿世尊忆持我、知道我是不以他人为师的近事男,以三皈依而皈依,并做适当的承事。即使有人用锋利的刀砍断我的头,我也绝不会说“佛不是佛”“法不是法”“僧不是僧”——我就是这样把自身完全奉献而皈依的。“殊胜”等词中不明显的意思,应当这样理解;详细的解释已经出现在前面《毗兰若品》的注释中,所以这里不再展开。巴利
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto ‘‘esāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃ agga-saddo ādiatthe, tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Ajjadagge’’ti vā pāṭho, da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho. Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ, anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādīnaṃ anuttānapadattho veditabbo, vitthāro pana heṭṭhā verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgatoyevāti idha na dassito.
28 “观察地”是指观察自己所见的意义。“止息了神通加行”的意思是:就像那位长者居士坐在那里就能看见亚萨善男子一样,他就是这样决意的。“请接受”就是请应允。“为了今日的”是指为了我今日恭敬你们所将产生的福德与喜悦。世尊默然应允,意思是世尊身体和语言都不动,只是在内心忍可,以沉默来接受,也就是说,为了摄受那位长者,世尊以意接受了。世尊说“来吧,比丘”时,据说世尊观察那人获得神通所成衣钵的亲依止缘,看到他许多生中布施衣等八种资具,于是便说“来吧,比丘”。他当下剃除须发、披上袈裟,八种比丘资具立刻显现在身上,就像六十岁的老比丘一样,一边礼敬世尊一边坐下。应当知道:如果有人把衣等八种资具,或者只把衣钵,布施给入流者等圣者或具戒凡夫,并发愿说“愿这资具布施成为未来获得‘来吧,比丘’身份的缘”,那么当因缘具足时,在诸佛面前,这布施就能带来神通所成资具的获得。巴利
28.Bhūmiṃ paccavekkhantassāti attanā diṭṭhamatthaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhesīti yathā taṃ seṭṭhi gahapati tattha nisinnova yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passati, tathā adhiṭṭhāsīti attho. Adhivāsetūti sampaṭicchatu. Ajjatanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu sakkāraṃ karoto ajja bhavissati puññañca pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ karonto tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi, seṭṭhissa anuggahatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avocāti tassa kira iddhimayapattacīvarassa upanissayaṃ olokento anekāsu jātīsu cīvarādiaṭṭhaparikkhāradānaṃ disvā ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti avoca. So tāvadeva bhaṇḍu kāsāvavasano aṭṭhahi bhikkhuparikkhārehi sarīre paṭimukkeheva vassasaṭṭhikatthero viya bhagavantaṃ namassamānova nisīdi. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, tassa taṃ sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ.
29 “殊胜”指最上等的。“亲手”指用自己的手。“令满足后”指好好地满足,使其完全饱足、随心所欲。“令谢拒后”指好好地谢绝后,以手势表示“够了,够了”,让对方停止。“已食”指已经吃过的人。“手已离钵”指手已经从钵移开,也就是说手已经拿开了。也有读作“Onittapattapāṇi”的,它的意思是:手已洗净、钵已从手中离开,即手和钵已经分开,意思是洗净手和钵后,把钵放在一边坐着。“坐在一边”指知道世尊处于这样的状态后,坐在一个地方。在“以法语”等句中,指以适合当时情况的法语,开示现世和来世的利益后,让他们在善法中安立、策励、激发,使他们具足精进,并以那种精进和其他现有的功德使他们欢喜,降下法宝之雨,然后从座位起身离去。巴利
29.Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā, alaṃ alanti hatthasaññāya paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ . Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho – onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi, taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamantaṃ pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti bhagavantaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ ñatvā ekasmiṃ okāse nisīdiṃsūti attho. Dhammiyā kathāyātiādīsu taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammiyā kathāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaatthaṃ sandassetvā kusale ca dhamme samādapetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya ca saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
四位在家好友一起出家的故事注释巴利
Catugihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
30 30. 现在,为了说明他的朋友们出家的事,说了“他们听闻”等话。这里是对难解词句的解释:“豪族与随豪族”,是指那些家族属于豪族与随豪族,也就是说,那些世代相承、具有豪族与随豪族的家族。“无垢”等是他们儿子的名字。“剃除须发”就是剃掉头发和胡须。“袈裟衣”是指染成黄褐色、适合修梵行者穿的衣服。“下劣”是指差劲、低劣。其余部分按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
30. Idāni tassa sahāyānaṃ pabbajjaṃ dassento ‘‘assosuṃ kho’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – seṭṭhino ca anuseṭṭhino ca yesaṃ kulānaṃ tāni seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīni kulāni, tesaṃ seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulānaṃ, paveṇivasena āgatehi seṭṭhīhi ca anuseṭṭhīhi ca samannāgatānaṃ kulānanti attho. Vimalotiādīni tesaṃ puttānaṃ nāmāni. Kesamassuṃ ohāretvāti kesañca massuñca oropetvā. Kāsāyāni vatthānīti kasāyarasapītāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni. Orakoti ūnako lāmako. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
五十位在家友伴出家故事的注释巴利
Paññāsagihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
31 关于五十位在家友伴出家这件事,该说的已经说过了。不过,为了说明所有这些人的宿世因缘,就说了“亚萨等良家子弟的宿世因缘”等话。其中,“以结群”是指结成团体,也就是成为一体的意思。“无依之尸”是指没人照管的尸体。“照料”是指搬到外面去火化。巴利
31. Paññāsamattānaṃ gihisahāyānaṃ pabbajjāyapi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva. Imesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ pubbayogo vattabboti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasaādīnaṃkulaputtānaṃ ayaṃ pubbayogo’’tiādimāha. Tattha vaggabandhanenāti gaṇabandhanena, ekībhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anāthasarīrānīti anāthāni matakaḷevarāni. Paṭijaggantāti bahi nīharitvā jhāpentā.
魔的谈论的注释巴利
Mārakathāvaṇṇanā
32 32. 现在,为了说明皈依和具足戒,开始说“那时,世尊”等语。这里依次逐词解释:我已解脱,意思是我已解脱。游行,是指次第前行的游行,也就是在村落、集镇、王都中依次行走,这叫作游行。你们游行吧,意思是每天最多走一由旬地游行。不要两个人走同一条路,意思是若两个人走同一条路,一人在说法时,另一人就必须沉默而住,因此这样说。初善,是指初时善、妙、贤善,中、后亦然。而此初、中、后善,依教法与说法而有二种。其中,教法的初是戒,中是止观与道,后是果与涅槃。或者戒与定为初,观与道为中,果与涅槃为后。或者戒、定、观为初,道为中,果与涅槃为后。说法的初,则如四句偈,第一句为初,第二、第三句为中,第四句为后。五句、六句的,第一句为初,最后一句为后,其余为中。单结经的序分为初,“此即所说”为后,其余为中。多结经的,中间虽有多结,也仍是中,序分为初,“此即所说”为后。具义,意思是令具足义而说。具文,意思是令文与句皆圆满而说。完全圆满,意思是全部圆满。清净,意思是无杂染。梵行,意思是摄三学之教法梵行。宣说,意思是显明。巴利
32. Idāni saraṇagamanūpasampadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbapadavaṇṇanā (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.141) – muttāhanti mutto ahaṃ. Cārikanti anupubbagamanacārikaṃ, gāmanigamarājadhānīsu anukkamena gamanasaṅkhātaṃ cārikanti attho. Carathāti divasaṃ yojanaparamaṃ gacchantā caratha. Mā ekena dve agamitthāti ekena maggena dvīsu gatesu ekasmiṃ dhammaṃ desente ekena tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ hoti, tasmā evamāha. Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ sundaraṃ bhaddakaṃ, tathā majjhapariyosānesu. Ādimajjhapariyosānañca nāmetaṃ sāsanassa ca desanāya ca vasena dubbidhaṃ. Tattha sāsanassa sīlaṃ ādi, samathavipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhayo vā ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhivipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Desanāya pana catuppadikagāthāya tāva paṭhamapādo ādi, dutiyatatiyā majjhaṃ, catuttho pariyosānaṃ. Pañcapadachappadānaṃ paṭhamapādo ādi, avasānapādo pariyosānaṃ, sesā majjhaṃ. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, sesaṃ majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa majjhe bahukampi anusandhi majjhameva, nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ. Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desetha. Sabyañjananti byañjanehi ceva padehi ca paripūraṃ katvā desetha. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Pakāsethāti āvi karotha.
“少尘垢种性者”的意思是:在智慧之眼中,本性只有很少的烦恼尘垢,就像被细布覆盖着一样,在四句偈结束时能够证得阿拉汉果的众生是存在的。“退失”是指由于不得之退失而从法上退失。因此说“未证得者不证得,从殊胜证得中退失”。“军营聚落”就是军队的聚落。据说在最初劫时,那个地方曾有军队驻扎,所以那个地方被称为“军营聚落”。也有读作“Senānigāmo”的,意思是善生女之父名为Senāni的村落。“我将前往那里”的意思是:我不是把你们打发走,让人建好精舍等,然后由侍者等服侍着住下来,而是要向三位结发者示现三千五百种神变之后,只为说法才前往。巴利
Apparajakkhajātikāti paññācakkhumhi appakilesarajasabhāvā, dukūlasāṇiyā paṭicchannā viya catuppadikagāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthā sattā santīti attho. Parihāyantīti alābhaparihāniyā dhammato parihāyanti. Tenevāha ‘‘anadhigataṃ nādhigacchantā visesādhigamato parihāyantī’’ti. Senānigamoti senāya nigamo. Paṭhamakappikānaṃ kira tasmiṃ ṭhāne senāniveso ahosi, tasmā so padeso ‘‘senānigamo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Senānigāmo’’tipi pāṭho, senāni nāma sujātāya pitā, tassa gāmoti attho. Tenupasaṅkamissāmīti nāhaṃ tumhe uyyojetvā pariveṇādīni kāretvā upaṭṭhākādīhi paricariyamāno viharissāmi, tiṇṇaṃ pana jaṭilānaṃ aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni dassetvā dhammameva desetuṃ upasaṅkamissāmi.
33 “魔”:他杀害那些走上超越自己掌控范围之路的众生,所以叫魔罗;他驱使别人作恶,或者自己就投身于恶,所以叫魔。他还有许多别的名字,比如黑者、主宰、瓦萨瓦帝、终结者、那目奇、放逸者的亲戚等等,但这里只取了这两个名字。“前往”:他心里这样想:“这位沙门乔达摩像是要打一场大仗似的,说‘不要两个人走同一条路,要说法’,把六十个人都打发走了。可是就算只有一个人在说法,我心里都不痛快,要是很多人在说法,那还得了?我得去阻止他。”这样想过之后,他就去了。巴利
33.Māro pāpimāti attano visayaṃ atikkamituṃ paṭipanne satte māretīti māro, pare pāpe niyojeti, sayaṃ vā pāpe niyuttoti pāpimā. Aññānipissa kaṇho adhipati vasavattī antako namuci pamattabandhūtiādīni bahūni nāmāni, idha pana nāmadvayameva gahitaṃ. Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo gotamo mahāyuddhaṃ vicārento viya ‘mā ekena dve agamittha, dhammaṃ desethā’ti saṭṭhi jane uyyojeti, imasmiṃ pana ekasmimpi dhammaṃ desente mayhaṃ cittassa sātaṃ natthi, evaṃ bahūsu desentesu kuto bhavissati, paṭibāhāmi na’’nti cintetvā upasaṅkami.
“一切缚”指一切烦恼的束缚。所谓“天界的与人界的”,是说那些被称为天界欲乐所摄和人界欲乐所摄的烦恼束缚,他说你被所有那些束缚所缚。“被大束缚所缚”,是指被巨大的烦恼束缚所缚,或被系缚于大束缚中,意思是被系缚在作为烦恼束缚之处的轮回牢狱中。“沙门,你不会从我这里解脱”,意思是沙门,你不会从我的领域解脱。而“沙门,你不会从我这里解脱”这句话,是魔罗因为不相信世尊所说“比丘们,我已从一切束缚中解脱”而说的;或者即使相信,也为了恐吓而说——“这样他就不会为其他众生的解脱而努力了”,他是站在虚伪的立场上说的。巴利
Sabbapāsehīti sabbehi kilesapāsehi. Ye dibbā ye ca mānusāti ye dibbakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā mānusakakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā ca kilesapāsā nāma atthi, sabbehi tehi tvaṃ baddhoti vadati. Mahābandhanabaddhoti mahatā kilesabandhanena baddho, mahati vā bandhane baddho, kilesabandhanassa ṭhānabhūte bhavacārake baddhoti attho. Na me samaṇa mokkhasīti samaṇa tvaṃ mama visayato na muccissasi. ‘‘Na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti ca idaṃ māro ‘‘muttāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāsehī’’ti bhagavato vacanaṃ asaddahanto vadati, saddahantopi vā ‘‘evamayaṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ mokkhāya ussāhaṃ na kareyyā’’ti santajjento kohaññe ṭhatvā vadati.
“已被击倒”的意思是:你已经被我击倒,被弄得毫无还手之力,也就是被击败了。“空中行者”是说,它连在空中行走、具备五种神通的人也能束缚住。因为贪欲的绳索对空中行者也能起作用,所以就说它是“空中行者”,因此魔罗也以为它是空中行者。“生于意”就是意所生,意思是与意相应。这里剩下的部分意思都很浅显。巴利
Nihatoti tvaṃ mayā nihato, nibbisevanabhāvaṃ gamito parājitoti attho. Antalikkhe carante pañcābhiññepi bandhatīti antalikkhacaro. Rāgapāso hi antalikkhacaresupi kiccasādhanato ‘‘antalikkhacaro’’ti vuccati, teneva naṃ māropi antalikkhacaroti maññati. Manasi jātoti mānaso, manasampayuttoti attho. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
出家与受具足戒的注释巴利
Pabbajjūpasampadākathāvaṇṇanā
34 关于“我允许,比丘们”等经文,接下来要说明出家与受具足戒的判定。为了详细展示这一点,论师说了“当使期望出家的良家子出家时”等话。这里要联系的是“哪些人已被拒绝”。应自己使出家,意思是自己动手剃发等,令其出家。因为做剃发、披袈裟、授三皈依这三件事,就称为“使出家”。即使只做其中一件或两件,也同样这么称呼,所以“你使此人出家”这句话是就剃发和披袈裟而说的。“指定戒师而使出家”这里也是同样的道理。“带到界外”是为了避免向人告知剃发这件事而说的。因此,即使在有比丘的寺院里,也不可以对别人说“你剃这个人的头发”。“使出家后”是就剃发而说的。除比丘之外,其他人不能令出家,这是就授三皈依而说的。所以论师说“然而沙弥”等话。“有能之相”指具有能的本性。用另一个说法阐明同一个意思,所以说“有因”。“已知”指显而易见。“有名望”指具备随从圆满。巴利
34. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave’’tiādikāya pana pāḷiyā yo pabbajjūpasampadāvinicchayo vattabbo, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pabbajjāpekkhaṃ kulaputtaṃ pabbājentenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ye puggalā paṭikkhittāti sambandho. Sayaṃ pabbājetabboti kesacchedanādīni sayaṃ karontena pabbājetabbo. Kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanaṃ saraṇadānanti hi imāni tīṇi karonto ‘‘pabbājetī’’ti vuccati. Etesu ekaṃ dve vāpi karonto tathā voharīyatiyeva, tasmā etaṃ pabbājehīti kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upajjhāyaṃuddissa pabbājetīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvāti bhaṇḍukammārocanapariharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi ‘‘etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Pabbājetvāti kesacchedanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Bhikkhuto añño pabbājetuṃ na labhatīti saraṇadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sāmaṇero panā’’tiādi. Bhabbarūpoti bhabbasabhāvo. Tamevatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāveti ‘‘sahetuko’’ti. Ñātoti pākaṭo. Yasassīti parivārasampattiyā samannāgato.
这段的关联是:通过颜色、形状、气味、来源、处所,来把头发的不净、可厌、违逆之相显示出来。其中,这些头发从颜色上就是可厌的,从形状上、气味上、来源上、处所上也都是可厌的。即使在可意的粥碗或饭钵里,看到一点像头发颜色的东西,人们也会厌恶地说:“这混进头发了,拿走!”这样,头发从颜色上就是可厌的。夜里吃东西时,摸到像头发形状的阿克瓦卡纤维或玛卡奇瓦卡纤维,也同样厌恶,这样,头发从形状上就是可厌的。没有涂油、没有用花熏等加工过的头发,气味极其可厌,丢进火里就更可厌。头发即使从颜色和形状上可能不可厌,但从气味上一定是可厌的。就像幼儿的粪便,颜色像姜黄,形状也像姜黄块;丢在垃圾堆里的肿胀黑狗尸体,颜色像棕榈果,形状像揉圆后又松开的鼓,牙齿像素馨花蕾。这两样从颜色和形状上可能不可厌,但从气味上一定是可厌的。同样,头发即使从颜色和形状上可能不可厌,从气味上一定是可厌的。又像在不净之处、由村落排水而生、可做羹汤的菜叶,对城里人来说是可厌的、不用的;同样,头发是由脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等排泄物所生,所以极其可厌。这样,从来源上也是可厌的。而这些头发,就像从粪堆里长出的芽,是生在三十一部分的聚集体中;又像在坟地、垃圾堆等处长出的菜,像在沟渠等处长出的莲花等花,因为生在不清净的地方,所以极其可厌。这样,从处所上也是可厌的。意思是:以这样的方式,通过颜色等,来说明皮五法门中头发等的可厌之相。巴利
Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena asucijegucchapaṭikūlabhāvaṃ pākaṭaṃ karontenāti sambandho. Tattha kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikūlā. Manuññepi (visuddhi. 1.183; vibha. aṭṭha. 356; sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.162) hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’’nti jigucchanti, evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvā tatheva jigucchanti, evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārakassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍisaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisā, taṃ ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlameva, evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyevāti. Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃ āsayato paṭikūlā. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇakaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃ okāsato paṭikūlātiādinā nayena tacapañcakassa vaṇṇādivasena paṭikūlabhāvaṃ pakāsentenāti attho.
或者,为了显示头发没有生命、没有自我这样的性质,而说:这些所谓头发,是长在包裹头骨的皮肤上的。其中,就像长在蚁丘顶上的杂草,蚁丘顶并不知道“我身上长了杂草”,杂草也不知道“我们长在蚁丘顶上”;同样,包裹头骨的皮肤并不知道“我身上长了头发”,头发也不知道“我们长在包裹头骨的皮肤上”。这些法彼此之间没有关注和观察。这样,头发就是这身体中一个单独的部分,没有感觉,属于无记,是空的,没有自我,是坚硬的,是地界。通过这样的方式来说明没有生命、没有自我的性质。“以前”是指在过去诸佛面前。“已摧破诸行”是指以确定名色的智和把握缘的智来摧破诸行。“已修习修习”是指通过聚观照等,以一切善修习的圆满而修习。巴利
Nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontenāti ime kesā nāma sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā. Tattha yathā vammikamatthake jātesu kunthatiṇesu na vammikamatthako jānāti ‘‘mayi kunthatiṇāni jātānī’’ti, nāpi kunthatiṇāni jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ vammikamatthake jātānī’’ti, evameva na sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacammaṃ jānāti ‘‘mayi kesā jātā’’ti, nāpi kesā jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā’’ti. Aññamaññaṃ ābhogapaccavekkhaṇarahitā ete dhammā. Iti kesā nāma imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāso acetano abyākato suñño nissatto thaddho pathavīdhātūtiādinā nayena nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ pakāsentena. Pubbeti purimabuddhānaṃ santike. Madditasaṅkhāroti nāmarūpavavatthānena ceva paccayapariggahavasena ca ñāṇena parimadditasaṅkhāro. Bhāvitabhāvanoti kalāpasammasanādinā sabbaso kusalabhāvanāya pūraṇena bhāvitabhāvano.
这里说“不给予则不合宜”,他们认为这样出家就不成立。所谓“许可的达上”,就是通过白文四甘马而得到许可的达上。所谓“处所作具足”,这里应当知道,胸等是处所,摄护等是所作。为了说明应当做成鼻音,在授与时中间不断开地施与,所以说了“同一关联”。所谓“断绝”,就是做成m音,在授与的时候断开。应当告诉他一切适宜与不适宜的事,也就是应当告诉他除了十学处之外,关于执取、不执取等分类的适宜与不适宜的事。所谓“于威仪戒中应教导”,是用这个来说明:应当以此让他圆满应学法、依止师义务等威仪戒,而且如果在这当中该做的没做、不该做的却做了,就应当受到治罚。巴利
Adinnaṃna vaṭṭatīti ettha pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadanti. Anuññātaupasampadāti ñatticatutthakammena anuññātaupasampadā. Ṭhānakaraṇasampadanti ettha urādīni ṭhānāni, saṃvutādīni karaṇānīti veditabbāni. Anunāsikantaṃ katvā dānakāle antarā vicchedaṃ akatvā dātabbānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekasambandhānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vicchinditvāti ma-kārantaṃ katvā dānasamaye vicchedaṃ katvā. Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ parāmāsāparāmāsādibhedaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabboti iminā sekhiyaupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikasīlamanena pūretabbaṃ, tattha ca kattabbassa akaraṇe akattabbassa ca karaṇe daṇḍakammāraho hotīti dīpeti.
第二魔事论注释巴利
Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 35. 接着,“那时世尊雨安居结束后”等经文里,这是对新出现词语的解释。“如理作意”:就是以恰当的方法作意,也就是对无常等法,依照无常等的方式去作意,这是意思。“如理正勤”:就是依恰当方法而起的精进,也就是以“未生起的恶不令生起”等规则所发起的精进,这是意思。“解脱”:这里用最高程度的说明,指的是阿拉汉果的解脱。“说”:是指他这样想:“这个人自己努力证得阿拉汉果,还不满足,现在又鼓励别人‘你们也证得吧’,我要阻止他。”于是说了这话。“魔网”:就是烦恼网。这里其余的部分和前面说的一样。巴利
35.Atha kho bhagavā vassaṃvuṭṭhotiādikāya pana pāḷiyā ayaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Yonisomanasikārāti upāyamanasikārena, aniccādīsu aniccādito manasikaraṇenāti attho. Yoniso sammappadhānāti upāyavīriyena, anuppannākusalānuppādanādividhinā pavattavīriyenāti attho. Vimuttīti ukkaṭṭhaniddesena arahattaphalavimutti vuttā. Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ attanā vīriyaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patvāpi na tussati, idāni aññesampi ‘pāpuṇāthā’ti ussāhaṃ karoti, paṭibāhessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi. Mārapāsenāti kilesapāsena. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
跋达瓦基亚群故事的注释巴利
Bhaddavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
36 36. 在“三十贤善群”这件事中,“随所乐而住”意思是:随自己的意乐而住。诸佛住在同一个地方时,不会因为树荫、饮水等条件变差,或者住处不舒适,或者人们缺乏信心等等,就生起不喜乐;也不会因为条件圆满,就欢喜地说“我在这里住得很舒服”,然后久住不走。但是,如果如来住在某处时,众生能在三皈依中站稳,或者受持戒律,或者出家,或者成为他人证得入流道等的有力助缘,那么诸佛就会以想让众生在这些成就中站稳的意乐而住;如果没有这些,就离开。因此说“随所乐而住”。“进入”就是进去。“约三十”就是三十这个数目。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
36. Tiṃsabhaddavaggiyavatthumhi yathābhirantaṃ viharitvāti yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā. Buddhānañhi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantānaṃ chāyūdakādīnaṃ vipattiṃ vā aphāsukasenāsanaṃ vā manussānaṃ assaddhādibhāvaṃ vā āgamma anabhirati nāma natthi, tesaṃ sampattiyā ‘‘idha phāsuṃ viharāmā’’ti abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi. Yattha pana tathāgate viharante sattā saraṇesu vā tīsu patiṭṭhahanti, sīlāni vā samādiyanti, pabbajanti vā, sotāpattimaggādīnaṃ vā paresaṃ upanissayo hoti, tattha buddhā satte tāsu sampattīsu patiṭṭhāpanaajjhāsayena vasanti, tāsaṃ abhāve pakkamanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā’’ti. Ajjhogāhetvāti pavisitvā. Tiṃsamattāti tiṃsapamāṇā. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
优楼频螺神变故事注释巴利
Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
37-38 37-38. 在伍卢韦拉·咖沙巴的故事里,“结发者”就是留着结发的人。因为他有结发,所以叫结发者。“引导者”就是领袖,他亲自引导、教导自己的见解主张,所以叫导师。“迦叶,如果你不介意的话”,意思是迦叶,如果你没有什么沉重或不舒服的事。“火屋”,就是火堂。“两者都燃起火来”,就是两者都燃着火、正在燃烧的时候。“何竟有”,就是所谓有。巴利
37-38. Uruvelakassapavatthumhi jaṭiloti jaṭādharo. Jaṭā assa atthīti hi jaṭilo. Netīti nāyako, sāmaṃ vineti attano laddhiṃ sikkhāpetīti vināyako. Sace te kassapa agarūti kassapa sace tuyhaṃ bhāriyaṃ aphāsukaṃ kiñci natthi. Agyāgāreti aggisālāyaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtānanti ubhosu sajotibhūtesu pajjalitesu. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.
39 今天,就是今天这一天。在火屋中,就是在火堂里。悦意心,是指被称为美丽之心的心。于火界善巧,是指对火遍禅定很熟练。环顾,意思是向上看,或者是指围绕。放入钵中,就是投进钵里。常食,就是始终食物。巴利
39.Ajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasaṃ. Aggisālamhīti agyāgāre. Sumanamanasoti sundaracittasaṅkhātamano. Tejodhātūsu kusaloti tejokasiṇasamāpattīsu kusalo. Udicchareti ullokesuṃ, parivāresunti vā attho. Pattamhi odahitvāti patte pakkhipitvā. Dhuvabhattenāti niccabhattena.
40 “夜已过”这里,“已过”这个词表示耗尽,所以意思是“夜已尽”。这四位大天王是在中夜刚过的时候来的。据说这是天神的惯例:来侍奉佛陀或佛弟子时,他们都在中夜刚过的时候来。“色已过”就是肤色美妙,说的是可爱的肤色、令人欢喜的肤色。天神来到人间时,会舍弃原本的肤色和神通,化作粗大的身体,以超胜的肤色、衣饰、身光等放出光明,示现天界的神通威力,就像人们去参加戏剧集会等活动时,以精心装扮的身相前来一样。其中,欲界天即使不刻意变化身体也能来,因为他们的色身比较粗重。他们确实是以段食为食的。而色界天则不能以不变化的身体前来,因为他们的色身更加微细。他们的身体极其微细,无法靠这个身体来行、住、坐、卧。所以梵天世界的梵天神们也大多以化现的色身活动。他们的根本结生色极其微细、广大,仅仅作为心识生起的所依和立足处,以有形状的方式存在着。巴利
40.Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkanta-saddo khaye vattati, tena parikkhīṇāyarattiyāti attho. Ete hi cattāro mahārājāno majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatā. Niyāmo kiresa devatānaṃ, yadidaṃ buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantā majjhimayāmasamanantare āgacchanti. Abhikkantavaṇṇāti abhirūpachavivaṇṇā, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ jahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇavatthālaṅkārakāyādīhi obhāsaṃ muñcamānādivasena ca dibbaṃ iddhānubhāvañca nimminitvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Tattha kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti oḷārikarūpattā. Tathā hi te kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhā, rūpāvacarā pana anabhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgantuṃ na sakkonti sukhumatararūpattā. Tesañhi atisukhumova attabhāvo, na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hoti. Tasmā brahmalokepi brahmāno yebhuyyena nimmitarūpeneva pavattanti. Mūlapaṭisandhirūpañhi nesaṃ ativiya sukhumamahārūpaṃ, kevalaṃ taṃ cittuppādassa nissayādhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ saṇṭhānavantaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.
“纯然全分”在这里,“纯然”这个词的意思是没有剩余,“全分”这个词的意思是周遍。所以“纯然全分的树林”就是没有剩余、四周全是树林的意思。因为即使有能力遍照无余的光明,也可能因为某种原因只照到一部分,为了表明这光明是完全遍照的,所以取了表示周遍意义的“全分”这个词。或者也可以说,“纯然全分”是稍微有些不圆满。因为世尊的光明没有照到的地方,天神们就用自身的光明去照亮。世尊的光明确实不会被任何光明所压倒,反而能压倒日月等的光明而存在。“照亮之后”的意思是:以衣饰、庄严具和身体所生起的光明遍满,像月亮、像太阳一样,使其成为一片光明、一片辉耀。因为天神们身体的光明能遍照十由旬、十二由旬左右乃至更远的地方,衣饰、庄严具等所生起的光明也是如此。“四方”就是在四个方向。“Yatra hi nāma”这个短语的意思是“yaṃ nāma”,也就是“竟然”“所谓”的意思。巴利
Kevalakappanti ettha kevala-saddassa anavasesattaṃ attho, kappa-saddassa samantabhāvo, tasmā kevalakappaṃ vanasaṇḍanti anavasesaṃ samantato vanasaṇḍanti attho. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi hi obhāsassa kenaci kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbaso pharatīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahito. Atha vā īsaṃ asamatthaṃ kevalakappaṃ. Bhagavato pabhāya anobhāsitameva hi padesaṃ devatā attano pabhāya obhāsenti. Na hi bhagavato pabhā kāyaci pabhāya abhibhūyati, sūriyādīnampi pana pabhaṃ sā abhibhuyya tiṭṭhatīti. Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho. Devatānañhi sarīrābhā dasadvādasayojanamattaṭṭhānaṃ tato bhiyyopi pharitvā tiṭṭhati, tathā vatthābharaṇādīsu samuṭṭhitā pabhā. Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu. Yatra hi nāmāti yaṃ nāma.
43 43.“鸯伽摩揭陀人”是指住在鸯伽和摩揭陀这两个地方的人。“神通神变”是指神通所成的神变,意思是不是他心神变和教诫神变。神变有三种:神通神变、他心神变、教诫神变。其中,“在这里,比丘由一身变成多身,由多身变成一身,显现、隐匿……”等经文所说的(长部1.238-239;中部1.147;相应部2.70;5.834),就是神通种类本身,即神通神变。“在这里,比丘能说出其他众生、其他人的心,也能说出他们的心所,也能说出他们的寻,也能说出他们的伺:‘你的心是这样,你的心是这样’”等经文所说的(无碍解道3.30),就是了知他人的心之后而宣说,这是他心神变。“在这里,比丘这样教导:‘你们应当这样寻思,不要这样寻思;应当这样作意,不要这样作意;应当舍弃这个,成就那个而住’”等经文所说的(无碍解道3.30),是声闻弟子和诸佛所应于一切时候宣说的法教,这就是教诫神变。巴利
43.Aṅgamagadhāti ubho aṅgamagadharaṭṭhavāsino. Iddhipāṭihāriyanti iddhibhūtaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ, na ādesanānusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti attho. Tividhañhi pāṭihāriyaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ anusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti. Tattha ‘‘idha bhikkhu ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāva’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 1.238-239; ma. ni. 1.147; saṃ. ni. 2.70; 5.834) iddhividhameva iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cittampi ādisati, cetasikampi ādisati, vitakkitampi ādisati, vicāritampi ādisati ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano’’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.30) parassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathanaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu evamanusāsati ‘evaṃ vitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayittha, evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ mānasā karittha, idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathā’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.30) evamādinayappavattā sāvakānaṃ buddhānañca sabbakālaṃ desetabbadhammadesanā anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ.
在这里,关于“神变”这个词的含义,注释书(《优陀那义注》1)说:因为能排除对立面、去除贪等烦恼,所以叫“神变”。但世尊并没有需要被排除的贪等对立面;而凡夫在远离随烦恼、具备八种功德的心当中,对立面已被断除时,神通才能运作,所以不能按那种世俗说法在这里称为“神变”。不过,如果说大悲世尊所教化的众生有烦恼作为对立面,排除这些烦恼就叫“神变”,这样说是合理的。或者,世尊和教法的对立面就是外道,排除他们就叫“神变”,因为他们以去除邪见的方式、以及无法显示见解的状态,被神通、他心神变和教诫神变所排除、所去除。“paṭi”这个词有时表示“之后”的意思,比如“他进去之后,另一个婆罗门来了”(《小部·事义偈》4)等语句中那样。因此,在心已得定、远离随烦恼、所作已办之后,应当被排除、应当被运作的,就是“神变”;或者,自己的随烦恼被第四禅和道排除之后,之后的排除就是“神变”;神通、他心神变和教诫神变,在远离随烦恼、所作已办之后,为了利益众生应当再次运作,而在自己的随烦恼被排除之后,它们就成为排除其他众生烦恼的,所以是“神变”。“神变”本身就是“神变”。或者,在神变——即神通、他心神变、教诫神变这个集合当中,每一个都叫作“神变”。又或者,神变就是第四禅和道,因为它们能排除对立面;在它们当中生起的、作为所缘的,或者从它们而来的,就是“神变”。“Svātanāya”的意思是:为了明天应当布施的目的。巴利
Tattha (udā. aṭṭha. 1) pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriyanti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ vattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha pāṭihāriyanti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. vatthugāthā 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti, paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Svātanāyāti sve dātabbassa atthāya.
44 粪扫衣已生起,意思是:在寻求的时候,以得到的方式而生起。那种寻求,正是为了展示种种神变。因为手一碰到,那个莲池就化现出来了,所以说“用手挖了莲池”。巴利
44.Paṃsukūlaṃuppannaṃ hotīti pariyesamānassa paṭilābhavasena uppannaṃ hoti. Vicittapāṭihāriyadassanatthāva sā pariyesanā. Yasmā pāṇinā phuṭṭhamatte sā pokkharaṇī nimmitā ahosi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṇinā pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇitvā’’ti.
46-49 46-49.“结发者”就是苦行僧。他们因为留着发髻,所以这里被称为“结发者”。“在中间那八夜降雪的时候”,是指冬季当中,摩伽月最后四夜和颇求那月最初四夜,也就是这两个月之间共八夜降雪的时候。“从尼连禅河浮出来”:有些人在那处被当作圣地的水里,先让整个身体沉下去,然后再浮出来、升起来、露出水面。“沉下去”是指连头一起没入水中。“也做浮出和沉入”是指一次又一次地做浮出和沉入。在那里,有些人持这样的见解:“只要浮出一次,罪业就能清净。”他们只做一次浮出就走了。可是没有沉入就不可能有浮出,因为两者不可分离,所以他们其实也做了沉入。也有人持这样的见解:“只要沉入一次,罪业就能清净。”他们也只沉入一次,然后同样因为不可分离,做了浮出之后才离开。还有些人持这样的见解:“反复浮出、沉入,沐浴之后罪业就能清净。”他们就时不时地做浮出和沉入。上面这句话“他们浮出,也沉入,也做浮出和沉入”,就是把所有这些人都包括进来说的。在这里,虽然浮出要以沉入在前,但只做沉入的人少,做浮出以及两者都做的人多;为了显示他们占多数,所以先说了浮出。巴利
46-49.Jaṭilāti tāpasā. Te hi jaṭādhāritāya idha ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti vuttā. Antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamayeti hemantassa utuno abbhantarabhūte māghamāsassa avasāne catasso, phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi catassoti evaṃ ubhinnamantare aṭṭharattīsu himapatanakāle. Nerañjarāya ummujjantīti keci tasmiṃ titthasammate udake paṭhamaṃ nimuggasakalasarīrā tato ummujjantā vuṭṭhahanti uppilavanti. Nimujjantīti sasīsaṃ udake osīdanti. Ummujjananimujjanampi karontīti punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanānipi karonti. Tattha hi keci ‘‘ekummujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te ummujjanameva katvā gacchanti. Ummujjanaṃ pana nimujjanamantarena natthīti avinābhāvato nimujjanampi te karontiyeva. Yepi ‘‘ekanimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, tepi ekavārameva nimujjitvā vuttanayeneva avinābhāvato ummujjanampi katvā pakkamanti. Apare ‘‘punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni katvā nahāte pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te kālena kālaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni karonti. Te sabbepi sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjananimujjanampi karontī’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nimujjanapubbakaṃ ummujjanaṃ, nimujjanameva pana karontā katipayā, ummujjanaṃ tadubhayañca karontā bahūti tesaṃ yebhuyyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ummujjanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ.
50-51 水流,就是洪水。被尘土沾染,就是被尘垢覆盖,意思是布满了灰尘。迦叶,你并不是阿拉汉,这句话否定了当时迦叶的无学境界;也不是证入阿拉汉道的人,这句话否定了他的有学境界。这两句都只是在说明他并非圣者。而能让你成为阿拉汉、或者证入阿拉汉道的那条行道,你也没有,这句话进一步否定了他是善凡夫。这里的行道,指戒清净等六种清净;依此行去而趣入圣道,所以叫行道。成为,就是你将会是。久远以来,指从很久以前开始,也就是从调伏那伽王的时候起。所谓‘带着担物扁担’,其中‘khārī’指钻火棍、水壶、针等苦行者的用具;搬运这些用具的扁担叫做‘khārikāja’。所谓‘带着火祭物’,指勺子等供火用的器具。巴利
50-51.Udakavāhakoti udakogho. Reṇuhatāyāti rajogatāya, rajokiṇṇāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Neva ca kho tvaṃ kassapa arahāti etena tadā kassapassa asekkhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati, nāpi arahattamaggasamāpannoti etena sekkhabhāvaṃ. Ubhayenapissa anariyabhāvameva dīpeti. Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assasi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti iminā panassa kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāvampi paṭikkhipati. Tattha paṭipadāti sīlavisuddhiādayo cha visuddhiyo. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggoti paṭipadā. Assasīti bhaveyyāsi. Cirapaṭikāti cirakālato paṭṭhāya, nāgadamanato paṭṭhāyāti attho. Khārikājamissanti ettha khārīti araṇīkamaṇḍalusūciādayo tāpasaparikkhārā, taṃ haraṇakājaṃ khārikājaṃ. Aggihutamissanti dabbiādiaggipūjopakaraṇaṃ.
52-53 52-53.“障碍”就是灾祸。现在为了把三千五百次神变合在一起计算并展示出来,就开始讲“由于世尊的加持,五百根木柴没能被劈开”等等。不过,调伏那伽等十六种神变在这里没有算进去,应该知道,把它们加在一起,就是三千五百一十六次神变。巴利
52-53.Upasaggoti upaddavo. Idāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni ekato gaṇetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato adhiṭṭhānena pañca kaṭṭhasatāni na phāliyiṃsū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Nāgadamanādīni pana soḷasa pāṭihāriyāni idha na gaṇitāni, tehi saddhiṃ soḷasātirekaaḍḍhuḍḍhapāṭihāriyasahassānīti veditabbaṃ.
《燃烧经》的注释巴利
Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
54 54. 现在,为了说明那一千位比丘是通过《燃烧经》的教导而证得阿拉汉果的,开始说“那时,世尊……”等话。其中,“住在伽耶的伽耶山顶”是说:因为有一个村庄靠近名叫伽耶的河流,所以那个村叫伽耶,他住在那个伽耶村。这里的处所格是表示“附近”的意思。在伽耶村附近,确实有一个也叫伽耶的池塘,也有一条河,还有一块名叫伽耶山顶、形状像象额的后背岩石。世尊就住在那个能容纳一千位比丘的地方。因此说“在伽耶山顶”,意思就是住在伽耶村附近那块名叫伽耶山顶的后背岩石上。“告诸比丘”是说:他思择了适合他们的法教,准备为他们宣说,于是告诉了他们。世尊确实带着那一千位手持神通所成衣钵的沙门,来到伽耶山顶,在他们围绕中坐下,然后思惟:“什么样的法谈适合他们呢?”接着决定:“这些人早晚都在侍奉火,我要把十二处开示得像正在燃烧、炽燃一样,这样他们就能证得阿拉汉果。”于是,为了向他们这样宣说,便讲了这篇《燃烧经》:“诸比丘,一切都在燃烧……”等。巴利
54. Idāni tassa bhikkhusahassassa ādittapariyāyadesanāya arahattappattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha khobhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha gayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīseti gayānāmikāya nadiyā avidūre bhavattā gāmo gayā nāma, tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharati. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre gayāti ekā pokkharaṇīpi atthi nadīpi gayāsīsanāmako hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇopi. Yattha bhikkhusahassassa okāso pahoti, bhagavā tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gayāsīse’’ti, gayāgāmassa āsanne gayāsīsanāmake piṭṭhipāsāṇe viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhikkhū āmantesīti tesaṃ sappāyadhammadesanaṃ vicinitvā taṃ desessāmīti āmantesi. Bhagavā hi taṃ iddhimayapattacīvaradharaṃ samaṇasahassaṃ ādāya gayāsīsaṃ gantvā tena parivārito nisīditvā ‘‘katarā nu kho etesaṃ dhammakathā sappāyā’’ti cintento ‘‘ime sāyaṃ pātaṃ aggiṃ paricaranti, imesaṃ dvādasāyatanāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni viya katvā dassessāmi, evaṃ ime arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkhissantī’’ti sanniṭṭhānamakāsi. Atha nesaṃ tathā desetuṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’ntiādinā imaṃ ādittapariyāyaṃ abhāsi.
在这里,一切有四种:一切一切、处一切、有身一切、部分一切。其中——巴利
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.23) sabbaṃ nāma catubbidhaṃ sabbasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ padesasabbanti. Tattha –
“ 对他来说,此处没有任何未见之物。
同样,没有未知而需要知道的事。
他完全了知一切应当被了知的事物;
如来因此被称为具有一切眼者。”巴利
‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci; Atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ; Tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; paṭi. ma. 1.121) –
这叫作“一切的一切”。“比丘们,我要为你们宣说一切,你们要听好”(相应部4.23),这叫作“处的一切”。“比丘们,我要为你们宣说一切法的根本法门”(中部1.1),这叫作“有身的一切”。“在一切法中,最初生起的心、意、意所、相应的意识界”,这叫作“部分的一切”。这样一来,只有五种所缘是部分的一切,三地的法是有身的一切,四地的法是处的一切,凡是应当被了知的都是一切的一切。部分的一切涵盖不了有身的一切,因为它不包含三地法中的一部分。有身的一切涵盖不了处的一切,因为它不包含出世间法。处的一切也涵盖不了一切的一切。为什么呢?因为处的一切只统摄了四地的法,并不统摄特相和概念施设。不过在这部经里,所指的意思是处的一切,而在这里面,也只应当取那些能用于观照的法。巴利
Idaṃ sabbasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) idaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.1) idaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammesu vā paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ tajjā manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti idaṃ padesasabbaṃ nāma. Iti pañcārammaṇamattaṃ padesasabbaṃ, tebhūmakā dhammā sakkāyasabbaṃ, catubhūmakā dhammā āyatanasabbaṃ, yaṃ kiñci neyyaṃ sabbasabbaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa tebhūmakadhammesupi ekadesassa asaṅgaṇhanato. Sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ asaṅgaṇhanato. Āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Yasmā āyatanasabbena catubhūmakadhammāva pariggahitā , na lakkhaṇapaññattiyoti. Imasmiṃ pana sutte āyatanasabbaṃ adhippetaṃ, tatthāpi idha vipassanupagadhammāva gahetabbā.
“眼”有两种,就是智眼和肉眼。其中,智眼有五种:佛眼、法眼、遍眼、天眼、慧眼。在这五种当中,所谓佛眼,就是了知众生习性和随眠的智,以及了知众生根器优劣的智,就像经文里说的“以佛眼观察世间”那样。所谓法眼,就是下三道和三种果,就像经文里说的“远尘离垢的法眼生起”那样。所谓遍眼,就是一切知智,就像经文里说的“登上高楼,具足遍眼”那样。所谓天眼,就是依靠光明增强而生起的智,就像经文里说的“以清净的天眼”那样。所谓慧眼,就是透彻辨别四谛的智,就像经文里说的“眼生起”那样。肉眼也有两种:扶根肉眼和净色肉眼。其中,位于眼眶里、被眼膜包住的那团肉,简略地说,有地、水、火、风四界,以及色、香、味、食素、生起处、命根、性根、眼净色、身净色,一共十三种成分。详细地说,地、水、火、风四界加上色、香、味、食素、生起处,这九种按四种生起方式计算,共有三十六种;命根、性根、眼净色、身净色这四种则是业所生,所以合计四十种成分,这就叫扶根肉眼。而其中安住在以白膜为界、被黑膜环绕的视膜里,能看见色法的净色本身,这就叫净色肉眼。关于它以及耳等其他诸根的详细解说,在《清净道论》里已经说过了。巴利
Cakkhūti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) dve cakkhūni ñāṇacakkhu ceva maṃsacakkhu ca. Tattha ñāṇacakkhu pañcavidhaṃ buddhacakkhu dhammacakkhu samantacakkhu dibbacakkhu paññācakkhūti. Tesu buddhacakkhu nāma āsayānusayañāṇañceva indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca, yaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283) āgataṃ. Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṃ ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.355; saṃ. ni. 5.1081) āgataṃ. Samantacakkhu nāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (dī. ni. 2.70; ma. ni. 1.282) āgataṃ. Dibbacakkhu nāma ālokavaḍḍhanena uppannañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148, 284) āgataṃ. Paññācakkhu nāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) āgataṃ. Maṃsacakkhupi duvidhaṃ sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti. Tesu yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehi parivārito maṃsapiṇḍo, yattha catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavo jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti saṅkhepato terasa sambhārā honti, vitthārato pana catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavoti ime nava catusamuṭṭhānavasena chattiṃsa, jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti ime kammasamuṭṭhānā tāva cattāroti cattālīsa sambhārā honti, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yaṃ panettha setamaṇḍalaparicchinnena kaṇhamaṇḍalena parivārite diṭṭhimaṇḍale sanniviṭṭhaṃ rūpadassanasamatthaṃ pasādamattaṃ, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Tassa tato paresañca sotādīnaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.436) vuttāva.
这里,世尊就是取这个净色眼,然后说“眼在燃烧”等等。其中,“燃烧”是指被点燃、炽烈燃烧,意思是被十一种火燃烧成一片火焰。依止于眼生起的识,就是眼识;或者,以眼为因的识,就是眼识。当然,色、光明、作意等也是这个识生起的因,但它们是共同的因,而眼是不共的因,所以这里用不共的因来命名,就像说“麦芽”一样。耳识等也是同样的道理。依止于眼生起的触,就是眼触,这是与眼识相应的触的同义语。耳触等也是同样的道理。以眼触为缘而生起的感受,就是以眼触为根本因生起的领受、推度、确定和速行阶段的感受。至于与眼识相应的受,眼触作为它的缘,那就不用多说了。因为眼触对同时生起的受,是以俱生等方式为缘;对不是同时生起的受,是以亲依止等方式为缘。所以经中说“以眼触为缘,生起乐受、苦受或不苦不乐受”。耳门感受等也是同样的道理。这里,“意”指的是有分心,因为这里说的是意门。“法”指的是法所缘。“意识”指的是伴随转向的速行。“意触”指的是与有分同时生起的触。“感受”指的是与转向受一起的速行受。至于与有分相应的受,那就不用提了。或者,如果不把转向从有分中分开来看,那么“意”应当看作与转向相俱的有分。“法”就是法所缘。“意识”就是速行识。“意触”就是与有分和转向同时生起的触。“感受”就是与速行同时生起的受,也可以包括与有分和转向同时生起的受。巴利
Tattha yadidaṃ pasādacakkhu, tañca gahetvā bhagavā ‘‘cakkhu āditta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ādittanti padittaṃ, sampajjalitaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ekajālībhūtanti attho. Cakkhusannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, cakkhussa vā kāraṇabhūtassa viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ rūpālokamanasikārādayopi tassa viññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ, te pana sādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ, cakkhu asādhāraṇanti asādhāraṇakāraṇenāyaṃ niddeso yathā ‘‘yavaṅkuro’’ti. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Cakkhusannissito phasso cakkhusamphasso, cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjativedayitanti cakkhusamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā uppannā sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanajavanavedanā. Cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya pana vedanāya cakkhusamphassassa paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Cakkhusamphasso hi sahajātāya vedanāya sahajātādivasena, asahajātāya upanissayādivasena paccayo hoti. Teneva ‘‘cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṃ sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sotadvāravedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ manodvārassa adhippetattā. Dhammāti dhammārammaṇaṃ. Manoviññāṇanti sahāvajjanakaṃ javanaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgasahajāto phasso. Vedayitanti āvajjanavedanāya saddhiṃ javanavedanā. Bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vedanāya gahaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Āvajjanaṃ vā bhavaṅgato amocetvā manoti sāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhammāti dhammārammaṇameva. Manoviññāṇanti javanaviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajāto phasso. Vedayitanti javanasahajātā vedanā, bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajātāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.
在“贪火”等说法里,贪本身就是火,因为它有燃烧的作用,所以叫贪火。贪生起时变得很猛烈,会燃烧、烧毁众生,因此称为“火”。另外两种(嗔、痴)也是同样的道理。这里有几个事例(《长部注》3.305;《分别论注》924):有一位年轻比丘尼,去到心山寺的伍波萨他堂时,站在那里看着守门人的形貌。当时她内心的贪变得极其猛烈地生起,由那贪所生的火界以极其猛烈的力量,连同与它同时生起的诸法,烧毁了心脏所在的地方,就像外面的火遇到可燃物一样。于是那位比丘尼被烧死。比丘尼们走过来,说:“这位年轻比丘尼还站着,去叫她吧。”一个人走过去抓住她的手,问:“你为什么站着?”刚一抓住,她就转过身倒下了。这就是贪具有燃烧作用的一个事例。巴利
Rāgagginātiādīsu rāgova anudahanaṭṭhena aggīti rāgaggi. Rāgo hi tikhiṇaṃ hutvā uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Tatrimāni vatthūni (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. aṭṭha. 924) – ekā daharabhikkhunī cittalapabbatavihāre uposathāgāraṃ gantvā dvārapālarūpaṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā. Athassā anto rāgo tikhiṇataro hutvā uppanno, tasmā taṃsamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu ativiya tikhiṇabhāvena saddhiṃ attanā sahajātadhammehi hadayapadesaṃ jhāpesi yathā taṃ bāhirā tejodhātu sannissayaṃ, tena sā bhikkhunī jhāyitvā kālamakāsi. Bhikkhuniyo gacchamānā ‘‘ayaṃ daharā ṭhitā, pakkosatha na’’nti āhaṃsu. Ekā gantvā ‘‘kasmā ṭhitāsī’’ti hatthe gaṇhi. Gahitamattā parivattitvā papatā. Idaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatāya vatthu.
由于嗔会互相烧毁,应当把“意愤恚天”理解为例子。据说(《长部注》1.47-48),在那些天人中,有一位天子心想“我要去玩赏星宿”,就带着随从乘战车沿路行进。这时另一位天子正出门,看见他在前面走,就生气地想:“唉,这个可怜虫,好像以前从没见过似的,看见这个就欢喜得像是胀起来、像是要裂开一样地走着。”走在前面那位也转过身来,看见他生气,心想“生气的人可是很容易认出来的”,知道他在生气后,就反过来对他生气:“你生气又能把我怎么样?这份成就,是我靠布施、持戒等得来的,不是靠你得来的。”当一个人生气、另一个人不生气时,不生气的那位就能保护那个生气的人。因为那人的嗔怒,在对方不生气时,无所依著,只生起一次,没有反复,就无法使他堕落,就像火碰到水一样熄灭了,所以不生气的人能保护他不堕落。但如果两个人都生气,一个人的嗔怒就成了另一个人的缘,另一个人的嗔怒也成了这个人的缘,结果两人就像哭喊着一样,一起从后宫眷属中死去。因为当双方都生气时,嗔怒以彼此不断增长的方式,变得极其锐利,生起时烧灼心所依处,毁坏极其细软的身体,于是整个自体都消失不见。这就是嗔会互相烧毁的例子。巴利
Dosassa pana anudahanatāya manopadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Tesu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.47-48) kira eko devaputto ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmī’’ti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘bho ayaṃ kapaṇo adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā pītiyā uddhumāto viya bhijjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā kuddhā nāma suvijānā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati. Kuddhassa hi so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ekavārameva uppattiyā anāsevano cāvetuṃ na sakkoti, udakaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho taṃ cavanato rakkhati. Ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti, tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Ubhosu hi kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ niddahanto accantasukhumālaṃ karajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati. Idaṃ dosassa anudahanatāya vatthu.
由于愚痴没有烧尽,应当把嬉戏过失天众理解为这类情况。因为由于愚痴,他们正念混乱,所以因为嬉戏而错过了进食的时间,就死去了。据说(《长部注》1.45-46),他们凭着由殊胜福德所得的广大荣华富贵,在玩赏星宿时,由于那份荣华极其广大,连“我们吃了,我们没吃”都不知道。于是从错过一餐开始,即使后来不停地吃、不停地喝,也还是一样死去,根本活不下来。为什么呢?因为业生之火的力量太强。人类的业生之火很弱,而业生之身却很强。因为他们的火弱、业生身强,所以即使过了七天,也还能靠热水、酸粥等来支撑身体。可是天众的火很强,因为那是广大福德所生,又能消化广大、厚重、滋润的天食;而他们的业生身却很弱,因为柔软、微细、娇嫩。正因如此,世尊在因陀罗窟对无法站在自然地面上的帝释天神说:“你应当决意使身体变粗重。”所以他们只要错过一次进食的时间,就撑不住了。就像夏天正午放在热石头上的莲花或青莲花,到了傍晚,即使拿一百壶水来浇,也恢复不了原样,只会枯死;同样,他们后来即使不停地吃、不停地喝,也还是一样死去,根本活不下来。巴利
Mohassa pana anudahanatāya khiḍḍāpadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Mohavasena hi tesaṃ satisammoso hoti, tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhārakālaṃ ativattetvā kālaṃ karonti. Te (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.45-46) kira puññavisesādhigatena mahantena attano sirivibhavena nakkhattaṃ kīḷantā tāya sampattimahantatāya ‘‘āhāraṃ paribhuñjimha, na paribhuñjimhā’’tipi na jānanti. Atha ekāhārātikkamanato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā? Kammajatejassa balavatāya. Manussānañhi kammajatejo mando, karajakāyo balavā. Tesaṃ tejassa mandatāya karajakāyassa balavatāya sattāhampi atikkamitvā uṇhodakaacchayāguādīhi sakkā vatthuṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Devānaṃ pana tejo balavā hoti uḷārapuññanibbattattā uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajiraṇato ca, karajaṃ mandaṃ mudusukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikakāyaṃ adhiṭṭhāhī’’ti āha, tasmā te ekaṃ āhāravelaṃ atikkamitvā saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā nāma gimhānaṃ majjhanhike tattapāsāṇe ṭhapitaṃ padumaṃ vā uppalaṃ vā sāyanhasamaye ghaṭasatenapi siñciyamānaṃ pākatikaṃ na hoti vinassatiyeva, evameva pacchā nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti.
那么,他们的食物是什么?进食时间又是什么时候?所有欲界天人都以天食为食,而越是上层的天人,其天食比起下层天人的天食就越殊胜。他们按照各自的天数,一天一天地吃。不过有些人说:“他们吃的天食只有猫爪印那么大。那食物一放到舌头上,就能遍满全身,直到发尖和指甲尖,而且以他们自己的天数来算,能维持七天。”巴利
Ko pana tesaṃ āhāro, kā āhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhā āhāro, so heṭṭhimehi heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ paṇītatamo hoti. Taṃ yathāsakaṃ divasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ bhuñjanti. So jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, tesaṃyeva divasavasena sattadivasaṃ yāpanasamatthova hotī’’ti vadanti.
那么,哪些天人叫嬉戏生过患天呢?注疏里没有具体指出“就是这些”,因为它是笼统地说“业所生的火界强盛,而业所生的身体微弱”,所以应当理解为:凡是靠段食维持生命的(天人),这样做的话,就会这样死去。不过有些人说:“那些天人是化乐天和他化自在天。他们只因为对嬉戏产生过患,就被称为嬉戏生过患天。”至于心意生过患天,注疏里说就是四大王天。但有些人说:“嬉戏生过患天也是四大王天。”这样,贪等三种,以燃烧之义,应当知道是“火”。而生等三种燃烧,则因为它们是种种苦的所依而燃烧,所以是火。忧等燃烧之义是显而易见的。这里其余的内容和前面所说的一样。因此,在这部经中,通过眼等以十一种火燃烧,说明了苦相;并且因为以苦性说明了苦的状态。巴利
Ke pana te khiḍḍāpadosikā nāma devāti? Ime nāmāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāraṇā natthi, ‘‘kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ manda’’nti avisesena vuttattā pana ye keci kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino evaṃ karonti, te evaṃ cavantīti veditabbā. Keci panāhu ‘‘nimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattino te devā. Khiḍḍāya padussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā’’ti. Manopadosikā pana cātumahārājikāti aṭṭhakathāyameva vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘khiḍḍāpadosikāpi cātumahārājikāyevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ tāva rāgādayo tayo anudahanaṭṭhena ‘‘aggī’’ti veditabbā. Jātiādittayaṃ pana nānappakāradukkhavatthubhāvena anudahanato aggi. Sokādīnaṃ anudahanatā pākaṭāyeva. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvena dukkhamatāya dukkhabhāvassa kathitattā.
频婆娑罗会见故事的注释巴利
Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā
55 55. 现在,为了说明“那时,世尊在伽耶山随自己的喜好住了一段时间后”等句中那些含义隐晦的词语的注解,开始讲“拉提瓦那,即多罗园”等内容。其中,“多罗园”是因为多罗树很多而得名的园林。在“有些人朝着世尊所在的方向合掌致敬”等句中,“合掌致敬”是针对那些两边摇摆的人说的。据说他们这样想:“如果持邪见的人责问我们‘你们为什么礼敬沙门乔达摩’,我们就回答‘仅仅合掌难道就算礼敬了吗?’如果持正见的人责问我们‘你们为什么不礼敬世尊’,我们就回答‘难道只有用头撞地才算礼敬吗?合掌不也是礼敬吗?’”所谓告知名字和族姓,就是说“乔达摩尊者,我是某某人的儿子,名叫达陀,名叫密陀,来到这里”的人,是在告知名字;说“乔达摩尊者,我是瓦塞塔族人,是迦旃延族人,来到这里”的人,是在告知族姓。据说这些贫穷的没落家族子弟,是为了在众人中凭借名字和族姓出名,才这样做的。至于那些默然坐着的人,则既是狡诈者,也是愚痴者。其中,狡诈者想:“跟一两个人说上几句话就成了熟人,一旦熟了,不给一两份施食就不合适”,为了让自己脱身,便默然坐着。愚痴者则纯粹因为无知而坐着,就像一块泥团一样,随便坐在哪里都默然不动。巴利
55. Idāni ‘‘atha kho bhagavā gayāsīse yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā’’tiādīsu yā sā anuttānapadavaṇṇanā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘laṭṭhivaneti tāluyyāne’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tāluyyāneti tālarukkhānaṃ bahubhāvato evaṃladdhanāme uyyāne. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvātiādīsu añjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ye ubhatopakkhikā, te sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Te kira evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ ‘kiṃ añjalimattakaraṇenapi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti, nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti. Nāmagottaṃ sāvetvāti ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idha āgato’’ti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma, ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ vāseṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idhāgato’’ti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmāti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye pana tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonte vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhī nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittā mattikāpiṇḍo viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.
“对瘦弱者的教导”在这里,为了先说明“对瘦弱者的教导”这个含义的分类,就说了“因为苦行生活而身体瘦弱”等等。“火供”就是侍奉火。这里,色等事物因为具有可欲求的意义,所以被称为“欲”,因此说“这些色等就是欲”。“祭祀得以成就”,是说他们宣称因为祭祀而成功。“在依着中”:这里有四种依着,就是欲依着、蕴依着、烦恼依着、行依着。欲也是“缘于五种欲乐而生起的快乐和喜悦,这就是欲的滋味”所说的那种快乐的依止处,因为“快乐依于此”这个说法,所以被称为“依着”。蕴因为是一切以蕴为根源的苦的依止处,烦恼因为是恶趣之苦的依止处,行因为是生存之苦的依止处,所以都被称为“依着”。其中,这里指的是蕴依着,所以说“了知在蕴依着中的垢秽”。“祭祀只是垢秽”,是说他们宣称因为祭祀而成就的只是垢秽。“在已献供中”指大祭祀。“在已奉事中”指每天应当做的侍火之事。“不执著于欲有”,就是不粘著于欲有,意思是说从中解脱。巴利
Kisakovadānoti ettha kisakānaṃ ovadāno kisakovadānoti imaṃ tāva atthavikappaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tāpasacariyāya kisasarīrattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aggihuttanti aggiparicaraṇaṃ. Rūpādayova idha kāmanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘ete rūpādayo kāme’’ti. Yaññā abhivadantīti yāgahetu ijjhantīti vadanti. Upadhīsūti ettha cattāro upadhī kāmupadhi khandhupadhi kilesupadhi abhisaṅkhārupadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.167) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato upadhīyati ettha sukhanti iminā vacanatthena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti. Khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti, tesu khandhupadhi idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘khandhupadhīsu malanti ñatvā’’ti. Yaññā malameva vadantīti yāgahetu malameva ijjhatīti vadanti. Yiṭṭheti mahāyāge. Huteti divase divase kattabbaaggiparicaraṇe. Kāmabhave asattanti kāmabhave alaggaṃ, tabbinimuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
57-58 “希求”就是渴望。在种种天界黄金里,因为肩胛金最为上等,所以说“肩胛金块之色”。就像在人使用的黄金中,掺合金是下等的,经过熔炼的金更好,从矿里产出的金又胜过熔炼金,而任何一种天界黄金都更殊胜;同样,在天界黄金中,娑多金胜过占弭迦罗金,赡部洲金又胜过娑多金,肩胛金又胜过赡部洲金,所以它是最上等的。“肩胛金块”是指用一尼迦分量的肩胛金做成的金片。用不足一尼迦的金做成,就经不起锤打和磨光;用超过一尼迦的金做成,虽然经得起锤打和磨光,却没有色泽,显得质地粗糙;用正好一尼迦的金做成,既经得起锤打和磨光,又有色泽。有人说一尼迦是二十金,另有人说是二十五金。但《中部义注》中说:“所谓尼迦,就是五金。”又说金是四达罗那。巴利
57-58.Āsīsanāti patthanā. Dibbasuvaṇṇesupi siṅgīsuvaṇṇassa sabbaseṭṭhattā ‘‘siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yatheva hi manussaparibhoge suvaṇṇe yuttikataṃ hīnaṃ, tato rasaviddhaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, rasaviddhato ākaruppannaṃ, tato yaṃ kiñci dibbaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ dibbasuvaṇṇesupi cāmīkarato sātakumbhaṃ, sātakumbhato jambunadaṃ, jambunadato siṅgīsuvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Siṅgīnikkhanti ca nikkhaparimāṇena siṅgīsuvaṇṇena kataṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ. Ūnakanikkhena katañhi ghaṭṭanamajjanakkhamaṃ na hoti, atirekena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanaṃ khamati, vaṇṇavantaṃ pana na hoti, pharusadhātukaṃ khāyati, nikkhena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanañceva khamati vaṇṇavantañca hoti. Nikkhaṃ pana vīsatisuvaṇṇanti keci . Pañcavīsatisuvaṇṇanti apare. Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘nikkhaṃ nāma pañcasuvaṇṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Suvaṇṇo nāma catudharaṇanti vadanti.
在十种圣者安住中已安住者——巴利
Dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāsoti –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘断除了五支,具备了六支,拥有一重守护,安住于四种依靠,舍弃了种种个别的见解,彻底止息了追寻,意念清净无染,身行轻安,心得善解脱,慧得善解脱。巴利
‘‘Idha, (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato ekārakkho caturāpasseno panuṇṇapaccekasacco samavayasaṭṭhesano anāvilasaṅkappo passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro suvimuttacitto suvimuttapañño.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是断除了五支呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘断除了欲贪,断除了嗔恚,断除了昏沉睡眠,断除了掉举追悔,断除了疑。比丘们,比丘就是这样断除了五支。巴利
‘‘Kathañca , bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才算具备六支呢?在这里,比丘们,比丘用眼看到色之后,既不感到高兴,也不感到不高兴,他安住在舍心中,保持正念和正知。以耳闻声后……以鼻嗅香后……以舌尝味后……以身触触后……用意认识到法之后,既不感到高兴,也不感到不高兴,他安住在舍心中,保持正念和正知。比丘们,比丘就是这样具备六支的。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才算具备一种守护呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘以念守护的心而具足。比丘们,比丘就是这样具备一种守护的。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才算具备四种依止呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘经过审慎考虑后受用一样东西,经过审慎考虑后忍受一样东西,经过审慎考虑后避开一样东西,经过审慎考虑后去除一样东西。比丘们,比丘就是这样具备四种依止的。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodeti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是已经丢弃了种种各别见解的人呢?在这里,比丘们,那些形形色色的沙门、婆罗门所持有的种种各别见解,比丘对它们全都已丢弃、彻底丢弃、抛弃、吐掉、放开、断除、彻底舍离。比丘们,比丘这样就是已经丢弃了种种各别见解的人。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ puthupaccekasaccāni , sabbāni tāni nuṇṇāni honti panuṇṇāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti.
诸比丘,怎样才算是已止息寻求的比丘?在此,比丘已舍断了欲寻求,已舍断了有寻求,梵行寻求也已止息。诸比丘,这样的比丘便是已止息寻求者。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是思惟清净无浊呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘已经断除了欲思惟,已经断除了嗔恚思惟,已经断除了害思惟。比丘们,比丘这样就是思惟清净无浊。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṃsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是身行轻安的人呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘由舍断乐与舍断苦,先已灭没喜与忧,成就并安住于不苦不乐、舍念清净的第四禅。比丘们,比丘这样就是身行轻安的人。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是心善解脱呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘的心从贪解脱,从嗔解脱,从痴解脱。比丘们,这样,比丘就是心善解脱。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno rāgācittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, dosā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, mohā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才算拥有善解脱的智慧呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘清楚地知道:我的贪已经断除,根已被斩断,就像被砍断的多罗树桩一样,已不存在,未来不会再产生。他清楚地知道:我的嗔已经断除……我的痴已经断除,根已被斩断,就像被砍断的多罗树桩一样,已不存在,未来不会再产生。比丘们,这样,比丘就是拥有善解脱的智慧。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti, ‘doso me pahīno…pe… moho me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) –
他就这样安住在已经达到的十种圣者住处中。巴利
Evamāgatesu dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāso.
这里,“住处”是因为他们住在这里;只属于圣者的住处,才叫“圣者住处”,因为非圣者不可能有这样的住处。这里说的“圣者”,是以最高的标准来指漏尽者。“一守护者”是说,他有一种以念为守护的守护,所以叫一守护者。因为漏尽者在三个门(身、口、意)中,任何时候念都在发挥守护的作用。因此说他无论行走、站立、睡着、醒着,智见都恒常不断地现前,所以这样说。巴利
Tattha vasanti etthāti vāsā, ariyānaṃ eva vāsāti ariyavāsā anariyānaṃ tādisānaṃ vāsānaṃ asambhavato. Ariyāti cettha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena khīṇāsavā gahitā. Ekārakkhoti ekā satisaṅkhātā ārakkhā etassāti ekārakkho. Khīṇāsavassa (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) hi tīsu dvāresu sabbakāle sati ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti. Tenevassa carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hotīti vuccati.
四依止者:因为他有四种依止,所以叫四依止者。思择后:就是以智慧(长部义注 3.308)。受用:就是用智慧了知之后,只受用应当受用的。它的详细内容,应依照“如理思择后受用衣服”等的方式来了知。思择后忍受一种:就是用智慧了知之后,只忍受应当忍受的。这里的详细内容,应依照“如理思择后忍耐寒冷”等的方式来了知。回避:就是用智慧了知之后,只回避应当回避的。它的详细内容,应依照“如理思择后回避凶猛的大象”等的方式来了知。去除:以智慧了知后,只去除适合去除的,予以驱除、逐出,不令其住于内。它的详细内容,应依照“不容受已生起的欲寻”等方式来了知。巴利
Caturāpassenoti cattāri apassenāni apassayā etassāti caturāpasseno. Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.308). Paṭisevatīti ñāṇena ñatvā sevitabbayuttakameva sevati. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena veditabbo. Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetīti ñāṇena ñatvā adhivāsetabbayuttakameva adhivāseti. Vitthāro panettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24) nayena veditabbo. Parivajjetīti ñāṇena ñatvā parivajjetabbayuttakameva parivajjeti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo. Vinodetīti ñāṇena ñatvā vinodetabbameva vinodeti nudati nīharati anto vasituṃ na deti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.
已断除个别执取真实者:因为把“唯此见是真实,唯此是真实”这样各别地执取,所以称为个别执取的真实;这些见真实已被驱除、逐出、断除,所以是已断除个别执取真实者。种种沙门婆罗门:指众多的沙门婆罗门。这里,沙门是出家者,婆罗门是称“尊者”的人。种种个别执取真实:即众多各别执取的真实,意思是“唯此见是真实,唯此是真实”这样各别执取的众多真实。已驱除:即已逐出。已彻底驱除:即已善加逐出。已舍弃:即已释放。已吐出:即已呕出。已释放:即已切断束缚。已断除:即已舍断。已彻底舍离:即已如此舍离,使心不再返回它们。所有这些词,都是对证得圣道之前所执取的见执被舍断、释放等状态的同义表达。巴利
Panuṇṇapaccekasaccoti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.38; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitattā paccekasaṅkhātāni diṭṭhisaccāni panuṇṇāni nīhaṭāni pahīnāni assāti panuṇṇapaccekasacco. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Ettha ca samaṇāti pabbajjupagatā. Brāhmaṇāti bhovādino. Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni, ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni bahūni saccānīti attho. Nuṇṇānīti nīhaṭāni. Panuṇṇānīti suṭṭhu nīhatāni. Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni. Vantānīti vamitāni. Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni. Pahīnānīti pajahitāni. Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ ārohanti, evaṃ paṭivissajjitāni. Sabbāneva cetāni ariyamaggādhigamato pubbe gahitassa diṭṭhiggāhassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.
“已完全舍离寻求者”:这里,avayā 的意思是无缺减,saṭṭhā 的意思是已舍离。正确地、无缺地舍离了寻求,所以叫“已完全舍离寻求者”,意思是正确地舍离了一切寻求。“心从贪解脱”等说法,是通过说明贪等已被断除,来讲道的作用已经完成。“我的贪已断除”等说法,则是以省察的方式来讲圣果。因为证得最高果位时,他彻底了知贪等不再生起的法性,而这种了知就是省察智。其中,断除五支、驱除个别执取的真实、寻求的完全舍离,在所说的“思择后受用一种、忍受一种、回避一种、去除一种”这些依止中,去除是道的作用,其余的也都由道来完成。巴利
Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) ettha avayāti anūnā. Saṭṭhāti nissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano, sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho. ‘‘Rāgā cittaṃ vimutta’’ntiādīhi maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā rāgādīnaṃ pahīnabhāvadīpanato. ‘‘Rāgo me pahīno’’tiādīhi paccavekkhaṇāmukhena ariyaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Adhigate hi aggaphale sabbaso rāgādīnaṃ anuppādadhammataṃ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti. Tattha pañcaṅgavippahānapaccekasaccāpanodanaesanāsamavayasajjanāni ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati adhivāseti parivajjeti vinodetī’’ti vuttesu apassenesu vinodanā ca maggakiccāneva, itare ca maggeneva samijjhanti.
称为十力者,是因为他具备十种力,也就是所谓的身力和智力。如来的力有两种:身力和智力。其中,身力应当依照象的种姓来理解。古人这样说过:巴利
Dasabaloti kāyabalasaṅkhātāni ñāṇabalasaṅkhātāni ca dasa balāni etassāti dasabalo. Duvidhañhi tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“ 黑象、恒河象、白象、铜黄褐象,
香象、吉祥象、金象、伍波萨他象、六牙象——这就是十种。”巴利
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha 76; udā. aṭṭha. 75; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 1.39; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.44; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 81);
这十种就是象族。其中,黑象应当理解为普通象族。十个人的体力,等于一头黑象的体力。十头黑象的体力,等于一头恒河象的体力。十头恒河象的体力,等于一头白象的体力。十头白象的体力,等于一头铜象的体力。十头铜象的体力,等于一头黄褐象的体力。十头黄褐象的体力,等于一头香象的体力。十头香象的体力,等于一头吉祥象的体力。十头吉祥象的体力,等于一头金象的体力。十头金象的体力,等于一头伍波萨他象的体力。十头伍波萨他象的体力,等于一头六牙象的体力。十头六牙象的体力,等于一位如来的体力。这也称为那罗延坚固力。其中,“那罗”指光芒,因为众多种种光芒从它产生,所以叫“那罗延”,也就是金刚,因此意思是金刚坚固力。这个力量按普通象来算,等于百亿头象的体力;按人来算,等于十千俱胝人的体力。这就是如来的体力。巴利
Imāni hi dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tattha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā tato uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ.
智慧力在经典里已经说过了。这里就是那段经文(《中部》1.148;《增支部》10.21)——巴利
Ñāṇabalaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi (ma. ni. 1.148; a. ni. 10.21) –
舍利弗,如来确实有这十种如来力。具足这些力,如来才能宣称自己坐上了牛王的位置,在大众中作狮子吼,转动梵轮。是哪十种呢?舍利弗,在这里,如来如实了知什么是可能的、什么是不可能的。舍利弗,如来如实了知什么是可能的、什么是不可能的,这就是如来的如来力。依靠这种力,如来宣称自己坐上了牛王的位置,在大众中作狮子吼,转动梵轮。巴利
‘‘Dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalāni, yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Katamāni dasa? Idha, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. (1)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知过去、未来、现在一切所造业的果报,了知它们依处、依因。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso vipākaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (2)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知能导向一切处的行道……(中略)(3)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sabbatthagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (3)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知世间种种界、差别界……(中略)(4)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekadhātuṃ nānādhātuṃ lokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (4)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知众生的种种意乐差别……(中略)(5)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (5)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知其他众生、其他个人的根器优劣差别……(中略)(6)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (6)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知禅、解脱、定、等至的杂染、清净和出起……(中略)(7)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (7)
再者,舍利弗,如来能忆念种种过去世。比如一生、两生……(中略)如来就这样忆念种种过去世,连同它们的样貌和细节……(中略)(8)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ? Ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo…pe… iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati…pe…. (8)
再者,舍利弗,如来以清净、超越常人的天眼,看见众生正在死去、正在投生,有低劣的、有殊胜的,有美丽的、有丑陋的,有投生善趣的、有堕入恶趣的,他了知众生都是随自己的业而流转……(中略)(9)巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti…pe…. (9)
再者,舍利弗,如来由于诸漏灭尽,于现法自己以证智作证无漏心解脱、慧解脱而住……(中略)……舍利弗,这也是如来的如来之力。依靠这种力,如来宣称牛王之位,在众人中作狮子吼,转梵轮。舍利弗,这些就是如来的十种如来之力。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati…pe… idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Imāni kho, sāriputta, dasa tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti. (10)
在这里,“处为处”是指因缘为因缘。能够如实了知:“凡是某些法作为某些法生起的因和缘,这就是处;凡是某些法不是某些法生起的因和缘,这就是非处”,他就如实了知处为处、非处为非处。“此亦”是指以此智。巴利
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha. 760) ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. ‘‘Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhāna’’nti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampīti yena ñāṇena.
业受持:就是受持之后所造的善业和不善业,或者业本身就是业受持。处、因:就是从缘和从因来说。其中,趣、依、时、方便是果报的处,业是因。巴利
Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu.
“遍行一切”是指既通往一切趣,也通往非趣。“行道”就是道路。“如实了知”:即使许多人一起杀害同一个众生,所有人的思都以那个众生的命根为所缘,但他们的业却各有不同。其中有人怀着恭敬、生起意欲去做;有人被别人逼迫,听到“你也来做吧”就去做;有人看似也有同样的意欲,不受阻碍地跟着做。因此,他们当中有人因这同样的业而投生地狱,有人投生畜生道,有人投生饿鬼界。如来在造业的那一刻就知道:“因为以这种方式造了业,这个人将投生地狱,这个人将投生畜生道,这个人将投生饿鬼界。”对于正在投生地狱的,也知道:“这个人将投生大地狱,这个人将投生近边地狱。”对于正在投生畜生道的,也知道:“这个人将成为无足者,这个人将成为二足者,这个人将成为四足者,这个人将成为多足者。”对于正在投生饿鬼界的,也知道:“这个人将成为被烈火焦渴所烧者,这个人将成为饥渴者,这个人将成为靠他人施舍活命者。”对于这些业,也知道:“这个业将牵引结生,这个业在由别的业所给的结生中,将成为依止的异熟。”巴利
Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā tassevekassa jīvitindriyārammaṇā, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena chandajāto karoti, eko ‘‘ehi tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti, eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhiyamāno vicarati, tasmā tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa mahāniraye nibbattissati, esa ussadaniraye’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppādo, esa bahuppādo’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti. Tesu ca kammesu ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhissati, etaṃ aññena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti.
同样,当整个村子的人一起布施钵食时,虽然所有人的思都以那钵食为所缘,但他们的业却各有不同。因为其中有人是怀着恭敬心去做的,所以一切都和前面一样。因此,他们当中有些人转生到天界,有些人转生到人间。如来在造业的那一刻就知道:因为是以这种方式造作的,所以这个人将转生人间,那个人将转生天界;在那里,这个人将生在刹帝利家,这个人将生在婆罗门家,这个人将生在吠舍家,这个人将生在首陀罗家;这个人将生在他化自在天,这个人将生在化乐天,这个人将生在兜率天,这个人将生在夜摩天,这个人将生在三十三天,这个人将生在四大王天,这个人将生在地居天。像这样,在造业的那一刻,他就知道各处种种的差别,比如低劣与殊胜、美貌与丑陋、随从少与随从多等等。巴利
Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato piṇḍapātaṃ dadamānesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā piṇḍapātārammaṇāva, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena karotīti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Tasmā tesu ca keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti. ‘‘Iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke, tatthāpi esa khattiyakule, esa brāhmaṇakule, esa vessakule, esa suddakule, esa paranimmitavasavattīsu, esa nimmānaratīsu, esa tusitesu, esa yāmesu, esa tāvatiṃsesu, esa cātumahārājikesu, esa bhummadevesū’’tiādinā tattha tattha hīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaappaparivāramahāparivāratādibhedaṃ taṃ taṃ visesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti.
同样,在有人刚开始建立内观的时候,他就知道:“以这种方式,他将无法觉察到任何东西,他只会确定四大种而已,他只会停留在对色的摄受上,他只会停留在对非色的摄受上,他只会停留在对名色的摄受上,他只会停留在对缘的摄受上,他只会停留在以相为所缘的内观上,他只会证得初果,他只会证得第二果,他只会证得第三果,他将会证得阿拉汉果。”在有人修习遍业处的时候,他也知道:“他只会停留在遍业处的阶段,他会生起禅相,他只会达到安止,他会以禅那为足处,建立内观,然后证得阿拉汉果。”巴利
Tathā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesuyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa rūpapariggahe eva ṭhassati, esa arūpapariggaheyeva, esa nāmarūpapariggaheyeva, esa paccayapariggaheyeva, esa lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyameva, esa paṭhamaphaleyeva, esa dutiyaphale eva, esa tatiyaphale eva, esa arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti jānāti. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi ‘‘imassa parikammamattameva bhavissati, esa nimittaṃ uppādessati, esa appanaṃ eva pāpuṇissati, esa jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti jānāti.
“多界”是指由眼界等诸界,或由欲界等诸界而具有多种界。“种种界”是指因为那些界各自的特相不同,所以是种种不同种类的界。“世间”是指蕴世间、处世间、界世间。“如实了知”是指对那些界无颠倒地通达其自性。巴利
Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāradhātuṃ. Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati.
种种意乐,是指由低劣等种种意乐而形成的种种意乐状态。其他众生,是指殊胜的众生。其他人,是指比那些更低的众生。或者,这两个词其实是同一个意思,只是为了适应不同受教化的对象才分成两种说法。根之胜劣,是指信等诸根的优胜与低劣,也就是增长与衰退的意思。巴利
Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ. Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ, veneyyavasena pana dvedhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho.
“禅那、解脱、定、等至”是指:初禅等四种禅那,“有色者见色”等八种解脱,有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种次第等至。“杂染”是指退分法。“清净”是指胜分法。“出起”是指如《分别论》所说“清净也是出起,从彼彼定出起也是出起”,也就是熟练的禅那、有分和果等至。因为下下的熟练禅那成为上上的立足处,所以说“清净也是出起”。从一切禅那以有分而出起,从灭尽等至以果等至而出起。针对这一点,所以说“从彼彼定出起也是出起”。关于所有这些智的详细抉择,已在《迷惑冰消·分别论注》中讲述;而宿住随念、天眼、漏尽智的解说,则在《毗兰若篇》中已经详细阐明。巴利
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tametaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbañāṇānañca vitthārakathāya vinicchayo sammohavinodaniyaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 760) vutto. Pubbenivāsānussatidibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇakathā pana verañjakaṇḍe (pārā. 12) vitthāritāyeva.
“舍利弗,就是这些。”——对于之前说过的“舍利弗,如来有这十种如来力”,这里是在做确认:就是这些。对此,外道论师有这样的说法:“所谓的十力智并不是单独存在的,它只是遍知智的一种分类而已。”这种看法不能那样理解。因为十力智是另一种,遍知智又是另一种。十力智只了知各自各自的作用,而遍知智则连那些以及其余的全部都能了知。在十力智当中:第一只了知因与非因;第二只了知业与异熟果报的差别;第三只了知业的限定;第四只了知界的种种差别之因;第五只了知众生的意乐与胜解;第六只了知诸根的锐利与迟钝;第七只了知与禅那等俱行的那些杂染等;第八只了知过去曾住的诸蕴相续;第九只了知众生的死与结生;第十只了知谛的限定。而遍知智则了知这些所应了知的以及比这更上的,但并不承担它们全部的作用。因为它成为禅那后,不能进入;成为神通后,不能变化;成为道后,不能灭尽烦恼。如此,由于具足如上所说的身力和智力,世尊被称为“十力者”。巴利
Imāni kho sāriputtāti yāni pubbe ‘‘dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti avocaṃ, imāni tānīti appanaṃ karoti. Tattha paravādikathā hoti ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇaṃ sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi pajānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva , pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Iti yathāvuttakāyabalena ceva ñāṇabalena ca samannāgatattā bhagavā ‘‘dasabalo’’ti vuccati.
具足十种无学支,就是经中所说的“无学正见、无学正思惟、无学正语、无学正业、无学正命、无学正精进、无学正念、无学正定、无学正智、无学正解脱”,具备这十种无学法。从无学正见到无学正解脱,全都是与果相应的心法。在这里,正见和正智这两处说的都是慧,即“以正确照见为义是正见,以正确了知为义是正智”。因为照见和了知在所缘境上的作用方式是有差别的。而“正解脱”这个词,则是把前面没有说到的、其余与果定俱行的心法都收摄进来了。应当知道,即使是与圣果相应的心法,也因为是彻底从对立面解脱出来的,所以可以被称为“解脱”。巴利
Dasahi asekkhehi aṅgehi upetoti ‘‘asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360) evaṃ vuttehi dasahi asekkhadhammehi samannāgato. Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhiādayo ca sabbe phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā ‘‘sammā dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhi, sammā pajānanaṭṭhena sammāñāṇa’’nti. Atthi hi dassanajānanānaṃ visaye pavattiākāraviseso. Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattisahagatadhammā saṅgahitāti veditabbā . Ariyaphalasampayuttadhammāpi hi sabbaso paṭipakkhato vimuttataṃ upādāya vimuttīti vattabbataṃ labhanti.
59 用言语的声音来说“声音稀少”,意思是:即使在寺院附近行走的旅客,其说话声也很少。所谓“以城中的喧嚣声”,是指城中人们那种听不分明、混杂不清的喧闹声。众人聚集在一起共同发出的声音,确实就叫喧嚣。所谓“往来流动的人群”,是指在内部走动的人众。所谓“人们秘密活动的形态”,是指与人们秘密行事相称、相合的情形。所谓“相宜的寂静”,是指与独处相适合的情形。这里其余的内容都很浅显易懂。巴利
59.Vacanasaddena appasaddanti ārāmupacārena gacchato addhikajanassapi vacanasaddena appasaddaṃ. Nagaranigghosasaddenāti avibhāvitatthena nagare manussānaṃ nigghosasaddena. Manussehi samāgamma ekajjhaṃ pavattitasaddo hi nigghoso. Anusañcaraṇajanassāti antosañcārino janassa. Manussānaṃ rahassakiriyaṭṭhāniyanti manussānaṃ rahassakaraṇassa yuttaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Vivekānurūpanti ekībhāvassa anurūpaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
舍利弗与目犍连出家这件事的注释巴利
Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
60 60. 现在,为了说明“那时,桑恰亚游方者”等句中先前没有解释过的词,而说“舍利弗、目犍连”等。其中,舍利婆罗门女之子就是舍利弗,目犍连婆罗门女之子就是目犍连。据说,在我们佛陀出世以前,舍利弗就已经在离王舍城不远的伍巴帝萨村里,投生在舍利婆罗门女的腹中。就在同一天,他的朋友也在离王舍城不远的拘利陀村里,投生在目犍连婆罗门女的腹中。据说,这两个家族直到第七代都一直是紧密相连、彼此友好的世交。这两家在同一天为两人举行了安胎仪式。过了十个月出生后,又为他们请了六十六位乳母。命名那天,因为舍利婆罗门女之子是伍巴帝萨村中最高家族的儿子,就给他取名叫“伍巴帝萨”;另一个因为是拘利陀村中最高家族的儿子,就给他取名叫“拘利陀”。因此说“在家时,以伍巴帝萨和拘利陀这样的名字为人所知”。巴利
60. Idāni ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako’’tiādīsu apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ dassento ‘‘sāriputtamoggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sārībrāhmaṇiyā putto sāriputto, moggallībrāhmaṇiyā putto moggallāno. Amhākaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) bhagavato nibbattito puretarameva sāriputto rājagahanagarassa avidūre upatissagāme sārībrāhmaṇiyā nāma kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Taṃdivasamevassa sahāyopi rājagahasseva avidūre kolitagāme moggallībrāhmaṇiyā kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Tāni kira dvepi kulāni yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā ābaddhapaṭibaddhasahāyāneva. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ ekadivasameva gabbhaparihāraṃ adaṃsu. Dasamāsaccayena jātānampi tesaṃ chasaṭṭhi dhātiyo upanayiṃsu. Nāmaggahaṇadivase sārībrāhmaṇiyā puttassa upatissagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘upatisso’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu, itarassa kolitagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘kolito’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gihikāle upatisso kolitoti evaṃ paññāyamānanāmā’’ti.
关于“二百五十名青年随从”这一说法,也有人说是“各有五百名青年随从”。这一点在《增支部注》中确实说过——巴利
Aḍḍhateyyasatamāṇavakaparivārāti ettha pañcapañcasatamāṇavakaparivārātipi vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190) –
伍巴帝萨青年去河边或园林游玩的时候,有五百顶金轿随行;拘律陀青年则有五百辆骏马拉的车。两个人各自都有五百名青年跟随。巴利
‘‘Upatissamāṇavakassa kīḷanatthāya nadiṃ vā uyyānaṃ vā gamanakāle pañca suvaṇṇasivikāsatāni parivārāni honti, kolitamāṇavakassa pañca ājaññarathasatāni. Dvepi janā pañcapañcamāṇavakasataparivārā hontī’’ti.
在王舍城,每年都有一个叫“山岳节”的集会。他们两人总是在同一个地方安置座席,坐在一起看集会。在可笑的地方就笑,在令人敬畏的地方就生起敬畏,在适合布施的地方就布施。他们就这样一天天看集会,因为智慧已经成熟,有一天看集会时,不再像前几天那样在可笑的地方笑、在令人敬畏的地方生起敬畏、在适合布施的地方布施了。这两个人心里想:“这里有什么好看的?这些人全都会在不到一百年里就达到无相状态,我们应当去寻找解脱之法。”他们就这样抓住这个念头坐着。然后拘利陀对伍巴帝萨说:“伍巴帝萨贤友,你今天不像前几天那样欢喜兴奋,看起来不高兴。你察觉到了什么?”伍巴帝萨说:“拘利陀贤友,看这些没有意义,这是没用的,应当去寻找自己的解脱之法。我正这样想着坐在这里。你又为什么不高兴呢?”拘利陀也说了同样的话。伍巴帝萨知道他和自己想法一致,就说:“我们两个人都想得很好。不过,想寻求解脱之法的人应当出家。我们在谁那里出家呢?”巴利
Rājagahe ca anusaṃvaccharaṃ giraggasamajjaṃ nāma hoti. Tesaṃ dvinnampi ekaṭṭhāneyeva mañcakaṃ bandhanti. Dvepi ekatova nisīditvā samajjaṃ passitvā hasitabbaṭṭhāne hasanti, saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanti, dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyaṃ denti. Tesaṃ imināva niyāmena ekadivasaṃ samajjaṃ passantānaṃ paripākagatattā ñāṇassa purimadivasesu viya hasitabbaṭṭhāne hāso vā saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanaṃ vā dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyadānaṃ vā nāhosi. Dvepi pana janā evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘kiṃ ettha oloketabbaṃ atthi, sabbepime appatte vassasate apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissanti, amhehi pana ekaṃ mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ārammaṇaṃ gahetvā nisīdiṃsu. Tato kolito upatissaṃ āha ‘‘samma upatissa, na tvaṃ aññadivasesu viya haṭṭhapahaṭṭho, anattamanadhātukosi, kiṃ te sallakkhita’’nti. ‘‘Samma kolita, etesaṃ olokane sāro natthi, niratthakametaṃ, attano mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ cintayanto nisinnomhīti. Tvaṃ pana kasmā anattamanoti. Sopi tatheva āha. Athassa attanā saddhiṃ ekajjhāsayataṃ ñatvā upatisso evamāha ‘‘amhākaṃ ubhinnaṃ sucintitaṃ, mokkhadhammaṃ pana gavesantehi ekā pabbajjā laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, kassa santike pabbajāmā’’ti.
那时,游方者桑恰亚住在王舍城,和一大群游方弟子在一起。他们心想“我们要在他座下出家”,就带着五百名青年在桑恰亚座下出家了。从他们出家那时起,桑恰亚就获得了超常的利养和名声。他们只用几天就彻底掌握了桑恰亚的全部教义,于是问:“老师,您所知道的教法就只有这些,还是另有更多?”桑恰亚说:“就只有这些,你们已经全都知道了。”听了他的话,他们心想:“既然这样,在他座下修梵行就没有意义了。我们是为了寻求解脱法才出家的,在他座下没法生起解脱法。不过赡部洲很大,我们游历村落、城镇和王都,一定会遇到宣说解脱法的老师。”从那时起,他们听说哪里有聪明的沙门、婆罗门,就去那里和他们讨论问题。别人被他们提问,没有人能回答;而他们却能解答那些人的问题。就这样,他们遍访了整个赡部洲,然后返回,回到自己的地方,约定说:“拘利陀贤友,我们俩谁先证得不死,就要告诉对方。”为了简要说明这件事,经文说:“在那里,他们见到大众……中略……作了约定。”巴利
Tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako rājagahe paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṃ. Te ‘‘tassa santike pabbajissāmā’’ti pañcahi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ sañcayassa santike pabbajiṃsu. Tesaṃ pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya sañcayo atirekalābhaggayasaggappatto ahosi. Te katipāheneva sabbaṃ sañcayassa samayaṃ parimadditvā ‘‘ācariya, tumhākaṃ jānanasamayo ettakova, udāhu uttaripi atthī’’ti pucchiṃsu. Sañcayo ‘‘ettakova, sabbaṃ tumhehi ñāta’’nti āha. Tassa kathaṃ sutvā cintayiṃsu ‘‘evaṃ sati imassa santike brahmacariyavāso niratthako, mayaṃ mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ nikkhantā, so imassa santike uppādetuṃ na sakkā, mahā kho pana jambudīpo, gāmanigamarājadhāniyo carantā avassaṃ mokkhadhammadesakaṃ ācariyaṃ labhissāmā’’ti. Te tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘yattha yattha paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā atthī’’ti suṇanti, tattha tattha gantvā pañhasākacchaṃ karonti, tehi puṭṭhaṃ pañhaṃ añño kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi, te pana tesaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjenti. Evaṃ sakalajambudīpaṃ pariggaṇhitvā nivattitvā sakaṭṭhānameva āgantvā ‘‘samma kolita, yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati , so ārocetū’’ti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Imameva vatthuṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘tatra nesaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā…pe… katikaṃ akaṃsū’’ti āha.
这里,“穿白衣的游方者”指的是穿白布的游方者。以此说明他不是裸形游方者。“以端严的……行进……”等句中,“端严的”指能带来净信、合宜、与沙门身份相称的;“行进”指行走;“退回”指转身返回;“前视”指看前方;“环视”指看这边那边;“屈伸”指弯曲关节;“伸展”指伸展那些关节。所有这些词都是表示“如此状态”这一特征的具格用法,因此意思是:由于具足正念正知而行动,所以成为端严的行进、退回、前视、环视、屈伸、伸展者。“垂目”指目光向下。“威仪具足”指具足那种端严行进等的威仪。“为有需求者所推知”:通过推理智推知“有死,就必定有不死”,如此推知为“存在”的涅槃;寻求、遍求此涅槃,心想“我何不跟随这位比丘后面呢”——这是前后关联。“如《苏丁那品》中所说种类”:如所说“施主们的家中有堂舍,那里设有座位,备有饮用水,出家人乞食后坐在那里进食。如果他们愿意,也接受施主们的东西,因此应知那也是某一家族类似堂舍的一处墙角”——这就是所说的种类。巴利
Tattha channaparibbājakassāti setapaṭadharassa paribbājakassa. Tena nāyaṃ naggaparibbājakoti dasseti. Pāsādikena abhikkantenātiādīsu pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena sāruppena samaṇānucchavikena. Abhikkantenāti gamanena. Paṭikkantenāti nivattanena. Ālokitenāti purato dassanena. Vilokitenāti ito cito dassanena. Samiñjitenāti pabbasaṅkocanena. Pasāritenāti tesaṃyeva pasāraṇena. Sabbattha itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā satisampajaññakehi vabhisaṅkhatattā pāsādikaabhikkantapaṭikkantaālokitavilokitasamiñjitapasārito hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhākhittacakkhu. Iriyāpathasampannoti tāya pāsādikaabhikkantāditāya sampannairiyāpatho. Atthikehi upaññātanti ‘‘maraṇe sati amatenapi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ anumānañāṇena ‘‘atthī’’ti upagataṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, taṃ magganto pariyesanto yannūnāhaṃ imaṃ bhikkhuṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandheyyanti sambandho. Sudinnakaṇḍe vuttappakāranti ‘‘dānapatīnaṃ gharesu sālā honti, āsanāni cettha paññattāni honti, upaṭṭhāpitaṃ udakakañjiyaṃ, tattha pabbajitā piṇḍāya caritvā nisīditvā bhuñjanti. Sace icchanti, dānapatīnampi santakaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā tampi aññatarassa kulassa īdisāya sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti veditabba’’nti evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ.
“无论说少还是说多”:那位游方者心里想:“我叫伍巴帝萨,你尽力而为,无论说少还是说多,我都要用一百种理路、一千种理路去通达它,这是我的责任。”这样想过之后,才说出这话。为了说明“灭”和“灭之道”是按部分相同、部分引申的方式而统称为“灭”,所以又说“或者”等话。“使他了悟”就是令他证得,这是总结。所谓“听完这个法门之后,远尘离垢的法眼生起”:在这里,游方者只听完前两句,就立足于具足千种理路的入流果。应当知道,另外两句是在证得入流果的那一刻完成的。巴利
Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā bhāsassūti paribbājako ‘‘ahaṃ upatisso nāma, tvaṃ yathāsattiyā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā pāvada, etaṃ nayasatena nayasahassena paṭivijjhituṃ mayhaṃ bhāro’’ti cintetvā evamāha. Nirodho ca nirodhupāyo ca ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘nirodho’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Paṭipādentoti nigamento. Imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti ettha paribbājako paṭhamapadadvayameva sutvā sahassanayasampanne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Itarapadadvayaṃ sotāpannakāle niṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
“以许多劫那由他”这句话里,应当这样理解:十乘十是一百,十乘一百是一千,一千乘一百是十万,十万乘一百是一俱胝,俱胝乘一百是一钵俱胝,钵俱胝乘一百是一俱胝钵俱胝,俱胝钵俱胝乘一百是一那由他。巴利
Bahukehi kappanahutehīti ettha dasa dasakāni sataṃ, dasa satāni sahassaṃ, sahassānaṃ sataṃ satasahassaṃ, satasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭi, koṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ pakoṭi, pakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭipakoṭi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ ekanahutanti veditabbaṃ.
61 那时,游方者舍利弗来到游方者目犍连那里。他证得入流果之后,见到更上的殊胜境界不再生起,便觉察到“这里面一定有原因”,于是对长老说:“尊者,请不必再继续说法了,到这里就够了。我们的导师住在哪里?”——“在竹林园,游方者们那里。”——“尊者,您先走。我有一个同伴,我们彼此约定过:‘谁先证得不死,就要告诉对方。’我要先履行这个约定,带上同伴,沿着您走过的路,到导师那里去。”说完,他五体投地,顶礼长老的双足,右绕三圈,送别长老后,就朝游方者园的方向走去。巴利
61.Athakho sāriputto paribbājako yena moggallāno paribbājako tenupasaṅkamīti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) sotāpanno hutvā uparivisese appavattante ‘‘bhavissati ettha kāraṇa’’nti sallakkhetvā theraṃ āha ‘‘bhante, mā upari dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhayittha, ettakameva hotu, kahaṃ amhākaṃ satthā vasatī’’ti. Veḷuvane paribbājakāti. ‘‘Bhante, tumhe purato yātha, mayhaṃ eko sahāyako atthi, amhehi ca aññamaññaṃ katikā katā ‘yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati, so ārocetū’ti, ahaṃ taṃ paṭiññaṃ mocetvā sahāyakaṃ gahetvā tumhākaṃ gatamaggeneva satthu santikaṃ āgamissāmī’’ti pañcapatiṭṭhitena therassa pādesu nipatitvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā theraṃ uyyojetvā paribbājakārāmābhimukho agamāsi.
62 他〔游方者目犍连〕对游方者舍利弗这样说:“今天我这同伴的脸色跟往常不一样,他〔舍利弗〕肯定将会证得不死。”他〔目犍连〕这样问,是在打听证得不死这件事。舍利弗承认说:“是的,贤友,我已证得不死。”然后把整件事的经过都告诉了他〔目犍连〕,又诵出了那首偈颂。偈颂念完时,游方者目犍连就立足于入流果。因此说:“那时,游方者目犍连……法眼生起……”
“贤友,我们去世尊那里吧。”他〔目犍连〕先问:“贤友,导师住在哪里?”听到回答说:“贤友,听说在竹林园,我们的阿萨吉长老是这样告诉我的。”他〔目犍连〕便这样说了。巴利
62.Sāriputtaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavocāti ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ sahāyassa mukhavaṇṇo na aññadivasesu viya, addhā anena amataṃ adhigataṃ bhavissatī’’ti amatādhigamaṃ pucchanto etadavoca. Sopissa ‘‘āmāvuso, amataṃ adhigata’’nti paṭijānitvā sabbaṃ pavattiṃ ārocetvā tameva gāthaṃ abhāsi. Gāthāpariyosāne moggallāno paribbājako sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho moggallānassa paribbājakassa…pe… dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti. Gacchāma mayaṃ, āvuso, bhagavato santiketi ‘‘kahaṃ samma satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘veḷuvane kira samma, evaṃ no ācariyena assajittherena kathita’’nti vutte evamāha.
舍利弗长老向来就是恭敬老师的人,因此他对同伴目犍连游方者这样说:“我们把所证得的不死法,也去告诉我们的老师桑恰亚游方者吧。他如果明白了,就能证悟;如果没能证悟,也会因为相信我们而去找世尊,听了佛陀的说法之后,就能证得道果。”于是两个人一起去了桑恰亚那里。所以经文说:“那时,舍利弗和目犍连就前往游方者桑恰亚那里。”到了之后他们说:“老师,您在做什么呢?世间已经有佛陀出世了,法已经善说,僧团已经善行,走吧,我们去见十力者。”桑恰亚说:“孩子们,你们在说什么?”他劝阻了他们,只是向他们说明现前的利养和恭敬。他们说:“我们这样的弟子生活一直都可以这样,至于您去还是不去,您自己决定。”桑恰亚知道“这些人懂得这么多,是不会听我的话的”,就说:“孩子们,你们去吧,我年纪大了,没办法再过弟子的生活了。”他们虽然用几百种理由想让他明白,却没法让他觉悟,就带着那些听从自己教导的人去了竹林园。五百个弟子当中,二百五十人退了回去,二百五十人跟着他们一起去了。所以经文说:“那时,舍利弗和目犍连带着那二百五十个游方者,前往竹林园。”巴利
Sāriputtatthero ca nāmesa sadāpi ācariyapūjakova, tasmā sahāyaṃ moggallānaṃ paribbājakaṃ evamāha ‘‘amhehi adhigataṃ amataṃ amhākaṃ ācariyassa sañcayaparibbājakassapi kathessāma, bujjhamāno paṭivijjhissati, appaṭivijjhanto amhākaṃ saddahitvā satthu santikaṃ gamissati, buddhānaṃ desanaṃ sutvā maggaphalappaṭivedhaṃ karissatī’’ti. Tato dvepi janā sañcayassa santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā yena sañcayo paribbājako tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti. Upasaṅkamitvā ca ‘‘ācariya, tvaṃ kiṃ karosi, loke buddho uppanno, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho, āyāma dasabalaṃ passissāmā’’ti. So ‘‘kiṃ vadatha tātā’’ti tepi vāretvā lābhaggayasaggappavattimeva nesaṃ dīpeti. Te ‘‘amhākaṃ evarūpo antevāsikavāso niccameva hotu, tumhākaṃ pana gamanaṃ vā agamanaṃ vā jānāthā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sañcayo ‘‘ime ettakaṃ jānantā mama vacanaṃ na karissantī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘gacchatha tumhe tātā, ahaṃ mahallakakāle antevāsikavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkomī’’ti āha. Te anekehipi kāraṇasatehi taṃ bodhetuṃ asakkontā attano ovāde vattamānaṃ janaṃ ādāya veḷuvanaṃ agamaṃsu. Pañcasu antevāsikasatesu aḍḍhateyyasatā nivattiṃsu, aḍḍhateyyasatā tehi saddhiṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā tāni aḍḍhateyyāni paribbājakasatāni ādāya yena veḷuvanaṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti.
关于“解脱”一词:佛陀授记舍利弗和目犍连已经对此生起确信,即对以涅槃为所缘的果解脱生起确信——那涅槃具有如上所说的特征。这就是此处的关联。巴利
Vimutteti yathāvuttalakkhaṇe nibbāne tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā adhimutte ne sāriputtamoggallāne byākāsīti sambandho.
导师这样回答之后,在四众当中说法,随着听众的根性把法讲得越来越深入。除了两位上首弟子,其余二百五十位游方者全都证得了阿拉汉果。导师伸出手说:“来吧,比丘们。”所有人的须发都消失了,神通变化出来的钵和衣自然附着在身上。两位上首弟子也获得了神通变化出来的钵和衣,但他们还没有完成上三道的事业。为什么呢?因为声闻巴拉密智太广大了。那时,大目犍连尊者在出家后的第七天,依止摩揭陀国的迦罗婆罗村修沙门法,昏沉睡眠袭来,被导师警策,去除昏沉睡眠后,听闻如来所教导的界业处,就在听的时候完成了上三道的事业,达到了声闻巴拉密智的顶点。舍利弗长老也在出家半个月后,和导师一起依止王舍城,住在豕首窟,当他的外甥长爪游方者被开示《受持经》时,他随经句派遣智慧,就像吃别人添给的食物一样,达到了声闻巴拉密智的顶点。因此说:“大目犍连长老七天证得阿拉汉果,舍利弗长老半个月。”巴利
Evaṃ byākaritvā ca satthā catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ desento nesaṃ parisāya cariyavasena dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhesi, ṭhapetvā dve aggasāvake sabbepi aḍḍhateyyasatā paribbājakā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Satthā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti hatthaṃ pasāresi, sabbesaṃ kesamassu antaradhāyi, iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ ahosi. Aggasāvakānampi iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ āgataṃ, uparimaggattayakiccaṃ pana na niṭṭhāti. Kasmā? Sāvakapāramīñāṇassa mahantatāya. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno pabbajitadivasato sattame divase magadharaṭṭhe kallavāḷagāmakaṃ upanissāya samaṇadhammaṃ karonto thinamiddhaṃ okkamanto satthārā saṃvejito thinamiddhaṃ vinodetvā tathāgatena dinnaṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ suṇantova uparimaggattayakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto. Sāriputtattheropi pabbajitadivasato addhamāsaṃ atikkamitvā satthārā saddhiṃ tameva rājagahaṃ upanissāya sūkarakhataleṇe viharanto attano bhāgineyyassa dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasuttante desiyamāne suttānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā parassa vaḍḍhitabhattaṃ bhuñjanto viya sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto. Tenevāha ‘‘mahāmoggallānatthero sattahi divasehi arahatte patiṭṭhito, sāriputtatthero addhamāsenā’’ti.
虽然大目犍连长老没过多久就证得了阿拉汉果,而法将舍利弗则较晚才证得,即便如此,舍利弗长老的智慧还是更为广大。因为大目犍连长老在弟子的遍观行境中,就像用杖尖按压一样,只遍观了一部分,精进七天后证得阿拉汉果。而舍利弗长老则遍观了除诸佛与独觉佛的遍观行境之外、弟子遍观行境的全部,这样遍观而精进了半个月。这是因为上首弟子的遍观行境必须无余地运转,而弟子巴拉密智也需要这样成熟。譬如有人想“我要取一根竹竿”,看见一大丛竹子,心想“砍开这丛竹子会很麻烦”,就从中间把手伸进去,把刚好够到的竹竿从根部和顶端砍断后拿走。他虽然先走,却得不到坚实或笔直的竹竿。另一个人看见同样的竹丛,心想“如果我取刚好够到的竹竿,就得不到坚实或笔直的”,于是系紧腰带,用大砍刀砍开竹丛,挑选出坚实而笔直的竹竿后拿走。这个人虽然后走,却得到了坚实而笔直的竹竿。这两位长老的精进,情形正是如此。巴利
Yadipi mahāmoggallānatthero na cirasseva arahattaṃ patto, dhammasenāpati tato cirena, evaṃ santepi sāriputtattherova mahāpaññataro. Mahāmoggallānatthero hi sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto satta divase vāyamitvā arahattaṃ patto. Sāriputtatthero ṭhapetvā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca sammasanacāraṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasi, evaṃ sammasanto addhamāsaṃ vāyami. Ukkaṃsagatassa sāvakānaṃ sammasanacārassa nippadesena pavattiyamānattā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa ca tathā paripācetabbattā. Yathā hi puriso ‘‘veṇuyaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti mahājaṭaṃ veṇuṃ disvā ‘‘jaṭaṃ chindantassa papañco bhavissatī’’ti antarena hatthaṃ pavesetvā sampattameva yaṭṭhiṃ mūle ca agge ca chinditvā ādāya pakkameyya, so kiñcāpi paṭhamataraṃ gacchati, yaṭṭhiṃ pana sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhati. Aparo tathārūpameva veṇuṃ disvā sace sampattayaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmi, sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhissāmīti kacchaṃ bandhitvā mahantena satthena veṇujaṭaṃ chinditvā sārā ceva ujū ca yaṭṭhiyo uccinitvā ādāya pakkameyya, ayaṃ kiñcāpi pacchā gacchati, yaṭṭhiyo pana sārā ceva ujū ca labhati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ imesaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ padhānaṃ.
这里所说的“遍观行境”,应当理解为内观的领域,因为“遍观行于此处”,所以称为“遍观行境”。其中,诸佛的遍观行境,据说是十千世界中,有情相续所摄以及非根所系的一切行。另一些人说,是在百千亿轮围界中。确实如此,诸佛以摄于自身的方式进入缘起法,以三十六万亿为门转起大金刚智。独觉佛的遍观行境,据说是连同自身相续中的行,加上中印度住民有情相续所摄以及非根所系的行。有些人说,只是赡部洲住民相续所摄的。不把自身相续中的一切法与其他有情相续中的法作相续区分,而以“同为外在”的共性来遍观,这是弟子们的遍观行境。然而大目犍连长老对于外在的诸法,也以自身相续的区分,取出某些部分来遍观,而且只是以智触及而已。因此说“如同用杖端按压一般,只遍观了一部分”。在这里,因为智本来应当于所知境尽其范围而转起,却没有那样转起,所以说“如同用杖端按压一般”;因为缺乏无间的法随观,所以说“只遍观了一部分”。法将(舍利弗)的遍观行境,也同样是如前所说的弟子内观的领域。然而在这里,长老以极为超越、无余且无间的方式正确地观照。因此说“无余地遍观了弟子的遍观行境”。巴利
Sammasanacāro ca nāmettha vipassanābhūmi veditabbā sammasanaṃ carati etthāti sammasanacāroti katvā. Tattha buddhānaṃ sammasanacāro dasasahassalokadhātuyaṃ sattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārāti vadanti. Koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesūti apare. Tathā hi attaniyavasena paṭiccasamuppādanayaṃ otaritvā chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena buddhānaṃ mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pavattaṃ. Paccekabuddhānaṃ sasantānagatehi saddhiṃ majjhimadesavāsīsattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārā sammasanacāroti vadanti. Jambudīpavāsīsantānagatāti keci. Sasantānagate sabbadhamme parasantānagate ca santānavibhāgaṃ akatvā bahiddhābhāvasāmaññato sammasanaṃ, ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāro. Moggallānatthero pana bahiddhā dhammepi sasantānavibhāgena keci keci uddharitvā sammasi, tañca kho ñāṇena phuṭṭhamattaṃ katvā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti. Tattha ñāṇena nāma yāvatā neyyaṃ vattitabbaṃ, tāvatā avattanato ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viyā’’ti vuttaṃ, anupadadhammavipassanāya abhāvato ‘‘ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammasenāpatinopi yathāvuttasāvakānaṃ vipassanāya bhūmiyeva sammasanacāro. Tattha pana thero sātisayaṃ niravasesaṃ anupadañca sammā vipassi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasī’’ti.
在这里,有六种人:干观者、获得世间神通的普通弟子、大弟子、上首弟子、独觉佛、正自觉者。其中,干观者没有通过禅那和神通获得智慧上的善巧,就像盲人想走进自己想去的地方一样,在修观的时候,无法按照自己的意愿修习想要修的法,他们只能依照已经掌握的法来增长观。获得世间神通的普通弟子,则能够从他们开始修观的那个入口之外,用其他方式把观扩展得更广大,因为他们智慧广大的缘故。大弟子因为具足殊胜的愿行,能够比前者更超胜地扩展观。在上首弟子当中,第二位因为殊胜愿行的成就和定力更为优胜,能够比前者更进一步扩展观。第一位则因为智慧更为广大,能够以弟子们所不共的方式扩展观。独觉佛因为具有更大的殊胜愿行,随顺自己的愿行,能够比前面这些人更进一步扩展观。至于诸佛,他们的观是由圆满成熟的智慧巴拉密所培育,与一切知智的证得相应。就像一位精通箭术、如同萨拉班嘎那样的射手,因为长期练习射箭,所射出的箭在途中不会卡在树木藤蔓等物上,只会直中靶心,不停滞也不偏离;同样,这种观在途中不停滞、不偏离,对于应当观照的诸法,如实地以种种方式运作——这就称为“大金刚智”。巴利
Ettha ca sukkhavipassakā lokiyābhiññappattā pakatisāvakā mahāsāvakā aggasāvakā paccekabuddhā sammāsambuddhāti chasu janesu sukkhavipassakānaṃ jhānābhiññāhi anadhigatapaññānepuññattā andhānaṃ viya icchitapadesokkamanaṃ vipassanākāle icchiticchitadhammabhāvanā natthi, te yathāpariggahitadhammamatteyeva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Lokiyābhiññappattā pana pakatisāvakā yena mukhena vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, tato aññenapi vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti vipulañāṇattā. Mahāsāvakā abhinīhārasampannattā tato sātisayaṃ vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti. Aggasāvakesu dutiyo abhinīhārasampattiyā samādhānassa sātisayattā vipassanaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paṭhamo pana tatopi mahāpaññatāya sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paccekabuddhā tehipi mahābhinīhāratāya attano abhinīhārānurūpaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ vipassanaṃ karonti. Buddhānaṃ sammadeva paripūritapaññāpāramīpabhāvitā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamassa anurūpā yathā nāma katavālavedhaparicayena sarabhaṅgasadisena dhanuggahena khitto saro antarā rukkhalatādīsu asajjamāno lakkheyeva patati, na sajjati na virajjati, evaṃ antarā asajjamānā avirajjamānā vipassanā sammasanīyadhammesu yāthāvato nānānayehi pavattati, yaṃ ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati.
在这些当中,干观者的观行显现出来时,像萤火虫的光;已得世间神通的普通弟子,像油灯的光;大弟子,像火炬的光;上首弟子,像晨星的光;独觉佛,像月亮的光;正自觉者,则像秋日太阳周围环绕着千百道光芒那样。
同样,干观者的观行,就像盲人靠拐杖的末端探路而行;已得世间神通的普通弟子,像走在独木桥上;大弟子,像走在人行桥上;上首弟子,像走在车桥(可通车的大桥)上;独觉佛,像走在供人行走的大道上;正自觉者,像走在可通大车的宽阔大道上。
同样应当知道,诸佛和独觉佛的观,因为是由思所成智培养起来的,所以属于自然智(无师自悟);而其他人的观,因为是由闻所成智培养起来的,所以是依靠他人的教导而产生的。巴利
Etesu ca sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro khajjotappabhāsadiso, abhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ dīpappabhāsadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ ukkāppabhāsadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ osadhitārakappabhāsadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ candappabhāsadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ rasmisahassapaṭimaṇḍitasaradasūriyamaṇḍalasadiso hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tathā sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro andhānaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā gamanasadiso, lokiyābhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ daṇḍakasetugamanasadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ jaṅghasetugamanasadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ sakaṭasetugamanasadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ mahājaṅghamaggagamanasadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ mahāsakaṭamaggagamanasadiso. Tathā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā sayambhūñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā paropadesasambhūtāti veditabbā.
现在,为了说明两位长老过去世的修行积累,接着说了“据说在过去……”等等。这一切的意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Idāni ubhinnampi therānaṃ pubbayogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.
63 “山围城”是指王舍城。因为四周被山环绕,像围栏一样立着,所以叫“山围”,这个名字就是这么来的。至于“或于业格之义”,是就嫉妒动作作为宾语的状态而说的。巴利
63.Giribbajanagaranti samantā pabbataparikkhittaṃ vajasadisaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhatīti giribbajanti evaṃladdhanāmaṃ rājagahanagaraṃ. Usūyanakiriyāya kammabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘upayogatthe vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
亲教师义务的注释巴利
Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
64 能审察种种罪的人,就是亲教师;没有亲教师的人,就是无亲教师。因此说“远离了能审察种种罪的师长”。这里,“种种罪”是指小罪和大罪。这里的“ā”含有增长的意思,就像“种种果”等词中的用法一样。“残食钵”这个词里,“uttiṭṭha”一词与“ucchiṭṭha”一词同义。因此说“因为人们对那个东西有残食的念头,所以叫残食钵”。而“乞食所用的钵”这一句,是通过显示钵本身的样貌,来说明把它安立为残食钵的理由。“在那个”就是指在那个乞食所用的钵中。巴利
64. Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyo, natthi upajjhāyo etesanti anupajjhāyakā. Tenāha ‘‘vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyakena garunā virahitā’’ti. Tattha vajjāvajjanti khuddakaṃ mahantañca vajjaṃ. Vuddhiattho hi ayamakāro ‘‘phalāphala’’ntiādīsu viya. Uttiṭṭhapattanti ettha ucchiṭṭha-saddasamānattho uttiṭṭha-saddo. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino, tasmā uttiṭṭhapattanti vutta’’nti. Piṇḍāya caraṇakapattanti iminā pana pattassa sarūpadassanamukhena ucchiṭṭhakappanāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. Tasminti tasmiṃ piṇḍāya caraṇakapatte.
65 65. “具恭敬、具顺从”这句话里,“恭敬”指的是尊重的心态,就像对待石伞那样,是应当郑重对待的。与恭敬一起,就是“具恭敬”。师长无论说什么,都因为恭敬而听从,这就是“顺从”;顺从的状态,以及与顺从同分的一切恭敬,就是它的意思。与顺从一起,就是“具顺从”,意思是接受教诫。或者说,应当被顺从,所以叫“顺从”,即应当被尊重。与那种顺从一起,就是“具顺从”。不过注释书里没有逐字分析,只是为了显示义理才说“确立尊重和尊长的状态”。“萨度”就是好。“轻”就是不重,意思是:对我来说,您作为亲教师,并没有什么沉重的。“合宜的”就是与方便相应,意思是:您用这个方便让我认您为亲教师,从今以后我就成了您的负担,这样说。“适当的”就是合适,意思是:您接受我为弟子,这是恰当的。“以令人净信的方式”,就是通过能引发净信的身业和语业。“成就”,就是成办三学。“或以身”,就是用手势等来示意,以身表达。所谓“被你接受……乃至……表达”,是说只要说“萨度”等其中一句,就已经表达了这个意思。因此说“唯此……”等。“萨度”是就接纳而说的:当亲教师说“萨度”时,是就共住弟子以“萨度”来接纳的话而说。为什么不算数呢?回答说“仅凭祈请和给予……”等,意思是:仅凭共住弟子说“尊者,请做我的亲教师”这样的祈请,以及亲教师说“萨度”等这样的给予之语,还不够。这里不以共住弟子的接纳之语为要件,因为在认亲教师这件事上,共住弟子的接纳之语并不是构成要件。巴利
65.Sagāravā sappatissāti ettha garubhāvo gāravaṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇīyatā. Saha gāravenāti sagāravā. Garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patisso, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃkiñci gāravanti attho. Saha patissenāti sappatissā, ovādaṃ sampaṭicchantāti attho . Patissīyatīti vā patisso, garukātabbo. Tena saha patissenāti sappatissā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘garukabhāvañceva jeṭṭhakabhāvañca upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāhūti sādhu. Lahūti agaru, mama tuyhaṃ upajjhāyabhāve bhāriyaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Patirūpanti anurūpaṃ tava upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho. Pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena kāyavacīpayogena. Sampādehīti tividhasikkhaṃ nipphādehīti attho. Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādiṃ dassento kāyena vā viññāpeti. Gahito tayā…pe… viññāpetīti ‘‘sāhū’’tiādīsu ekaṃ vadantoyeva imamatthaṃ viññāpetīti vuccati. Tenevāha ‘‘idameva hī’’tiādi. Sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyāti upajjhāyena ‘‘sāhū’’ti vutte saddhivihārikassa ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ sandhāya. Kasmā nappamāṇanti āha ‘‘āyācanadānamattena hī’’tiādi, saddhivihārikassa ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti āyācanamattena, upajjhāyassa ca ‘‘sāhū’’tiādinā dānavacanamattenāti attho. Na ettha sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅganti saddhivihārikassa sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ ettha upajjhāyaggahaṇe aṅgaṃ na hoti.
66 “正行”就是正确的行为。“他的”指共住弟子。应当给他同样温度的洗脸水:当气温和身体状况都一样时,就应当给同样的水。“两件衣”是就披覆衣和桑喀帝而说的。如果这样的话,为什么又说“桑喀帝”呢?回答说:“因为一切衣都由于缝合而成,所以称为桑喀帝。”
“在步距之间”:这里,脚在那里跨步,所以叫步距;也就是不像是被派去传话那样拖延,在并肩同行时,两人两脚之间大约一肘的距离。或者,把脚向前跨出再放下,叫步距;这里应当这样理解。“从此处开始”:就是从“不应在亲教师说话时”这句里的“不”字开始。“应知一切处都有恶作罪”:这是为了说明即使患病者也不能免除这些情况而说的。因为,对于其他所说的亲教师义务,若无病者以不恭敬心不履行,在义务的违犯上,一切处都是恶作。因此下文会说:“无病的共住弟子即使共住六十年,也应履行一切亲教师义务;若以不恭敬心不做,在义务的违犯上就是恶作。但在与‘不’字相关的语句中,即使病者做了所禁止的行为,也是恶作。”
“与罪接近的语言”:这是就产生罪的语言而说的。因为通过哪种语言而犯罪,那种语言就称为与该罪接近。巴利
66.Sammāvattanāti sammāpavatti. Assāti saddhivihārikassa. Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbanti utumhi sarīrasabhāve ca ekākāre tādisameva dātabbaṃ. Dve cīvarānīti pārupanaṃ saṅghāṭiñca sandhāya vadati. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṭiyo’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘sabbañhi cīvaraṃ saṅghaṭitattā saṅghāṭīti vuccatī’’ti. Padavītihārehīti ettha padaṃ vītiharati etthāti padavītihāro, padavītiharaṇaṭṭhānaṃ dūtavilambitaṃ akatvā samagamane dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ. Padānaṃ vā vītiharaṇaṃ abhimukhaṃ haritvā nikkhepo padavītihāroti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vutta na-kārato paṭṭhāya. Sabbattha dukkaṭāpatti veditabbāti ‘‘īdisesu gilānopi na muccatī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññampi hi yathāvuttaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ anādariyena akarontassa agilānassa vattabhede sabbattha dukkaṭameva. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘agilānena hi saddhivihārikena saṭṭhivassenapi sabbaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, anādarena akarontassa vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ. Na-kārapaṭisaṃyuttesu pana padesu gilānassapi paṭikkhittakiriyaṃ karontassa dukkaṭamevā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 64). Āpattiyā āsannavācanti āpattijanakameva vacanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yāya hi vācāya āpattiṃ āpajjati, sā vācā tassā āpattiyā āsannāti vuccati.
用衣把钵包起来这句,这里《结文处》说的是“用上衣的一角包起来”。在村落,指在属于村落范围的这类地方。在俗人家中,指在屋内。在回返处,指在座堂。应以水询问三次,这是关联语句,意思是应在开始、中间、结束时这样询问三次。近,即邻近。以洗净的沙,即用无尘、清净的沙。如果能够,是为了阐明所说的义理,所以说“不被任何疾病所压倒”。去了精舍,指去了亲教师的精舍。巴利
Cīvarena pattaṃ veṭhetvāti ettha ‘‘uttarāsaṅgassa ekena kaṇṇena veṭhetvā’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gāmeti gāmapariyāpanne tādise kismiñci padese. Antaraghareti antogehe. Paṭikkamaneti āsanasālāyaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ pānīyena pucchitabboti sambandho, ādimhi majjhe anteti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ pucchitabboti attho. Upakaṭṭhoti āsanno. Dhotavālikāyāti nirajāya parisuddhavālikāya. Sace pahotīti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘na kenaci gelaññena abhibhūto hotī’’ti. Pariveṇaṃ gantvāti upajjhāyassa pariveṇaṃ gantvā.
67 关于共住弟子的义务这一节,意思本身就很清楚。巴利
67. Saddhivihārikavattakathā uttānatthāyeva.
不正行等事的注释巴利
Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā
68 在“不如法行等论”中,“依家之爱”是指“这是我的父亲”这样生起的爱。在这里,对戒师(upajjhāya)生起如父一般的心,就叫做“依家之爱”。因为对于已证悟谛理、已断除执著的圣者来说,这种属于不善品类的依家之爱并不存在,所以这里说的并不是它;世尊也不会让比丘们去行杂染之法。不过,由于它与依家之爱相似,所以应知这里是借“爱”的名义来说慈爱。根据“他们当中有一位具足行仪的比丘……他们无犯”这段话,如果有一位具足行仪的比丘说:“尊者,你们不用操心,我会照顾你们的共住弟子或近住弟子,该教导的我会教导,该做的事我会尽力去做。”或者那些共住弟子等人说:“尊者,你们完全不用操心。”又或者他们不接受行仪,那么从那时起,戒师和依止师无犯。这是诸师所说。其余此处义理明显。巴利
68. Nasammāvattanādikathāyaṃ gehassitapemanti ‘‘pitā me aya’’nti evaṃ uppannapemaṃ. Upajjhāyamhi pitucittupaṭṭhānameva hi idha gehassitapemaṃ nāma. Na hi idaṃ akusalapakkhiyaṃ gehassitapemaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ paṭividdhasaccānaṃ pahīnānugedhānaṃ tadasambhavato, na ca bhagavā bhikkhū saṃkilese niyojeti, gehassitapemasadisattā pana pemamukhena mettāsineho idha vuttoti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tesu eko vattasampanno bhikkhu…pe… tesaṃ anāpattī’’ti vacanato sace eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘bhante, tumhe appossukkā hotha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ antevāsikaṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmi, ovaditabbaṃ ovadissāmi, iti karaṇīyesu ussukkaṃ āpajjissāmī’’ti vadati, te eva vā saddhivihārikādayo ‘‘bhante, tumhe kevalaṃ appossukkā hothā’’ti vadanti, vattaṃ vā na sādiyanti , tato paṭṭhāya ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anāpattīti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
拉特婆罗门故事的注释巴利
Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
69 69. 在拉特婆罗门的故事中,“变得消瘦”是指他无法咀嚼或吞咽食物,身体瘦弱,血肉极少。“肤色变得极度苍白”是指他变得极其苍白,像枯叶一样。“筋脉遍布身体”是指因为血肉耗尽,身体就像被血管的网络覆盖着。“敬礼”就是恭敬的行为,意思是表示尊敬。“知恩”就是知道所受的恩惠,知道别人为自己做的事并且铭记在心,这就叫知恩报恩的人。难道长老不知道世尊在波罗奈已经通过三皈依允许了出家与达上吗?他并不是不知道。如果是这样,那为什么他说“尊者,我怎么能让那位婆罗门出家、受达上呢”?针对这个追问,回答说“虽然具寿舍利弗……”等等。“以圆满的”就是以完整的。所谓“该说别的,却说别的”,是指应该说“尊者”,却说“朋友”。巴利
69. Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthumhi kiso ahosīti khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā asakkonto tanuko ahosi appamaṃsalohito. Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātoti sañjātuppaṇḍuppaṇḍukabhāvo paṇḍupalāsappaṭibhāgo. Dhamanisanthatagattoti pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattā sirājāleneva santharitagatto. Adhikāranti adhikiriyaṃ, sakkāranti vuttaṃ hoti. Kataṃ jānantīti kataññuno, kataṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānantīti katavedino. Kiṃ pana thero bhagavatā bārāṇasiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi anuññātaṃ pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca na jānātīti? No na jānāti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘kathāhaṃ, bhante, taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pabbājemi upasampādemī’’ti kasmā āhāti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiñcāpi āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi. Parimaṇḍalehīti paripuṇṇehi. Aññathā vā vattabbaṃ aññathā vadatīti ‘‘bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ ‘‘bandhe’’ti vadati.
71-73 71-73.“紧接着”就是没有间隔。“犯制限”就是违犯学处。“为了维持身体而依止的”叫依止,就是托钵食等四种资具。其中,“托钵食”是指靠双腿行走去乞食,得到一口分量的食物。“额外所得”是指比“依止托钵食”所说的乞食所得更多的获得,比如僧团食等。其中,应当布施给整个僧团的饭食是“僧团食”;指定几位比丘后布施的饭食是“指定食”;邀请之后布施的饭食是“邀请食”;让人取筹后布施的饭食是“筹食”;每半月布施一次的饭食是“半月食”;伍波萨他日布施的饭食是“伍波萨他食”;伍波萨他日次日布施的饭食是“初日食”。这些的详细解说,会在《卧坐具犍度》的注释中说明。巴利
71-73.Samanantarāti anantaraṃ. Paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotīti sikkhāpadavītikkamaṃ karoti. Attabhāvapariharaṇatthaṃ nissīyantīti nissayā, piṇḍiyālopabhojanādikā cattāro paccayā. Tattha piṇḍiyālopabhojananti jaṅghapiṇḍiyabalena caritvā ālopamattaṃ laddhabhojanaṃ. Atirekalābhoti ‘‘piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhāhāralābhato adhikalābho saṅghabhattādi. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbabhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā dātabbabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ. Nimantetvā dātabbabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ. Salākaṃ gāhāpetvā dātabbabhattaṃ salākabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbabhattaṃ uposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbabhattaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ. Vitthārakathā nesaṃ senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati.
所谓“住处”,就是用围墙围起来的整个居住区域。“半屋”则是……巴利
Vihāroti pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogoti
长殿。也有人说是金翅鸟形状的殿堂。殿堂是指四方形的殿堂。覆顶殿是指平顶的殿堂。另一些人则说:“精舍名为长面殿堂;半屋是单坡顶的坐卧处,据说它一侧的墙较高,另一侧较低,因此它是单坡顶的;殿堂是长方形的四角殿堂;覆顶殿是平顶、带有月光露台的。”窟是指山洞。腐尿是指任何一种尿。就像金色的身体也被称为“腐身”一样,即使是新鲜的尿,也同样是腐尿。这里剩下的内容意思都很明显。巴利
Dīghapāsādo. Garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādotipi vadanti. Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo. Hammiyanti muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo, aḍḍhayogo ekapassacchadanakasenāsanaṃ , tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassacchadanakaṃ hoti, pāsādo āyatacaturassapāsādo, hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanaṃ candikaṅgaṇayutta’’nti. Guhāti pabbataguhā. Pūtimuttanti yaṃ kiñci muttaṃ. Yathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo ‘‘pūtikāyo’’ti vuccati, evaṃ abhinavampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
《阿阇梨行仪论》的注释巴利
Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
75 75. 在伍巴塞那这件事里,“所习行的”指的是已经实行、奉行的行为规范,也就是随顺法的行持。“比丘,还能忍受吗?”意思是:比丘,你这具四轮九门的身体机器,还能忍受、还能承受、还能维持、还能保养吗?它有没有给你带来什么痛苦?“还能维持吗?”意思是:在一切事务中还能维持下去吗?有没有显示出什么障碍?
“如来虽然知道……”等等,是针对后面有人问“比丘,你戒腊多少?”这类问题而说的,目的是为了说明回答的方式。这里的简要含义是:所谓如来,即使已经知道,如果出现那样的提问因缘,就会问;如果没有那样的提问因缘,即使知道也不会问。但因为诸佛根本不存在“不知道”这回事,所以没有说“虽然不知道”。他们是了知时机才问的:如果那时是提问的适当时机,就了知时机而问;如果不是,也同样了知时机而不问。这样提问时,如来只问有意义的事,也就是问那些依于义、依于因缘的事,不问没有意义的事。为什么?因为对于没有意义的事,如来已经断除了桥梁。所谓“桥梁”,指的就是道路,意思是说:那样的言说,已经通过道路彻底断除了。巴利
75. Upasenavatthumhi āciṇṇanti caritaṃ vattaṃ anudhammatā. Kacci bhikkhu khamanīyanti bhikkhu kacci tuyhaṃ idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khamanīyaṃ sakkā khamituṃ sahituṃ pariharituṃ, na kiñci dukkhaṃ uppādetīti. Kacci yāpanīyanti kacci sabbakiccesu yāpetuṃ sakkā, na kiñci antarāyaṃ dassetīti. Jānantāpi tathāgatātievamādi yaṃ parato ‘‘kati vassosi tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā pucchi, tassa parihāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tathāgatā nāma jānantāpi sace tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ hoti, pucchanti. Sace pana tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ natthi, jānantāpi na pucchanti. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘ajānantāpī’’ti na vuttaṃ. Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantīti sace tassā pucchāya so kālo hoti, evaṃ taṃ kālaṃ viditvā pucchanti. Sace na hoti, evampi kālaṃ viditvāva na pucchanti. Evaṃ pucchantāpi ca atthasaṃhitaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, yaṃ atthanissitaṃ kāraṇanissitaṃ, tadeva pucchanti, no anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā anatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Setu vuccati maggo, maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto samucchedoti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明“与义相应”这句话,也就是如来所问的、依托于义的言语,而说出“以两种行相”等话。其中,“行相”就是原因。“我们将说法”,意思是我们要讲说与事缘相应的经,或者讲说与过去行迹因缘相应的本生。“或者将为弟子们制定学处”,意思是借由这个提问,把弟子们的违犯公开出来,然后制定或重或轻的学处,确立教诫。“过急”就是太快。巴利
Idāni atthasaṃhitanti ettha yaṃ atthanissitaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhi ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ākārehīti kāraṇehi . Dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti aṭṭhuppattiyuttaṃ suttaṃ vā pubbacaritakāraṇayuttaṃ jātakaṃ vā kathayissāma. Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmāti sāvakānaṃ vā tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāma āṇaṃ ṭhapessāma. Atilahunti atisīghaṃ.
76 76. 在“外道事例”这一节中,“前外道”就是指过去曾经是外道的人。在这里(《增支部义注》2.3.62),应当了解“教义”、了解“教义创立者”、了解“外道”、了解“外道弟子”。其中,“教义”指的是六十二种见解。因为众生在这当中漂浮、浮沉、浮出又沉没,所以称为“教义”。那些产生这些见解的人,比如布拉纳·咖萨巴等人,就叫做“教义创立者”。接受他们的主张而出家的人,就叫做“外道”。因为他们是生在教义当中的;或者如前面所说,以见解之状态为“教义”,这教义是他们所有的,所以是“教义者”,教义者就是“外道”。应当知道,那些给他们提供资具的人就是“外道弟子”。“被称作同法者”这一短语,说的是“被同法者所称说”,这里用的是具格意义的宾格。这句话的意思是:由于此(学处)应当由五位同法者学习,或者由于是他们所拥有的,所以是凭借获得“同法者”之名的、佛陀所制定的学处而称说的。“巴苏罗”是他的名字。“游行者”是指舍弃了在家束缚而从事出家的人。巴利
76. Aññatitthiyavatthumhi aññatitthiyapubboti pubbe aññatitthiyo bhūtoti aññatitthiyapubbo. Ettha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.62) ca titthaṃ jānitabbaṃ, titthakaro jānitabbo , titthiyā jānitabbā, titthiyasāvakā jānitabbā. Tattha titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Ettha hi sattā taranti uppilavanti ummujjanimujjaṃ karonti, tasmā ‘‘tittha’’nti vuccanti. Tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādetā titthakaro nāma pūraṇakassapādiko. Tassa laddhiṃ gahetvā pabbajitā titthiyā nāma. Te hi titthe jātāti titthiyā, yathāvuttaṃ vā diṭṭhigatasaṅkhātaṃ titthaṃ etesaṃ atthīti titthikā, titthikā eva titthiyā. Tesaṃ paccayadāyakā titthiyasāvakāti veditabbā. Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānoti sahadhammikena vuccamāno, karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Pañcahi sahadhammikehi sikkhitabbattā, tesaṃ vā santakattā ‘‘sahadhammika’’nti laddhanāmena buddhapaññattena sikkhāpadena vuccamānoti attho. Pasūroti tassa nāmaṃ. Paribbājakoti gihibandhanaṃ pahāya pabbajjupagato.
在“就是那个外道的处”这一句里:“六十二种邪见”本身就被叫作“外道的处”,所以叫“外道处”;或者,那些人有这种“外道”的见解,所以叫“外道”,他们的处也叫“外道处”。而“处”这个词,比如在“剑浮阇是马的处,南道是牛的处”里,指的是出生的地方。巴利
Taṃyeva titthāyatananti ettha dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ titthameva āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, titthaṃ vā etesaṃ atthīti titthino, titthiyā, tesaṃ āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ. Āyatananti ca ‘‘assānaṃ kambojo āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇapatho āyatana’’nti ettha sañjātiṭṭhānaṃ āyatanaṃ nāma.
“ 鸟儿们依止在令人心生欢喜的处所,
想乘凉的人会走向阴凉处,想吃果子的人会去吃果子。”巴利
‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā; Chāyaṃ chāyatthino yanti, phalatthaṃ phalabhojino’’ti. (a. ni. 5.38) –
这里,“集会处”就是聚集的地方。“比丘们,有这五种解脱处”这句话里,“处”指的是原因,而这里这些全都适用。因为所有执持邪见的人,生起时就是在这六十二种邪见里生起;聚集时也是在这六十二种邪见里聚集、会合;而他们成为执邪见者的原因,也正是这六十二种邪见。所以,像前面说的那样,教义以生起处等含义成为“处”,因此叫“教义处”;同样,外道的处也叫“教义处”。巴利
Ettha samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, vimuttāyatanānī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26) ettha kāraṇaṃ, taṃ idha sabbampi labbhati. Sabbepi hi diṭṭhigatikā sañjāyamānā imāsuyeva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu sañjāyanti, samosaramānāpi etāsuyeva samosaranti sannipatanti, diṭṭhigatikabhāve ca nesaṃ imāyeva dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ titthameva sañjātiādinā atthena āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, tenevatthena titthīnaṃ āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ.
“依止具寿而住”这句话里,“具寿”是属格形式表达宾格含义,意思是“依止具寿而住”。至于“贤能……中略……具有所说的特征”,这是针对善于护持大众的多闻者说的。“优波离,以五支”等处应当解说的内容,后面会显现出来。巴利
Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmīti ettha āyasmatoti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, āyasmantaṃ nissāya vasissāmīti attho. Byatto…pe… vuttalakkhaṇoyevāti parisupaṭṭhāpakabahussutaṃ sandhāya vadati. Pañcahupāli aṅgehītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
驱离与求恕的讨论注释巴利
Paṇāmanākhamāpanākathāvaṇṇanā
80 “先前所说的特征”是连接语。有些书上能看到“应以同样的特征来了知依止弟子的罪”这样的写法,但这里应该理解为“不应以同样的特征来了知依止弟子的罪”。这里的含义也应该这样理解:不应以对共住弟子所说的特征来了知依止弟子的罪。否则,就会和“依止弟子在依止导师而住期间,应履行导师的一切义务”这句话相矛盾。因为这句话表明,依止弟子还没有脱离依止时,如果不履行义务,就有罪。所以应当这样把握:共住弟子如果不履行所说的义务,不管有没有脱离依止,都有罪;而依止弟子只有在还没有脱离依止时才有罪。正因如此,在《清净道论》(1.41)讲亲属障碍的地方——巴利
80. Yaṃ pubbe lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho, ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti potthakesu pāṭho dissati, ‘‘na teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ panettha pāṭho veditabbo. Saddhivihārikassa vuttalakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti na veditabbāti evaṃ panettha atthopi veditabbo. Aññathā ‘‘nissayantevāsikena hi yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāva sabbaṃ ācariyavattaṃ kātabba’’nti idaṃ virujjheyya. Idañhi vacanaṃ nissayantevāsikassa amuttanissayasseva vattaṃ akarontassa āpattīti dīpeti. Tasmā saddhivihārikassa yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpatti, nissayantevāsikassa pana amuttanissayasseva āpattīti gahetabbaṃ. Teneva visuddhimaggepi (visuddhi. 1.41) ñātipalibodhakathāyaṃ –
所谓“亲属”,是指在精舍里,有导师、戒师、共住弟子、弟子、同戒师、同导师;在家里,有母亲、父亲、姐妹、兄弟等等。他们生病了,就会成为这个人的障碍,所以应当去照顾他们,让他们恢复健康,以此来消除这个障碍。其中,戒师如果生病了,不能很快痊愈的话,就应当照顾他一辈子。同样,出家导师、授达上导师、共住弟子、已受达上的出家弟子、同戒师,也应当这样照顾。而依止导师、教诫导师、依止弟子、教诫弟子、同导师,只要依止关系和教诫关系还没有中断,就应当一直照顾。巴利
‘‘Ñātīti vihāre ācariyupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakā, ghare mātā pitā bhaginī bhātāti evamādikā. Te gilānā imassa palibodhā honti, tasmā so palibodho upaṭṭhahitvā tesaṃ pākatikakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Tattha upajjhāyo tāva gilāno sace lahuṃ na vuṭṭhāti, yāvajīvaṃ paṭijaggitabbo. Tathā pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo saddhivihāriko upasampāditapabbājitaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakā ca. Nissayācariya uddesācariya nissayantevāsika uddesantevāsikasamānācariyakā pana yāva nissayauddesā anupacchinnā, tāva paṭijaggitabbā’’ti –
这段是按分类来说明的。可是,如果按照“应当以同样的特征来了知依止弟子的罪”这样的文句来读,就说不通了。因为这段文句表达的意思是:就像共住弟子一样,依止弟子如果不履行上面所说的义务,那么不管有没有脱离依止关系,都有罪。所以,这里应当按前面所说的方式来理解这段文句。巴利
Vibhāgena vuttaṃ. Ayañca vibhāgo ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ pāṭhe sati na yujjeyya. Ayañhi pāṭho saddhivihārikassa viya nissayantevāsikassapi yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpattīti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, tasmā vuttanayenevettha pāṭho gahetabbo.
由出家弟子、受达上弟子和法弟子……(中略)……应当履行义务,即对出家导师、受达上导师和法导师的义务。巴利
Pabbajjaupasampadadhammantevāsikehi pana…pe… tāva vattaṃ kātabbanti pabbajjācariyaupasampadācariyadhammācariyānaṃ
这些人都应当按上面所说的履行义务。其中,谁授予学处,谁就是出家导师;谁诵出授达上的甘马语,谁就是授达上导师;谁给予总说或提问教示,就应当知道他是法导师。这里剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。巴利
Etehi yathāvuttavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tattha yena sikkhāpadāni dinnāni, ayaṃ pabbajjācariyo. Yena upasampadakammavācā vuttā, ayaṃ upasampadācariyo. Yo uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ vā deti, ayaṃ dhammācariyoti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
依止舍断的论注释巴利
Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā
83 在“依止舍断”的论述中,“去了某方”是指为了居住而前往某个方向,不管他是有意回来还是无意回来。“比丘的同伴”是指他品性良善。“观察”就是审察。在“若散乱……应去那里”这一段里,如果因为某件事当天去不了,心想“过几天再去”,对前往仍然很有意愿,就说他“护持”。“不要回到这里”就是不要进入这里。“应就地居住”就是就在那里取得依止而住。在“就在那座精舍……可以居住”这一段里,由于已经被和尚舍弃,就不存在与和尚共住的豁免;因此,即使先前是与和尚共住的人,从阿阇梨那里所受的依止也不会舍断。巴利
83. Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāyaṃ disaṃ gatoti puna āgantukāmo anāgantukāmo vā hutvā vāsatthāya kañci disaṃ gato. Bhikkhuno sabhāgatanti pesalabhāvaṃ. Oloketvāti upaparikkhitvā. Vibbhante…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace kenaci karaṇīyena tadaheva gantuṃ asakkonto katipāhena gamissāmīti gamane saussāho hoti, rakkhatīti vadanti. Mā idha paṭikkamīti mā idha pavisi. Tatreva vasitabbanti tattheva nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ. Taṃyeva vihāraṃ…pe… vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhānaparihāro natthi, tasmā upajjhāyena samodhānagatassapi ācariyassa santike gahitanissayo na paṭippassambhati.
在讨论“因为阿阇梨舍断依止”时,说到“阿阇梨已经离开”。这里,关于和尚离开的情况,前面已经讲过的判定方式,在这里同样可以理解,所以就不再重复,而是另外提出一种情况:“某位阿阇梨请假之后离开”等等。这种情形在和尚离开时也应该知道。因为在这类地方,一处所说的特征,在另一处也应该套用。如果越过两个土块投掷的距离之后又回来,那就称为已舍断依止。到这里为止,就叫作“已去他方”;即使弟子还没有放下责任,依止也已经舍断。阿阇梨和和尚越过两个土块投掷的距离,住在别的精舍,这是指在界外近行区域内,从弟子和共住者的住处越过两个土块投掷的距离,住在别的卧坐处;但在界内近行区域内,即使越过两个土块投掷的距离而住,依止也不会舍断。“即使阿阇梨本来就想舍弃,为了遣离依止而遣离”等等这一切,在和尚下令时也应该知道。这里其余的内容很容易明白。巴利
Ācariyamhānissayapaṭippassaddhīsu ācariyo pakkanto vā hotīti ettha ‘‘pakkantoti disaṃ gato’’tiādinā upajjhāyassa pakkamane yo vinicchayo vutto, so tattha vuttanayeneva idhāpi sakkā viññātunti taṃ avatvā ‘‘koci ācariyo āpucchitvā pakkamatī’’tiādinā aññoyeva nayo āraddho, ayañca nayo upajjhāyapakkamanepi veditabboyeva. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu ekattha vuttalakkhaṇaṃ aññatthāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattati, paṭippassaddho hotīti ettha ettāvatā disāpakkanto nāma hotīti antevāsike anikkhittadhurepi nissayo paṭippassambhati. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantīti bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ antevāsikasaddhivihārikānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ senāsane vasanti, antoupacārasīmāyaṃ pana dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāpi vasato nissayo na paṭippassambhati. ‘‘Sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmetī’’tiādi sabbaṃ upajjhāyassa āṇattiyampi veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
关于应当授具足戒的五法之论的注释巴利
Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā
84 在“诸比丘,具足五支者……”等句中,“不应让沙弥侍奉”的意思是:作为戒师,不应接收沙弥。这个含义在《增支部义注》(A. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.251-253)中已经说过。巴利
84.Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatenātiādīsu na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabboti upajjhāyena hutvā sāmaṇero na gahetabbo. Ayamattho aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.251-253) vuttoyeva.
“ 先把自己安立在合宜的地方,
先把自己安顿在合适的位置,然后才去教导别人,这样有智慧的人就不会被染污。”巴利
‘‘Attānameva paṭhamaṃ, patirūpe nivesaye; Athaññamanusāseyya, na kilisseyya paṇḍito’’ti. (dha. pa. 158) –
为了随顺这一点,先就自身成就来劝勉,所以说了“不是以无学戒蕴”等等,而不是从犯戒的角度来说。其中,“以无学戒蕴”的意思是:无学者的戒蕴,就叫无学戒蕴。因为是属于无学者的,所以叫无学戒蕴。一切地方都是如此。这样说来,被称为解脱智见的省察智,也可以成立为无学的。而所谓“无学戒”,并不只是指道果,而是指任何在无学者的相续中生起的戒,因为这里指的是世间与出世间混合的戒。在定蕴等一直到解脱蕴的地方,也是同样的道理。因此,就像戒、定、慧蕴指的是混合的那样,解脱蕴也应该理解为包括彼分解脱等,而不只是指舍断解脱。但解脱智见则是世间的。正因为如此,《相应部注释》中说:“前面四句说的是世间与出世间的戒、定、慧、解脱,解脱智见是省察智,它只是世间的。”巴利
Imassa anurūpavasena paṭhamaṃ tāva attasampattiyaṃ niyojetuṃ ‘‘na asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Tattha asekkhena sīlakkhandhenāti asekkhassa sīlakkhandho asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma. Asekkhassa ayanti hi asekkho, sīlakkhandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Evañca katvā vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassapi asekkhatā upapannā. Asekkhasīlanti ca na maggaphalameva adhippetaṃ, atha kho yaṃkiñci asekkhasantāne pavattasīlaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakassa sīlassa idhādhippetattā. Samādhikkhandhādīsupi vimuttikkhandhapariyosānesu ayameva nayo. Tasmā yathā sīlasamādhipaññakkhandhā missakā adhippetā, evaṃ vimuttikkhandhopīti tadaṅgavimuttiādayopi veditabbā, na paṭippassaddhivimutti eva. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyameva. Teneva saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.135) vuttaṃ ‘‘purimehi catūhi padehi lokiyalokuttarasīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiyo kathitā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti, taṃ lokiyamevā’’ti.
在“无信”等三项里,对三宝没有信,就是无信。在善的方面,能相信,就是有信;或者因为具有信,也称为有信。没有惭,就是无惭,这是对不厌恶不善等至者的说法。有惭,就是具有惭。不害怕,就是无惧,意思是说对不善等至不感到恐惧。与此相反的就是有惧。卑劣地沉滞,就是懈怠,这是对精进低劣者的说法。已经发起精进,就是已发精进,这是对具足正勤者的说法。念已忘失,就是失念,意思是念已退失。念已现前,就是念现前,这是对恒时面向所缘、令念现前者的说法。巴利
Assaddhotiādīsu tīsu vatthūsu saddhā etassa natthīti assaddho. Sukkapakkhe saddahatīti saddho, saddhā vā etassa atthītipi saddho. Natthi etassa hirīti ahiriko, akusalasamāpattiyā ajigucchamānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hirī etassa atthīti hirimā. Na ottappatīti anottappī, akusalasamāpattiyā na bhāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tabbiparīto ottappī. Kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusīto, hīnavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ etassāti āraddhavīriyo, sammappadhānayuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Muṭṭhā sati etassāti muṭṭhassati, naṭṭhassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitā sati etassāti upaṭṭhitassati, niccaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhappavattasatissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在增上戒方面戒败坏,在行为方面行为败坏,犯了之后又没有脱离。执取或让人执取被称为常见或断见的极端见解,这就是执极端见者,也就是邪见。前面两句是:“没有能力照顾或让人照顾弟子或同住者中的病人,没有能力安抚或让人安抚不满的人。”巴利
Adhisīlesīlavipanno ca ajjhācāre ācāravipanno ca āpajjitvā avuṭṭhito. Sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ gaṇhāti gāhayatīti vā antaggāhikā, micchādiṭṭhi. Purimāni dve padānīti ‘‘na paṭibalo hoti antevāsiṃ vā saddhivihāriṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā, anabhirataṃ vūpakāsetuṃ vā vūpakāsāpetuṃ vā’’ti imāni dve padāni.
殊胜、最上的行为,就叫增上行;因为增上行本身就是应当学的,所以叫增上行学处;或者,针对增上行而制定的学处,也叫增上行学处。作为道与梵行的根本,就叫根本梵行,这是指包含在二部别解脱中的学处。正因为这样,《清净道论》里说:“包含在二部别解脱中的,是根本梵行;包含在犍度仪轨中的,是增上行。”所以,在“有学制定”这个词里,应当理解为:一切包含在二部别解脱中、应当学的制定。也正因为这样,《义注》里也说:“有学制定,就是以巴拉基格等为首、应当学的学处制定。”这里剩下的部分,意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Abhivisiṭṭho uttamo samācāroti abhisamācāro, abhisamācārova sikkhitabbato sikkhāti ābhisamācārikā sikkhā, abhisamācāraṃ vā ārabbha paññattā sikkhā ābhisamācārikā. Maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāti ādibrahmacariyakā, ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannasikkhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannaṃ ādibrahmacariyakaṃ, khandhakavattapariyāpannaṃ ābhisamācārika’’nti visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.11) vuttaṃ. Tasmā sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti ettha sikkhitabbato sabbāpi ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannā paṇṇattīti gahetabbā. Teneva gaṇṭhipadepi vuttaṃ ‘‘sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti pārājikamādiṃ katvā sikkhitabbasikkhāpadapaññattiya’’nti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
关于从前是外道的人这一事例的注释巴利
Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
86 86. 在外道事这一主题中,裸形游方者有两种,即邪命外道和裸体外道,所以说“裸形游方者或邪命外道”等等。其中,邪命外道只用一块布从上面塞进腋下穿着,下身全裸;裸体外道则从头到脚一丝不挂。巴利
86. Aññatitthiyavatthumhi ājīvako acelakoti duvidho naggaparibbājakoti āha ‘‘naggaparibbājakasseva ājīvakassa vā’’tiādi. Tattha ājīvako upari ekameva vatthaṃ upakacchake pavesetvā paridahati, heṭṭhā naggo. Acelako sabbena sabbaṃ naggoyeva.
87 87. 所谓“以极少量的财物施舍”,就是指连一点点该布施的东西都没有施舍出去。“靠容貌活命的女人”,就是指完全依靠自己的姿色来维持生活的女人。“妓女的活动范围”,是指以朋友交往的方式前去接近妓女的地方,也就是妓女常去的场所。这个道理在各处都适用。“已到青春期的、或已过青春期的”,是说这两种情况都指年长的、尚未破身的女子。比丘尼本是梵行强盛的人,比丘也一样。由于他们彼此所缘的对象不属于同类,若以交往的方式去亲近,不出几天就会成为梵行的障碍,所以说“和她们很快就会熟络,因此戒就破了”。其余部分在这里已经很清楚。巴利
87.Āmisakiñcikkhasampadānaṃ nāma appamattakasseva deyyadhammassa anuppadānaṃ. Rūpūpajīvikāti attano rūpaṃyeva nissāya jīvantiyo. Vesiyā gocaro mittasanthavavasena upasaṅkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ assāti vesiyāgocaro. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yobbanappattā yobbanātītā vāti ubhayenapi mahallikā anividdhakumāriyova vadati. Bhikkhuniyo nāma ussannabrahmacariyā, tathā bhikkhūpi. Tesaṃ aññamaññavisabhāgavatthubhāvato santhavavasena upasaṅkamane katipāheneva brahmacariyantarāyo siyāti āha ‘‘tāhi saddhiṃ khippameva vissāso hoti, tato sīlaṃ bhijjatī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
五种疾病事的论述注释巴利
Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
88 88. 在“五种患病之处”这一节中,“指甲背大小”这个说法,三部义注都说:“这里指的是小指的指甲背。”用“如果它虽然只有指甲背大小,却处在还会增长的阶段,就不应让他出家”这句话,从总体上说明了判定标准。因此可以确定:在身体的任何部位,只要是指甲背大小、又处在还会增长的阶段,就不可以。这样一来,如果是指甲背大小、但处在不再增长的阶段,岂不是在任何地方都可以?然而这并不是总体上所认可的意思。为了指出只限于特定部位才开许,才说了“然而,如果……”等话。因为,如果不加区分地允许处在不再增长阶段的指甲背大小,就不会再制定“在下衣和上衣自然遮蔽的地方”这一部位限制。所以可以确定:在下衣和上衣自然遮蔽之处以外的地方,即使是指甲背大小、处在不再增长的阶段,也不可以。至于比指甲背还小的东西,不论处在不再增长的阶段还是还会增长的阶段,都可以。因为比指甲背还小的东西,即使处在还会增长的阶段或不再增长的阶段,也只是在脸部等地方被禁止。巴利
88. Pañcābādhavatthumhi nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇanti ettha ‘‘kaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhi adhippetā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tañce nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃhoti, na pabbājetabbo’’ti iminā sāmaññato lakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā yattha katthaci sarīrāvayavesu nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Evañca sati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, sabbattha vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tañca na sāmaññato adhippetanti padesaviseseyeva niyametvā dassento ‘‘sace panā’’tiādimāha. Sace hi avisesena nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ vaṭṭeyya, ‘‘nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaacchanne ṭhāne’’ti padesaniyamaṃ na kareyya, tasmā nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhānato aññattha nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitampi na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataraṃ pana avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitaṃ hotu, vaṭṭati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakatarassa vaḍḍhanakapakkhe avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitassa mukhādīsuyeva paṭikkhittattā.
对于肿块,也应当用同样的方法来判断。不过,在脸部等部位,即使比枣核还小的肿块也是不允许的,这一点没有另外单独说明。因为那里只说了“在脸部等没有遮蔽的部位,即使处于不增长的状态下也不允许”,尽管如此,按照麻风病部分所讲的方法可以知道:在脸部等部位,即使比枣核还小的肿块也是不允许的。所以,“即使处于不增长的状态下”这里的“pi”是用来把没有说到的内容也一并收摄进来。这样一来,即使比枣核还小也不允许,这个意思已经显示出来了,这就是我们的主张。在“自然色所生”中,是就因病引起的变异色不存在而说的。“枣核大小”即枣核之量。“使皮肤生成”即使皮肤生起。“使皮肤生成”也是一种文本,意思是使现有的皮肤生起。“莲华叶色”即依红莲、白莲而说的莲叶之色。“消瘦病”即消耗病。巴利
Gaṇḍepi imināva nayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Tattha pana mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti visuṃ na dassito. ‘‘Mukhādike appaṭicchannaṭṭhāne avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopi na vaṭṭatī’’ti ettakameva hi tattha vuttaṃ, tathāpi kuṭṭhe vuttanayena mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti viññāyati, tasmā avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopīti ettha pi-saddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho. Tena kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi na vaṭṭatīti ayamattho dassitoyevāti ayamamhākaṃ khanti. Pakativaṇṇe jāteti rogahetukassa vikāravaṇṇassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kolaṭṭhimattakoti badaraṭṭhippamāṇo. Suchaviṃ kāretvāti sañjātachaviṃ kāretvā. ‘‘Sañchaviṃ kāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, vijjamānachaviṃ kāretvāti attho. Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇanti rattapadumasetapadumavasena padumapattavaṇṇaṃ. Sosabyādhīti khayarogo.
关于国王的士兵等事例的注释巴利
Rājabhaṭādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
90-96 90至96. 在国王的兵卒等事例中,“āhaṃsu”就是人们说的意思。因此……(中略)……“如是说”:因为他自己就是法主,所以为了让比丘们将来不再做这种事,在度化了那个比丘们不应度出家的指鬘盗贼之后,给比丘们制定学处时说:“诸比丘,不应让被称为‘持旗者’的盗贼出家,谁让他出家,就犯恶作罪。” “Uparamanti”就是退却、回转。“Bhinditvā”就是打破脚镣。“Chinditvā”就是切断锁链。“Muñcitvā”就是解开绳索的捆绑。“Vivaritvā”就是在村牢等地方打开村门等。“于看不见的人中逃跑”就是在有人看守时,趁看守的人没看见而逃跑。“Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhaṃ”就是一点一点地、逐渐地。巴利
90-96. Rājabhaṭādivatthūsu āhaṃsūti manussā vadiṃsu. Tasmā…pe… evamāhāti yasmā sayaṃ dhammassāmī, tasmā bhikkhūhi apabbājitabbaṃ coraṃ aṅgulimālaṃ pabbājetvā āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ‘‘na, bhikkhave, dhajabandho coro pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti āha. Uparamantīti viramanti nivattanti. Bhinditvāti andubandhanaṃ bhinditvā. Chinditvāti saṅkhalikabandhanaṃ chinditvā. Muñcitvāti rajjubandhanaṃ muñcitvā. Vivaritvāti gāmabandhanādīsu gāmadvārādīni vivaritvā. Apassamānānaṃ vā palāyatīti purisaguttiyaṃ purisānaṃ apassamānānaṃ palāyati. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhanti thokaṃ thokaṃ.
97 97. 在灌顶等场合,他们清扫牢狱之类的地方,针对这一点才说“或以一切共通的方式”。如果自由妇女自己呈递文书,那是不允许的。于是那些自由妇女心想“我们也是女奴”,就自己让人写下女奴文书,这也不允许。她们就像头上被浇了酪浆一样。意思是:好比有人要使人成为非奴时,用酪浆洗头后再使之成为非奴;同样,因为是由净人的话而给予的,所以她们实际上仍是自由人。不过,据说在锡兰岛有浇酪浆的习俗。所谓“不应使其出家”,是针对即使以如法之言给予、他们仍然是僧团净人奴仆的情况才这样说的。所谓无主奴,是指主人连同妻子儿女等都已死去,没有任何人拥有他,这种人也不应使其出家,但他自己可以把自己变为自由人。或者,那个国家里的主人们也可以为他办理。在三处义论中说:“天女奴之子可以使其出家。”他们说,奴隶出家后见到自己的主人而逃跑,没有罪。其余各处都很清楚。巴利
97. Abhisekādīsu bandhanāgārādīni sodhenti, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sabbasādhāraṇena vā nayenā’’ti. Sace sayameva paṇṇaṃ āropenti, na vaṭṭatīti tā bhujissitthiyo ‘‘mayampi dāsiyo homā’’ti sayameva dāsipaṇṇaṃ likhāpenti, na vaṭṭati. Takkaṃ sīse āsittakasadisāva hontīti yathā adāse karontā takkena sīsaṃ dhovitvā adāsaṃ karonti, evaṃ ārāmikavacanena dinnattā adāsāva teti adhippāyo. Takkāsiñcanaṃ pana sīhaḷadīpe cārittanti vadanti. Neva pabbājetabboti vuttanti kappiyavacanena dinnepi saṅghassa ārāmikadāsattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Nissāmikadāso nāma yassa sāmikā saputtadārādayo matā honti, na koci tassa pariggāhako, sopi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ pana attanāpi bhujissaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ye vā pana tasmiṃ raṭṭhe sāmino, tehipi kārāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Devadāsiputtaṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Dāsassa pabbajitvā attano sāmike disvā palāyantassa āpatti natthīti vadanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
解除依止的论述注释巴利
Nissayamuccanakakathāvaṇṇanā
103 103. 关于解除依止者的义务,在五法和六法当中,“然而两者……中略……随好”这一段,三处义理注释里都说:“所有这些详细分类,如果在论母注释书中已经了解,就算已经知道了。”在“知道犯戒”等句子中,那里也说:“即使不熟悉文本,只要知道‘这样做就犯这条戒’,也可以。”还有人主张,这应该理解为事先已经把文本背熟了,对戒师和亲教师也是同样的道理。这里其余的内容意思很明白。巴利
103. Nissayamuccanakassa vattesu pañcakachakkesu pana ubhayāni kho pana…pe… anubyañjanasoti ettha ‘‘sabbopi cāyaṃ pabhedo mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ñātāyaṃ ñāto hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Āpattiṃ jānātītiādīsu ca ‘‘pāṭhe avattamānepi ‘idaṃ nāma katvā idaṃ āpajjatī’ti jānāti ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti tattheva vuttaṃ. Tañca kho pubbe pāṭhe paguṇe kateti gahetabbanti ca ācariyupajjhāyānampi eseva nayoti ca keci vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
罗睺罗故事的注释巴利
Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
105 105. 在罗睺罗事中,“就住在那里”:他们所有人从证得阿拉汉果的时候起,作为圣者,确实都是处于中舍的状态,所以没有把国王送来的消息禀告十力尊,就径直住在那里。某日出生的一位名叫咖鲁达义的大臣——据说,他在莲花胜佛的时代,出生在天鹅城的一户良家。他听导师说法时,看见导师把一位比丘安排在令在家众生起净信者中的首位,于是做了善行,发愿得到那个位置。他终生行善,在人天之中辗转投生。在我们的菩萨入母胎结生的那天,他也在迦毗罗卫城的大臣家中结生。因为他和菩萨在同一天出生,就在那天,他被放在细布上,送到菩萨身边去侍奉。和菩萨同一天出生的有七者:菩提树、罗睺罗之母、四只宝瓶、象乘、犍陟、恰那和咖鲁达义,他们被称为“同生者”。后来在命名那天,因为他出生在全城都满心欢喜的日子,就给他取名叫“伍达义”。但因为肤色稍黑,所以叫“咖鲁达义”。他和菩萨一起玩游戏,渐渐长大。巴利
105. Rāhulavatthumhi tattheva vihariṃsūti sabbepi te arahattaṃ pattakālato paṭṭhāya ariyā nāma majjhattāva hontīti rañño pahitasāsanaṃ dasabalassa anārocetvāva tattha vihariṃsu. Ekadivasaṃ jātaṃ kāḷudāyiṃ nāma amaccanti ayaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.225) padumuttarabuddhakāle haṃsavatīnagare kulagehe nibbatto satthu dhammadesanaṃ suṇanto satthāraṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ kulappasādakānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapentaṃ disvā adhikārakammaṃ katvā taṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patthesi. So yāvajīvaṃ kusalaṃ katvā devamanussesu saṃsaranto amhākaṃ bodhisattassa mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase kapilavatthusmiṃyeva amaccagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātadivase bodhisattena saddhiṃyeva jātoti taṃ divasaṃyeva dukūlacumbaṭake nipajjāpetvā bodhisattassa upaṭṭhānatthāya nayiṃsu. Bodhisattena hi saddhiṃ bodhirukkho rāhulamātā catasso nidhikumbhiyo ārohaniyahatthī kaṇḍako channo kāḷudāyīti ime satta ekadivase jātattā sahajātā nāma ahesuṃ. Athassa nāmaggahaṇadivase sakalanagarassa udaggacittadivase jātoti udāyītveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Thokaṃ kāḷadhātukattā pana kāḷudāyī nāma jāto. So bodhisattena saddhiṃ kumārakīḷaṃ kīḷanto vuddhiṃ agamāsi.
以六十多首偈颂。巴利
Saṭṭhimattāhigāthāhīti –
尊者,如今那些树如炭火般红热。
渴求果实者舍弃覆盖。
他们如火焰般炽然放光;
大雄啊,此正是巴吉拉特王裔之时。
“ 不太冷,不太热,没有大饥荒和饥饿;
大地绿草如茵,大牟尼,时候到了。”巴利
‘‘Aṅgārino dāni dumā bhadante; Phalesino chadanaṃ vippahāya; Te accimantova pabhāsayanti; Samayo mahāvīra bhāgīrasānaṃ. (theragā. 527) ‘‘Nātisītaṃ nātiuṇhaṃ, nātidubbhikkhachātakaṃ; Saddalā haritā bhūmi, esa kālo mahāmunī’’ti. –
以这些开头的六十多首偈颂。注释书里说:“‘莲叶雨’就是像莲叶颜色的水。”也有人说,莲叶雨是指雨量像莲叶那么大,从中间涌起,逐渐变成一百层、一千层落下来的雨。据说,在那场雨里,只有想被淋湿的人才会被淋湿,其他人不会。没有一位国王……中略……离去:也就是说,听闻说法之后,亲戚们离去时,没有一位国王或大臣在邀请“明天请接受我们的施食”之后才离去。他的父亲苏托达那大王也想:“我的儿子不先到我家,会去哪里呢?”于是没有邀请就离去了。但回去之后,他在家里为两万比丘准备了粥等食物,并铺设了座位。巴利
Ādikāhi saṭṭhimattāhi gāthāhi. ‘‘Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇamudaka’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Pokkharapattappamāṇaṃ majjhe uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena satapaṭalaṃ sahassapaṭalaṃ hutvā vassanakavassantipi vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira vassante temetukāmāva tementi, na itare. Ekopi rājā vā…pe… gato natthīti dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pakkantesu ñātīsu ekopi rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti nimantetvā gato natthi. Pitāpissa suddhodanamahārājā ‘‘mayhaṃ putto mama gehaṃ anāgantvā kahaṃ gamissatī’’ti animantetvāva agamāsi, gantvā pana gehe vīsatiyā bhikkhusahassānaṃ yāguādīni paṭiyādāpetvā āsanāni paññāpesi.
在亲族的城市里,就是亲族家族所在的城市。从缠头布开始,就是从头部开始。所谓缠头布,是因为世尊圆满的额头和圆满的头顶跟缠头布相似,所以用它来称呼。从世尊右耳边的发髻开始,有一片肉膜隆起,覆盖并充满整个额头,一直延伸到左耳边的发髻处停住;因为这片肉膜细腻、金色、明亮、圆满,就像国王绑的缠头布带一样闪耀。据说,人们看到世尊这个特征后,才为国王们制作了缠头布带。其他人则头顶不圆满:有些人的头像布片,有些人的头像果子,有些人的头像骨头,有些人的头像葫芦,有些人的头像水罐,有些人的头像山坡。而世尊的头顶,就像用锥子旋转着塑出来一样,极其圆满,也像水泡一样。正因为这样,由于跟缠着缠头布的头顶相似,又因为头顶处处圆满如缠头布,世尊被称为缠头头顶。巴利
Kulanagareti ñātikulassa nagare. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyāti sīsato paṭṭhāya. Uṇhīsanti hi uṇhīsasadisattā bhagavato paripuṇṇanalāṭassa paripuṇṇasīsassa ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhagavato hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalanalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ saṇhatamatāya suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya pabhassaratāya paripuṇṇatāya ca rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Bhagavato kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ disvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti, keci kappasīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumbasīsā, keci kumbhasīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā, bhagavato pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapubbuḷasadisampi hoti. Teneva uṇhīsaveṭhitasīsasadisattā uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīsattā ca uṇhīsasīsoti bhagavā vuccati.
名为人狮偈的八首偈颂:巴利
Narasīhagāthāhināma aṭṭhahi gāthāhīti –
“ 头发柔滑,青黑色,柔软而卷曲;
额头像太阳一样洁净无瑕。
鼻子端正挺直,鼻梁柔软修长;
被光芒之网所遍覆的人中狮子。”巴利
‘‘Siniddhanīlamudukuñcitakeso; Sūriyanimmalatalābhinalāṭo; Yuttatuṅgamudukāyatanāso; Raṃsijālavitato narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
就这样,以这八首偈颂等。不过在义理分(ganthipadesu)中——巴利
Evamādikāhi aṭṭhahi gāthāhi. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana –
双足红润,装饰着轮宝图案;
双足跟修长,以相好庄严;
双脚装饰着拂尘和伞盖。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中之狮。
释迦王子中最尊贵的人,生得柔软细嫩。
具足相好、身体圆满的(释迦王子)
人中雄者,为利世间而往;
此实汝父,人中之狮。
面容色泽如满月,
为天人所爱之人中龙象;
步伐像发情醉象王那样优雅。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中的雄狮。
出身于刹帝利中最尊贵的家族;
双足被天与人所礼敬。
内心安住在戒与定上;
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
鼻梁修长,匀称端正;
睫如牛王,目色绀青幽深。
拥有如因陀罗弓般深蓝色眉毫者。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中雄狮。
脖颈圆润优美,端正匀称。
下巴像狮子,身体像兽王;
有着像金子一样美好的肤色,显现出最殊胜的光彩。
这位就是你的父亲,人中狮子。
声音柔润、深沉、悦耳、美妙;
舌头红得像朱砂一样,非常好看。
四十齿,洁白而善调伏;
此实汝父,人中之狮。
他的头发是深蓝色的,像眼药一样。
额头像金板一样洁净明亮;
优美白毫像晨星一样洁白纯净;
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
“ 犹如明月游行青苍天路,
群星环拥而庄严其身。
那位沙门之王,坐在弟子们中间。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。”巴利
‘‘Cakkavaraṅkitarattasupādo; Lakkhaṇamaṇḍitaāyatapaṇhi; Cāmarachattavibhūsitapādo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Sakyakumāravaro sukhumālo; Lakkhaṇacittikapuṇṇasarīro; Lokahitāya gato naravīro; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Puṇṇasasaṅkanibho mukhavaṇṇo; Devanarāna piyo naranāgo; Mattagajindavilāsitagāmī; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Khattiyasambhavaaggakulīno; Devamanussanamassitapādo; Sīlasamādhipatiṭṭhitacitto; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Āyatayuttasusaṇṭhitanāso; Gopakhumo abhinīlasunetto; Indadhanūabhinīlabhamūko; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Vaṭṭasuvaṭṭasusaṇṭhitagīvo ; Sīhahanū migarājasarīro; Kañcanasucchaviuttamavaṇṇo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Siniddhasugambhiramañjusaghoso; Hiṅgulabandhukarattasujivho; Vīsativīsatisetasudanto; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Añjanavaṇṇasunīlasukeso ; Kañcanapaṭṭavisuddhanalāṭo; Osadhipaṇḍarasuddhasuuṇṇo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Gacchatinilapathe viya cando; Tāragaṇāpariveṭhitarūpo; Sāvakamajjhagato samaṇindo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
这里也列出了九首偈颂,但它们和“以八首偈颂”这句话对不上。从顶髻一直到脚底所说的那个顺序,在那里也看不到。为了乞食而行走,就叫作乞食行。巴利
Imā nava gāthāyopi ettha dassitā, tā pana ‘‘aṭṭhahi gāthāhī’’ti vacanena na samenti. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāya yāva pādatalāti vuttānukkamopi tattha na dissati. Bhikkhāya caratīti bhikkhācāro.
“起立”是指起身之后,站在别人家门口,去拿该受的团食。“不应放逸”是说:如果丢掉乞食的规矩,为了找好吃的而起立,那就叫放逸;如果按门户次序一家一家乞食而行,那就叫不放逸。这样做的人,在起立时就不应放逸。“法”是指舍弃不正当的谋生方式,按门户次序而行,也就是修习这乞食的善法。“安乐而卧”只是说法上的表达,它的意思是:这样依乞食法而行的人,名为法行者,在今生和来世,以四种威仪安乐而住。巴利
Uttiṭṭheti uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā gahetabbapiṇḍe. Nappamajjheyyāti piṇḍacārikavattaṃ hāpetvā paṇītabhojanāni pariyesanto uttiṭṭhe pamajjati nāma, sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya caranto pana nappamajjati nāma, evaṃ karonto uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya. Dhammanti anesanaṃ pahāya sapadānaṃ caranto tameva bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ sucaritaṃ care. Sukhaṃ setīti desanāmattametaṃ, evaṃ panetaṃ bhikkhāya cariyadhammaṃ caranto dhammacārī idhaloke ca paraloke ca catūhipi iriyāpathehi sukhaṃ viharatīti attho.
第二首偈颂里,“不令其为恶行”的意思是:如果走到妓女住处等不该去的地方,就是在行持乞食法的恶行;如果不那样做,而是行持这乞食法作为善行,就不令其为恶行。这里其余的内容和前面所说的一样。要知道,这第二首偈颂是难陀长老回到父亲的住处后说的。因此,在《长老偈注》(《长老偈注》1.156 难陀长老偈注)中,阿阇梨护法长老说:“第二天入村乞食时,以‘起立不应放逸’这首偈颂让父亲证得入流果,然后回到住处,又以‘应行善法’这首偈颂让大爱道证得入流果,让国王证得一来果。”《法句经注》(《法句经注》1.12 难陀长老事)中也说:“第二天入村乞食时,以‘起立不应放逸’这首偈颂让父亲证得入流果,以‘应行法’这首偈颂让大爱道证得入流果,让国王证得一来果。”巴利
Dutiyagāthāya na naṃ duccaritanti vesiyādibhede agocare caranto naṃ bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ duccaritaṃ carati nāma, evaṃ acaritvā taṃ dhammaṃ care sucaritaṃ, na naṃ duccaritaṃ care. Sesamettha vuttatthameva. Imaṃ pana dutiyagāthaṃ pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā abhāsīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.156 nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘dutiyadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā nivesanaṃ gantvā ‘dhammaṃ care sucarita’nti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti. Dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyampi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ ‘‘punadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘dhammaṃ care’ti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti.
听完《护法本生》后,国王便证得了不来果。又有一天,尊者在王宫吃过早饭,国王坐在一旁,对尊者说:“尊者,在您修苦行的时候,有一位天神来到我面前说:‘你的儿子死了。’我不相信她的话,反驳说:‘我的儿子没有证得菩提,是不会死的。’”尊者说:“您现在怎么会相信呢?以前也曾有人给您看过骨头,说‘你的儿子死了’,您也一样不信。”于是尊者以此为因缘,讲了《大护法本生》。国王听完后,便证得了不来果。巴利
Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsīti punekadivasaṃ rājanivesane katapātarāso ekamantaṃ nisinnena raññā ‘‘bhante, tumhākaṃ dukkarakārikakāle ekā devatā maṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘putto te kālakato’ti āha. Ahaṃ tassā vacanaṃ asaddahanto ‘na mayhaṃ putto bodhiṃ appatvā kālaṃ karotī’ti paṭikkhipinti vutte idāni kathaṃ saddahissatha, pubbepi aṭṭhikāni dassetvā ‘putto te mato’ti vutte na saddahitthā’’ti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā mahādhammapālajātakaṃ kathesi. Taṃ sutvā rājā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhahi.
剃发:指按家族规矩把头发剃掉。授位:指灌顶立为太子。新宅庆典:就是搬进新房的吉祥仪式;娶妻庆典:就是举行婚礼的吉祥仪式。伞盖庆典:指太子的伞盖庆典。国中美者:就是国中最美、最出色的女子,没有六种身体上的缺陷,具备五种美。她不太高、不太矮、不太瘦、不太胖、不太黑、不太白,超出了人间的容貌,又还没达到天人的容貌,所以没有六种身体上的缺陷。她具备五种美:皮肤美、肌肉美、筋腱美、骨骼美、年龄美。她不需要外来的光照,只凭自身的光就能照亮十二肘见方的地方,肤色像黄檀或金色,这就是她的皮肤美。她的双手双脚和面部末端,就像涂过虫漆一样,红得像红珊瑚或红毛毯,这就是她的肌肉美。二十片指甲在肉不露出的地方像涂满了虫漆,在露出的地方像流出的乳汁,这就是她的筋腱美。三十二颗牙齿紧密整齐,看起来像洗得干干净净的钻石排列,这就是她的骨骼美。即使已经一百二十岁,看起来也像十六岁,没有皱纹和白发,这就是她的年龄美。因为她具备这五种美,所以被称为国中美者。巴利
Kesavissajjananti kulamariyādavasena kesoropanaṃ. Paṭṭabandhoti yuvarājapaṭṭabandho. Abhinavagharappavesanamaho gharamaṅgalaṃ, vivāhakaraṇamaho āvāhamaṅgalaṃ. Chattamaṅgalanti yuvarājachattamaṅgalaṃ. Janapadakalyāṇīti (udā. aṭṭha. 22) janapadamhi kalyāṇī uttamā chasarīradosarahitā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā. Sā hi yasmā nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷā nāccodātāti atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, appattā dibbaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, tasmā chasarīradosarahitā. Chavikalyāṇaṃ maṃsakalyāṇaṃ nahārukalyāṇaṃ aṭṭhikalyāṇaṃ vayakalyāṇanti imehi pana pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā nāma. Tassā hi āgantukobhāsakiccaṃ natthi. Attano sarīrobhāseneva dvādasahatthaṭṭhāne ālokaṃ karoti, piyaṅgusāmā vā hoti suvaṇṇasāmā vā, ayamassā chavikalyāṇatā. Cattāro panassā hatthapādā mukhapariyosānañca lākhārasaparikammakataṃ viya rattapavāḷarattakambalasadisaṃ hoti, ayamassā maṃsakalyāṇatā. Vīsati pana nakhapattāni maṃsato amuttaṭṭhāne lākhārasapūritāni viya muttaṭṭhāne khīradhārāsadisāni honti, ayamassā nahārukalyāṇatā. Dvattiṃsa dantā suphusitā sudhotavajirapanti viya khāyanti, ayamassā aṭṭhikalyāṇatā. Vīsativassasatikāpi samānā soḷasavassuddesikā viya hoti nivalipalitā, ayamassā vayakalyāṇatā. Iti imehi pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā janapadakalyāṇīti vuccati.
“Tuvaṭa”的意思是迅速。他〔南达〕也不敢对世尊说“请拿钵”,就径直往精舍去了。据说他因为对如来的恭敬,没法说出“尊者,请拿钵”。但他〔南达〕心里想:“世尊会在阶梯顶上拿钵。”导师在那个地方没有拿。他〔南达〕又想:“他〔世尊〕会在阶梯脚下拿钵。”导师在那里也没有拿。他〔南达〕又想:“他〔世尊〕会在王宫庭院里拿钵。”导师在那里还是没有拿。王子想折返,不情愿地走着,因为对导师的恭敬,连“请拿钵”都说不出口,一边走一边想:“会在这里拿吧,会在那里拿吧。”而国中美者说的那句话,仿佛横梗在他〔南达〕心里。确实,灌顶庆典对难陀王子的折磨,远不如国中美者那句话来得厉害,所以他〔南达〕心里的焦灼非常强烈。于是,就在他〔南达〕想着“会在这里折返,会在那里折返”的时候,导师把他〔南达〕带到了精舍,说:“南达,你要出家。”他〔南达〕因为对佛陀的恭敬,没有说“我不出家”,而是说:“是的,我出家。”导师说:“那么,就让南达出家吧。”便让他〔南达〕出了家。因此说:“世尊让不情愿的他出了家。”《法句经注》中说:“导师到了迦毗罗卫城后,在第三天让南达出了家。”而《增支部注》中则说——巴利
Tuvaṭanti sīghaṃ. Sopi bhagavantaṃ ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ avisahamāno vihāraṃyeva agamāsīti. So kira tathāgate gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ vo bhante gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ pana cintesi ‘‘sopānasīse pattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti. Satthā tasmimpi ṭhāne na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘sopānapādamūle gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘rājaṅgaṇe gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Kumāro nivattitukāmo aruciyā gacchanto satthu gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattumpi asakkonto ‘‘idha gaṇhissati, ettha gaṇhissatī’’ti cintento gacchati. Janapadakalyāṇiyā ca vuttavacanaṃ tassa hadaye tiriyaṃ patitvā viya ṭhitaṃ. Nandakumārañhi abhisekamaṅgalaṃ na tathā pīḷesi, yathā janapadakalyāṇiyā vuttavacanaṃ, tenassa cittasantāpo balavā ahosi. Atha naṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissati, imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissatī’’ti cintentameva satthā vihāraṃ netvā ‘‘pabbajissasi nandā’’ti āha. So buddhagāravena ‘‘na pabbajissāmī’’ti avatvā ‘‘āma pabbajissāmī’’ti āha. Satthā ‘‘tena hi nandaṃ pabbājethā’’ti vatvā pabbājesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anicchamānaṃyeva bhagavā pabbājesī’’ti. ‘‘Satthā kapilapuraṃ gantvā tatiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ, aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.230) pana –
大士证得一切知智之后,转动殊胜的法轮,利益世间。他从王舍城前往迦毗罗卫城,初次见面就让父亲安立在入流果上;第二天又到父亲的住处,教导了罗睺罗的母亲,然后也为其余的人说法;第三天,在难陀王子举行灌顶、入宫、婚庆等仪式时,他来到南达的住处,让王子拿起钵,为了让他出家,就带着他朝寺院走去。巴利
‘‘Mahāsattopi sabbaññutaṃ patvā pavattitavaradhammacakko lokānuggahaṃ karonto rājagahato kapilavatthuṃ gantvā paṭhamadassaneneva pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi, punadivase pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā rāhulamātāya ovādaṃ katvā sesajanassapi dhammaṃ kathesi, punadivase nandakumārassa abhisekagehappavesanaāvāhamaṅgalesu vattamānesu tassa nivesanaṃ gantvā kumāraṃ pattaṃ gāhāpetvā pabbājetuṃ vihārābhimukho pāyāsī’’ti –
这里说“世尊来到迦毗罗卫城后,第二天就让难陀出家”,这是《增支部注》里的说法。所有这些,都是因为阿阇梨依据各位诵经者各自辗转口传的情况来整理传承,所以在各处才有各种不同的说法,并不是阿阇梨的话本身前后矛盾。巴利
Vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘bhagavā kapilapuraṃ āgantvā dutiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbampetaṃ ācariyena taṃtaṃbhāṇakānaṃ tathā tathā anussavavasena pariharitvā āgatabhāvato tattha tattha tathā tathā vuttanti natthettha ācariyavacane pubbāparavirodho.
“梵色貌”是指和梵天形貌相同的容色。“Tyassa”就是“他的”。“随转”是指属于轮回的。“有苦”是因为和苦在一起,所以叫有苦,意思是与苦同俱。七种圣财如下——巴利
Brahmarūpavaṇṇanti brahmarūpasamānarūpaṃ. Tyassāti te assa. Vaṭṭānugatanti vaṭṭapariyāpannaṃ. Savighātanti dukkhasahitattā savighātaṃ, sadukkhanti attho. Sattavidhaṃ ariyadhananti –
“ 信为财,戒为财,惭与愧为财;
多闻与布施为财,智慧实为第七财。”巴利
‘‘Saddhādhanaṃ sīladhanaṃ, hiriottappiyaṃ dhanaṃ; Sutadhanañca cāgo ca, paññā ve sattamaṃ dhana’’nti. (a. ni. 7.5-6) –
以上就是所说的七种圣财。“以捡拾落穗的方式生活”,意思是以乞食的方式生活。对儿女的贪爱生起时,会搅动整个身体,一直穿透到骨髓才停住,所以说“尊者,对儿女的疼爱……一直穿透到骨髓才停住”。对儿女的贪爱力量很强,与生俱来的喜受冲动便充分扩散开来;这股冲动所生的色法遍满全身,于是搅动整个身体,一直穿透到骨髓才停住。“Yatra hi nāma”就是“yo nāma”的意思。这里其余的内容很容易理解。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ sattavidhaṃ ariyadhanaṃ. Uñchācariyāyāti bhikkhācariyāya. Puttasineho uppajjamāno sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘puttapemaṃ bhante…pe… aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Puttasineho hi balavabhāvato sahajātapītivegassa savipphāratāya taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Sesamettha uttānameva.
学处与处罚事之论述注释巴利
Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
106 比丘们,我允许沙弥受持十学处。在这段话里,“应当学习的条目”就是学处,意思是学习的组成部分。或者说,学习的条目就是学处,意思是增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学的达成方法。从实际含义来说,学处指的是与欲界善心相应的离(远离)。而与这些离相应的心所法,在这里也应当通过同一指称一并理解。
“杀”是指:以自身的本性正在堕落时,就在中途把它杀害,也就是不给它慢慢堕落的机会,而让它迅速坠落。“杀”也可以指:越过界限,用刀等器具制伏之后再令其坠落。对生命的杀害就是杀生,也就是杀死生命、夺去生命。
这里说的“生命”,从世俗说法来讲是有情,从究竟意义来讲是命根。对于这样的生命,具有生命想者,能生起切断命根的加行之杀思,由身门或语门中的任何一种所生起,这就是杀生。由此而有杀生。巴利
106.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadānītiādīsu sikkhitabbāni padāni sikkhāpadāni, sikkhākoṭṭhāsāti attho. Sikkhāya vā padāni sikkhāpadāni, adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyāti attho. Atthato pana kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo, taṃsampayuttadhammā panettha taggahaṇeneva gahetabbā. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññatarappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto, tato pāṇātipātā.
“离”这个词:因为杀生等被称为怨敌的恶法是怨敌的根源,所以(它)忆念(这些法)为怨敌,或者像呵斥“我就站在这儿,你怎么还敢来”一样把它赶走,所以叫“离”。或者,依它而远离,本该说成“远离”,但按照词源学的方式说成了“离”。从含义上说,“离”就是与欲界善心相应的各种离。它在《分别论》中是这样说的:“对于远离杀生的人,那时对杀生的不乐、离、极离、离、不作、不造、不犯、不越界、断桥梁”等等。虽然这种“离”也有出世间的情况,但这里指的是依受持而起的离;因为出世间的离不可能依受持而生起,所以应当取与欲界善心相应的各种离。巴利
Veramaṇīti verahetutāya verasaññitaṃ pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ maṇati, ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasī’’ti vā tajjentī viya nīharatīti veramaṇī. Viramati etāyāti vā viramaṇīti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘veramaṇī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthato pana veramaṇīti kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo. Sā ‘‘pāṇātipātādiṃ viramantassa yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto’’ti evamādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 704) vuttā. Kāmañcesā veramaṇī nāma lokuttarāpi atthi, idha pana samādānavasappavattā virati adhippetāti lokuttarāya viratiyā samādānavasena pavattiasambhavato kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo gahetabbā.
在“离不与取”等戒条中,取用未给予的东西,就叫不与取,也就是拿走别人的东西、偷盗、做贼。这里说的“未给予”,是指别人所拥有、支配的东西。对于这样的别人所有物,如果别人可以随意处置它,不会因此受惩罚,也没有过失,而有人对它生起“这是别人所有的”想,那么,能引发取走彼物之加行的偷盗思心所,就是不与取。巴利
Adinnādānā veramaṇītiādīsu adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassaharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ. Yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaañano tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ.
非梵行,也叫非殊胜行,就是男女两两交合。因为它被呵责为“诸欲乐味少、苦多、恼多,这里的过患更大”等等,所以它是非殊胜的、不被赞叹的行为;或者说,它是非殊胜的、下劣的男女之行为,所以叫非殊胜行。又因为它是非殊胜行,所以也称为非梵行。从义理上说,非梵行就是以从事非法行为为目的、发生在身门、能生起道与非道之行的思。巴利
Abrahmacariyaṃ nāma aseṭṭhacariyaṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti. Sā hi ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.177; 2.42) hīḷitattā aseṭṭhā appasatthā cariyāti vā aseṭṭhānaṃ nihīnānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ cariyāti vā aseṭṭhacariyaṃ, aseṭṭhacariyattā abrahmacariyanti ca vuccati , atthato pana asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggappaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ.
“妄”是指不真实、不正确的事,“语”是指把这件事当成真实、正确来告诉别人。从特征来说,想要把不真实的事当成真实来告诉别人,并且生起那种让对方这样理解的思,这就是妄语;因为通过它而说妄语,所以称为妄语。巴利
Musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu, vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti katvā.
关于“酒类放逸处”这一段,这里先讲“谷酒”有五种:饼酒、粉酒、米酒、投入酒丸的酒、混合配料的酒。“酒类”也有五种:花酒、果酒、蜜酒、糖酒、混合配料的酒。
其中,把饼放进容器里,加上相应的水,揉捣后做出来的,就是饼酒。其余几种谷酒也照这样理解。“投入酒丸的酒”里的“酒丸”,指的是那种酒的酵母,也就是被称为酒曲的东西;把它们投进去做出来的,就是投入酒丸的酒。用诃子、芥子等各种配料混合起来做成的,就是混合配料的酒。用蜜、棕榈、椰子等花汁长久酝酿而成的,是花酒。用波罗蜜等果汁做成的,是果酒。用葡萄汁做成的,是蜜酒。用甘蔗汁做成的,是糖酒。用诃子、余甘子、胡椒等种种配料之汁长久酝酿而成的,是混合配料的酒。这一切都因为能致醉,所以称为“酒”。“放逸处”就是放逸的原因。以何种思而饮那酒,这(放逸处)就是那种思的同义词。“酒类放逸处”即酒类与放逸处,因此称为“酒类放逸处”。巴利
Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānāti ettha surāti pūvasurā piṭṭhasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā. Merayanti pupphāsavo phalāsavo madhvāsavo guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tattha pūve bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā pūvasurā. Evaṃ sesasurāpi. Kiṇṇāti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati, ye surāmodakāti vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katā kiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitā sambhārasaṃyuttā. Madhukatālanāḷikerādipuppharaso ciraparivāsito pupphāsavo. Panasādiphalaraso phalāsavo. Muddikāraso madhvāsavo. Ucchuraso guḷāsavo. Harītakaāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsito sambhārasaṃyutto. Taṃ sabbampi madakaraṇavasena majjaṃ pivantaṃ madayatīti katvā. Pamādaṭṭhānanti pamādakāraṇaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivanti, tassā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Surāmerayamajje pamādaṭṭhānaṃ surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā.
非时食:从日出到正午之间,这是佛陀等诸圣者惯常实行、经常实行的进食时间,称为“时”;除此之外就是“非时”。从“应被食用”这个意义上说是“食”,粥、饭等一切属于时药的东西都包括在内。就像“夜间止食”那里,把夜间的进食省略后词而称为“夜”一样,这里也把食物的吞咽称为“食”。在非时进食,就是非时食;由此说“离非时食”,意思是在非时吞咽时药之物。或者,这里的“食”字不是从业行意义上来讲“应被食用者”,而应当取状态行意义的“吞咽”,所以非时的吞咽就是非时食。那么,吞咽什么呢?因为夜分药等已被允许,而且“非时食”这个词已经惯用于吞咽时药,所以可知是指时药。从义理上说,发生在身门、在非时吞咽时药的思心所,应知为“非时食”。巴利
Vikālabhojanāti aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā. Ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena bhojanaṃ, yāgubhattādi sabbaṃ yāvakālikavatthu. Yathā ca ‘‘rattūparato’’ti (dī. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293; 3.14) ettha rattiyā bhojanaṃ rattīti uttarapadalopena vuccati, evamettha bhojanajjhoharaṇaṃ bhojananti. Vikāle bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ, tato vikālabhojanā, vikāle yāvakālikavatthussa ajjhoharaṇāti attho. Atha vā na ettha kammasādhano bhuñjitabbatthavācako bhojanasaddo, atha kho bhāvasādhano ajjhoharaṇatthavācako gahetabbo , tasmā vikāle bhojanaṃ ajjhoharaṇaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ. Kassa pana ajjhoharaṇanti? Yāmakālikādīnaṃ anuññātattā vikālabhojana-saddassa vā yāvakālikajjhoharaṇe niruḷhattā yāvakālikassāti viññāyati, atthato pana kāyadvārappavattā vikāle yāvakālikajjhoharaṇacetanā ‘‘vikālabhojana’’nti veditabbā.
“观看舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐、表演”这句话里,因为不顺从教法,所以那种成为障碍的观看就叫“表演”。因为观看舞蹈等会随着贪欲生起,简单说,它不符合世尊“诸恶莫作”等教法。舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐和表演合在一起,就是“舞蹈歌唱奏乐表演”。在这里,自己做的和让别人做的舞蹈,因为都属于舞蹈这一类,所以在圣典里只用“舞蹈”一个词就涵盖了;同样,用“歌唱”“奏乐”两个词,也涵盖了自己唱、让别人唱、自己奏乐、让别人奏乐。因此应当知道,这里的含义是:远离自己跳舞、让别人跳舞等,乃至以孔雀舞等方式进行的舞蹈等,以及远离那成为障碍的观看。比丘和比丘尼既不可以自己跳舞等,也不可以让别人跳舞等,也不可以观看别人做这些。这里,“观看”也按照“以部分代表其余”的方式包含了“听闻”。因为五识以各自对境的明了为自性,所以听闻也可以归入“观看”来说。正因如此才说:“以五识不能了知任何法,只是单纯的触境而已。”在这里,如果带着想看的欲望前往观看,那就犯戒;但如果在站立、坐着、躺着的地方,有人来了或走进视野而看到,那可能生起染污,但不犯戒。巴利
Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanāti ettha sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Naccādīnañhi dassanaṃ sachandarāgappavattito saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183) bhagavato sāsanaṃ na anulometi. Naccañca gītañca vāditañca visūkadassanañca naccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ parehi payojāpiyamānañcettha naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddehi gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni, tasmā attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā ca veramaṇīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Naccādīni attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭati. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena. Yathā sakaṃ visayaālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasambhavato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Dassanakamyatāya upasaṅkamitvā passato eva cettha vītikkamo hoti, ṭhitanisinnasayanokāse pana āgataṃ gacchantassa vā āpāthagataṃ passato siyā saṃkileso, na vītikkamo.
“花鬘、香、涂香、佩戴、装饰、严饰处”中,“花鬘”指任何一种花。虽然世间“花鬘”一词指串好的花环,但在教法里,按惯用法也用来指花朵,所以任何一种花,不管串好的还是没串好的,都应该看作“花鬘”。“香”指香粉、熏香等,除涂香之外的任何一种香物。“涂香”指为了涂抹而研磨调好的、任何一种能让肤色变好的东西。佩戴就是戴在身上,填补欠缺的地方就是装饰,因为香、因为肤色而享受就是严饰。因此,《长部注》(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10)和《中部注》(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.293)中说:“佩戴者名为戴,填补欠缺处者名为装饰,因香、因肤色而享受者名为严饰。”但在《小诵注》即《胜义光明》(khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2. 最后五学处注释)中只说:“在花鬘等中,佩戴等应依次对应。”“处”是原因的意思,因此,大众以何种恶戒之思进行那些戴花鬘等行为,该思即是“佩戴装饰严饰处”。巴利
Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānāti ettha mālāti yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi mālā-saddo loke baddhamālavācako, sāsane pana ruḷhiyā pupphesupi vutto, tasmā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ baddhamabaddhaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘mālā’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gandhanti vāsacuṇṇadhūmādikaṃ vilepanato aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti vilepanatthaṃ pisitvā paṭiyattaṃ yaṃ kiñci chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Piḷandhanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ, ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanaṃ vibhūsanaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10) majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyañca (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.293) ‘‘piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paramatthajotikāyaṃ pana khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘mālādīsu dhāraṇādīni yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, sā dhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānaṃ.
“高床大床”在这里,“高”(uccā)是和“高”这个词同义的另一个词。“床”(sayana)的意思是躺在上面。高床和大床合在一起,就是“高床大床”。“高床”指的是超过规定尺寸的床等;“大床”指的是铺了不合律的敷具的椅子等。还应知道,这里“座”已经被“床”所涵盖。不过,因为所依之处被禁止时,依于该处的行为也就一并被禁止了,所以说“高床大床”,从意义上应当理解为显示了远离对它们的受用,即坐和卧。或者,“高床大床之卧”这个说法,是用省略一部分的方式来表达的,就像“名色缘六处”那样;由于坐是卧的前行,所以应当知道,仅凭“卧”这个词就已经把“座”也包括进去了。巴利
Uccāsayanamahāsayanāti ettha uccāti ucca-saddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ, uccāsayanañca mahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ mañcādi. Mahāsayanaṃ akappiyattharaṇehi atthataṃ āsandādi. Āsanañcettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārā kiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Atha vā uccāsayanamahāsayanasayanāti etasmiṃ atthe ekasesanayena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti, āsanakiriyāpubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
关于“接受金银”:这里的“金”是指黄金。“银”是指铜钱、铁钱、铅钱、木钱等市面上流通的货币。接受这两种东西,就叫“接受金银”。这里的接受有三种方式:通过身体、通过语言、通过心意。其中,通过身体接受就是自己拿取;通过语言接受就是让别人拿取;通过心意接受就是心里认可。这三种接受方式,或者用总说的方式,或者用省略一部分的说法,统称为“接受”,所以既不应该自己拿,也不应该让别人拿,也不应该认可别人放在那里给的东西。不过,这十条学处对在家众来说也是共通的。《清净道论》里确实这样说过:“近事男、近事女以常戒来说有五条学处,如果有精进则有十条,按伍波萨他支来说则有八条,这就是在家戒。”这里说的“十”,是指沙弥应当守护的戒,就像陶匠等人所持的那样。但在《胜义灯》小部注释里却说:“开头两条、第四条和第五条,是近事男和沙弥共通的常戒;按伍波萨他戒来说,近事男把第七条和第八条合为一支,除了最后一条之外,其余全部都和沙弥共通,而最后一条只是沙弥特有的。”这和“如果有精进则有十条”的说法对不上。“灭摈事”是指相/标志灭摈之事,也就是决意、原因的意思。巴利
Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti, tassa ubhayassapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇaṃ. Tividhañcettha paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasāti. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyanaṃ. Tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena ekasesanayena vā gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā neva uggahetuṃ na uggahāpetuṃ na upanikkhittaṃ vā sādituṃ vaṭṭati. Imāni pana dasa sikkhāpadāni gahaṭṭhānampi sādhāraṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 13) ‘‘upāsakaupāsikānaṃ niccasīlavasena pañca sikkhāpadāni, sati vā ussāhe dasa, uposathaṅgavasena aṭṭhāti idaṃ gahaṭṭhasīla’’nti. Ettha hi dasāti sāmaṇerehi rakkhitabbasīlamāha ghaṭikārādīnaṃ viya. Paramatthajotikāyaṃ pana khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.sādhāraṇavisesavavatthāna) ‘‘ādito dve catutthapañcamāni upāsakānaṃ sāmaṇerānañca sādhāraṇāni niccasīlavasena, uposathasīlavasena pana upāsakānaṃ sattamaṭṭhamaṃ cekaṃ aṅgaṃ katvā sabbapacchimavajjāni sabbānipi sāmaṇerehi sādhāraṇāni, pacchimaṃ pana sāmaṇerānameva visesabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sati vā ussāhe dasā’’ti iminā na sameti. Nāsanavatthūti liṅganāsanāya vatthu, adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
107 “如何”是指用什么方法。“自己的住处”这句话,是就个人所属的住处而说的,这是《结文》中所说的。这里《结文》作者们的意图是:用“以雨安居所得的坐卧处”这句话,说的是他因雨安居而得到的僧团坐卧处;用“自己的住处”这句话,说的也是他个人的坐卧处。不过我们在这里的主张是:用“或他所住的地方”这句话,说的是他固定居住的坐卧处,无论是僧团的还是个人的;用“或他返回的地方”这句话,说的则是他因侍奉等因缘而经常进入的亲教师或阿阇梨的住处,即亲教师和阿阇梨的住处。因此,为了显示这两者,说道“以两者也都说为自己的住处和以雨安居所得的坐卧处”。其中,用“自己的住处”这句话,显示了亲教师和阿阇梨的住处;用“以雨安居所得的坐卧处”这句话,则显示了他的住处。这两者无论是僧团的还是个人的,都应作障碍。 “门口”是指通过门口进食。“作罚治”是指施加罚治。以罚治调伏、驱遣,故为罚治,那本身因应作故为业,即罚治业,障碍等。巴利
107.Kintīti kena nu kho upāyena. ‘‘Attano pariveṇanti idaṃ puggalikaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ayamettha gaṇṭhipadakārānaṃ adhippāyo – ‘‘vassaggena pattasenāsana’’nti iminā tassa vassaggena pattaṃ saṅghikasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘attano pariveṇa’’nti imināpi tasseva puggalikasenāsanaṃ vuttanti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – ‘‘yattha vā vasatī’’ti iminā saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, tassa nibaddhavasanakasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yattha vā paṭikkamatī’’ti iminā pana yaṃ ācariyassa upajjhāyassa vā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhānādinimittaṃ nibaddhaṃ pavisati, taṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayenapi attano pariveṇañca vassaggena pattasenāsanañca vutta’’nti āha. Tattha attano pariveṇanti iminā ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ, vassaggena pattasenāsananti iminā pana tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadubhayampi saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, āvaraṇaṃ kātabbamevāti. Mukhadvārikanti mukhadvārena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti daṇḍakammaṃ yojetvā. Daṇḍenti vinenti etenāti daṇḍo, soyeva kātabbattā kammanti daṇḍakammaṃ, āvaraṇādi.
关于未请示、遮止事等论的注释巴利
Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā
108 “你们对他作罚甘马”,意思是你们要对他施加罚甘马、下令执行。或者,“罚甘马”就是惩治的甘马,所以说“你们对他作惩治”。这个道理适用于一切类似的情形。“坐卧处的执取也止息了”,这句话表明他也成了破雨安居的人。如果他确实是过失深重,将来不能安住在防护中,那就应该把他赶走。在这里,如果被劝告到第三次还不停止,就应该先告知僧团,然后把他灭摈。即使他后来请求再出家,也要先告知僧团,然后再让他出家——诸师是这样说的。“他将得到后安居的雨安居分”,是说因为他后来入了后安居,所以能得到。“应告知后给予利养”,这是针对破雨安居的情况说的。“其余五条学处”,指的是非时食等五条。“应让他忏悔过犯”,就是应该以“尊者,过犯压倒了我”这样的方式让他忏悔。巴利
108.Daṇḍakammamassa karothāti assa daṇḍakammaṃ yojetha āṇāpetha. Daṇḍakammanti vā niggahakammaṃ, tasmā niggahamassa karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu. Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatīti iminā ca chinnavasso ca hotīti dīpeti. Sace ākiṇṇadosova hoti, āyatiṃ saṃvare na tiṭṭhati, nikkaḍḍhitabboti ettha sace yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno na oramati, saṅghaṃ apaloketvā nāsetabbo. Puna pabbajjaṃ yācamānopi apaloketvā pabbājetabboti vadanti. Pacchimikāya vassāvāsikaṃ lacchatīti pacchimikāya puna vassaṃ upagatattā lacchati. Apaloketvā lābho dātabboti chinnavassatāya vuttaṃ. Itarāni pañca sikkhāpadānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañca. Accayaṃ desāpetabboti ‘‘accayo maṃ, bhante, accagamā’’tiādinā nayena desāpetabbo.
黄门事的注释巴利
Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
109 109. 在黄门事项中,有人说“在黑分时是女人,在白分时是男人,这就是分时黄门”。但义注中说“在黑分时是黄门,在白分时他的热恼止息”,因为在非黄门分时只说到热恼止息,所以可以知道在黄门分时热恼增盛就变成黄门状态。因此,这里应该以这个意思为准。所谓“无有”,就是说这个人没有女性状态或男性状态。在他处于黄门分时禁止出家,关于这一点,三部《甘提帕达》中都说“应在非黄门分时让他出家,在黄门分时应驱逐”。但有些人说“如果在非黄门分时出家后能证得烦恼灭尽,就不应驱逐”,这只是他们个人的看法,因为黄门不可能证得烦恼灭尽,而且已灭尽烦恼的人也不可能变成黄门。在关于无因结生的论述中,确实普遍说黄门是无因结生。他们还主张,被灌注者、嫉妒者、分时黄门从结生开始就已经是黄门本性,而不是只在生命流转期间才是。正因如此,在解说无因结生时,黄门没有像生盲、生聋等人那样用“生”字特别区分列出。在这里,第四巴拉基格的注释中也普遍说:“在列举不能证果的人时,黄门、畜生、双性人这三种根器有缺陷的人是无因结生者,他们的天界没有受阻,但道果受阻。”巴利
109. Paṇḍakavatthumhi ‘‘yo kāḷapakkhe itthī hoti, juṇhapakkhe puriso, ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍako’’ti keci vadanti, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāho vūpasammatī’’ti apaṇḍakapakkhe pariḷāhavūpasamasseva vuttattā paṇḍakapakkhe ussannapariḷāhatā paṇḍakabhāvāpattīti viññāyati, tasmā idamevettha sārato paccetabbaṃ. Itthibhāvo pumbhāvo vā natthi etassāti abhāvako. Tasmiṃ yevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritāti ettha ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbājetvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabbo’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbajito sace kilesakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na nāsetabbo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ paṇḍakassa kilesakkhayāsambhavato khīṇakilesassa ca paṇḍakabhāvānupapattito. Ahetukapaṭisandhikathāyañhi avisesena paṇḍakassa ahetukapaṭisandhitā vuttā. Āsittausūyapakkhapaṇḍakānañca paṭisandhito paṭṭhāyeva paṇḍakasabhāvo, na pavattiyaṃyevāti vadanti. Teneva ahetukapaṭisandhiniddese jaccandhabadhirādayo viya paṇḍako jātisaddena visesetvā na niddiṭṭho. Idhāpi catutthapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.233) ‘‘abhabbapuggale dassentena paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakā tayo vatthuvipannā ahetukapaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ saggo avārito, maggo pana vārito’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.
关于贼住者事例的注释巴利
Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
110 110. 在“贼住者”这一事项中,“良家”指生于母系家族和父系家族、从父母开始的一切亲属。他的共住是偷来的,所以叫“贼住者”。这里所指的并不是仅仅偷盗共住本身,而是偷盗形相或两者兼具的人,因此说“三种贼住者”等。他不接受按戒腊次第的礼敬,意思是:他不接受比丘或沙弥按受戒先后应有的礼敬。他接受按戒腊次第的礼敬,意思是:自己说了妄语之后,接受与所显示的戒腊相应的按序礼敬。“比丘戒腊计算等”,以此说明这里所说的“共住”并非仅指同一甘马等。巴利
110. Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthumhi kolaññāti mātuvaṃse pituvaṃse ca jātā mātāpituppabhutisabbañātayo. Theyyāya saṃvāso etassāti theyyasaṃvāsako. So ca na saṃvāsamattasseva thenako idhādhippeto, atha kho liṅgassa tadubhayassa ca thenakopīti āha ‘‘tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā’’tiādi. Na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti yathāvuḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā sāmaṇerānaṃ vā vandanaṃ na sādiyati. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti attanā musāvādaṃ katvā dassitavassānurūpaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikoti iminā na ekakammādikova idha saṃvāso nāmāti dasseti.
在“国王……乃至……怖畏”这一段里,“怖畏”这个词要分别搭配,比如“因国王怖畏、因饥荒怖畏”等等。“他不接受共住,只要他心清净”,意思是:由于是因国王怖畏等而持形相,只要他心清净,他就不接受共住。如果有人不是因国王怖畏等,而只是为了让比丘受骗、想和他们共住而持形相,那么他因为心不清净,仅凭持形相就已经算是贼住者。但这个人因为没有用那种不清净的心去欺骗比丘的意图,只要他不接受共住,就不算贼住者。正因如此,三部《甘提帕达》里说:“因国王怖畏等而持形相的人,即使心里有‘让在家人知道我是沙门’这种欺骗念头,由于没有欺骗比丘的意图,所以不构成过失。”不过有些人说“这里怖畏止息就是心清净”,如果这样理解,那么这个人怖畏止息后,只要不接受共住,就不成为贼住者,这个意思就可以明白。但这样理解时,就可能得出“怖畏未止息的人即使接受共住也不成为贼住者”的结论,而义注中并没有说怖畏未止息的人接受共住也仍然不是贼住者。“一切外道食”这句,则说明即使怖畏未止息,也必须在不接受共住的情况下居住。正因如此,三部《甘提帕达》里说:“因为来到寺院而受用僧物的人,要避免共住是很难的,所以说‘一切外道食’。”因此,这里应当理解为:正是因为因国王怖畏等而持形相,才算是心清净。巴利
Rāja…pe… bhayenāti ettha bhaya-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā’’tiādinā . Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānasoti rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāya so suddhamānaso yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāsetīti attho. Yo hi rājabhayādiṃ vinā kevalaṃ bhikkhū vañcetvā tehi saddhiṃ saṃvasitukāmatāya liṅgaṃ gaṇhāti, so asuddhacittatāya liṅgaggahaṇeneva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana tādisena asuddhacittena bhikkhū vañcetukāmatāya abhāvato yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma na hoti. Teneva ‘‘rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgānaṃ ‘gihī maṃ samaṇoti jānantū’ti vañcanācitte satipi bhikkhūnaṃ vañcetukāmatāya abhāvā doso na jāto’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vūpasantabhayatā idha suddhacittatā’’ti vadanti, evañca sati so vūpasantabhayo yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ayamattho viññāyati. Imasmiñca atthe viññāyamāne avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi theyyasaṃvāsakatā na hotīti āpajjeyya, na ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi atheyyasaṃvāsakatā dassitā. Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti ca iminā avūpasantatayenapi saṃvāsaṃ asādiyanteneva vasitabbanti dīpeti. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti idaṃ vutta’’nti, tasmā rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāyevettha suddhacittatāti gahetabbaṃ.
“一切外道食”是指为一切同住者共同准备、放在街道和十字路口等处应当施与的食物。“应随身携带的”是指应当用身体携带的。“迎面走来”是指朝着前方走去。“以从事劳作”是指以耕田、牧牛等劳作。他拿着那套衣钵前往精舍,就是穿上袈裟,把钵挂在肩头,前往精舍。他自己并不知道——不知道“这样出家的人就叫贼住者”,或者不知道“不能这样做”,或者不知道“这样出家的人不是沙门”。而“这样出家的人就叫贼住者”这句只是举例说明。“在未受具足戒时”这一句,是在说明:如果在受具足戒时才听到,即使不报告,也不成为贼住者。巴利
Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti sabbasāmayikānaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ katvā vīthicatukkādīsu ṭhapetvā dātabbabhattāni. Kāyaparihāriyānīti kāyena pariharitabbāni. Abbhuggacchantīti abhimukhaṃ gacchanti. Kammantānuṭṭhānenāti kasigorakkhādikammakaraṇena. Tadeva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vihāraṃ gacchatīti cīvarāni nivāsanapārupanavasena ādāya pattañca aṃsakūṭe laggetvā vihāraṃ gacchati. Nāpi sayaṃ jānātīti ‘‘yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ kātuṃ na labhatī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ pabbajito samaṇo na hotī’’ti vā na jānāti. Yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotīti idaṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ. Anupasampannakāleyevāti iminā upasampannakāle sutvā sacepi nāroceti, theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti dīpeti.
没有舍弃学处……(中略)……不是贼住者,这句话是说:因为比丘们所给的形相还没有被舍弃,所以不是形相偷盗者;又因为接受了与形相相应的共住,所以也不是共住偷盗者。一位比丘虽然穿着袈裟,却仍然穿着白衣,在这里也应当看到同样的道理。后面“沙弥保持自己的形相”等,对于沙弥所说的那些情况,在不是贼住者这一方面,也是同样的道理。比丘尼也是同样的道理,已经说过的意思用“因为她希望成为在家身份”等来加以说明。“任何年长出家者”是就沙弥而说的。“在大袋等中”以此显示属于在家人的物品。“自己仅是沙弥……(中略)……不是贼住者”,在这里,虽然不是贼住者,但确实犯巴拉基格。其余在此是显而易见的。巴利
Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti idaṃ bhikkhūhi dinnaliṅgassa apariccattattā na liṅgathenako hoti, liṅgānurūpassa saṃvāsassa sāditattā nāpi saṃvāsathenako hotīti vuttaṃ. Eko bhikkhu kāsāye saussāhova odātaṃ nivāsetvāti etthāpi idameva kāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Parato sāmaṇero saliṅge ṭhitotiādinā sāmaṇerassa vuttavidhānesupi atheyyasaṃvāsakapakkhe ayameva nayo. Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayoti vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘sāpi hi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānā’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Yo koci vuḍḍhapabbajitoti sāmaṇeraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Mahāpeḷādīsūti etena gihisantakaṃ dassitaṃ. Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ettha kiñcāpi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, pārājikaṃ pana āpajjatiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva.
外道叛教者故事的注释巴利
Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā
在“投外道者”这一节中,说“一旦接受他们的标志,就成为投外道者”,是因为对于怀着“我要成为外道”而前去的人,仅仅通过接受标志,他们的邪见也就已经被接受了,所以才这样说。然而,有人讲:“只要接受了他们的标志,不管邪见有没有被接受,都成为投外道者。”这种说法不能采纳。因为对于怀着“我要成为外道”而前去的人,除了接受标志之外,并没有另一种所谓的“接受邪见”。正是通过接受标志,他才成为已接受邪见的人。因此才说:“为了考察而穿拘舍草衣等……只要还没有接受,那邪见就还保持着。一旦接受,就成为投外道者。”裸体前往邪命外道的住处,每走一步都犯恶作罪。这是说怀着“我要成为邪命外道”的不净心而前往,因此犯恶作罪。即使裸体前往,也还是不能免于恶作罪。“计算欺诈之年”,意思是计算欺诈之年后,接受共住。巴利
Titthiyapakkantakakathāyaṃ tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte titthiyapakkantako hotīti ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ laddhipi gahitāyeva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte laddhiyā gahitāyapi aggahitāyapi titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgasampaṭicchanato aññaṃ laddhiggahaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva hi so gahitaladdhiko hoti. Teneva ‘‘vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kusacīrādīni…pe… yāva na sampaṭicchati, tāva taṃ laddhi rakkhati. Sampaṭicchitamatte titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Naggova ājīvakānaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭanti ‘‘ājīvako bhavissa’’nti asuddhacittena gamanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Naggena hutvā gamanapaccayāpi dukkaṭā na muccatiyeva. Kūṭavassaṃ gaṇentoti kūṭavassaṃ gaṇetvā saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantoti adhippāyo.
111 畜生道的事,一看就明白。巴利
111. Tiracchānagatavatthu uttānameva.
关于弑母者等事例的注释巴利
Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
112 在杀母者等事例中,“apavāhana”是离去的意思,也就是“patikaraṇa”(抵消、补救)的意思。就像破坏同类众生时,业更重,破坏不同类众生时则不是这样,所以说“人类女性”。因为子女的关系,才有母亲、父亲的称呼;在世间,也可见因为收养或名义等原因而称“子女”的情况,但那只是间接的说法。为了显示直接确定的含义,所以说“亲生母亲”。如同三位菩萨成就三种菩提时,处在人类生命中的善法会生起锐利、明净、勇猛的状态;同样,处在人类生命中,不善法也会生起锐利、明净、勇猛的状态,所以说“自己也是人类”。死后立刻感果,叫“无间”;与该无间果系属相应,或因生起彼果而具有造成无间之性,或以无间为目的,就叫“无间业”。以这个无间业杀母,就是杀母业。杀父者也是这样:如果所杀的父亲是人类,是亲生父亲,自己也是人类,故意夺去他的生命,这个人就以无间业中的杀父业而成为杀父者。如此,一切都应了知,所以说“杀父者中,这个道理也是一样”。巴利
112. Mātughātakādivatthūsu apavāhananti apagamanaṃ, patikaraṇanti attho. Yathā samānajātikassa vikopane kammaṃ garutaraṃ, na tathā vijātikassāti āha ‘‘manussitthibhūtā’’ti . Puttasambandhena mātupitusamaññā , dattakittimādivasenapi puttavohāro loke dissati, so ca kho pariyāyatoti nippariyāyasiddhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘janikā mātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva kusaladhammānaṃ tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpatti yathā taṃ tiṇṇampi bodhisattānaṃ bodhittayanibbattiyaṃ, evaṃ manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva akusaladhammānampi tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpattīti āha ‘‘sayampi manussajātikenevā’’ti. Cutianantaraṃ phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttaṃ, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlaṃ, anantarapayojanaṃ vā ānantariyaṃ, tena ānantariyena mātughātakakammena. Pitughātakepi yena manussabhūto janako pitā sayampi manussajātikeneva satā sañcicca jīvitā voropito, ayaṃ ānantariyena pitughātakakammena pitughātakotiādinā sabbaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘pitughātakepi eseva nayo’’ti.
即使性别特征已经转变,杀害母亲或父亲的人,仍然造下无间业。因为就算性别特征变了,由同一个业所引生的有分相续和命根相续还是同一个,不会变成别的。但是,如果自己是人却杀害了投生为畜生的母亲或父亲,或者自己投生为畜生却杀害了投生为人的母亲或父亲,或者自己投生为畜生又杀害了投生为畜生的母亲或父亲,这种业就不成为无间业,但仍然是很重的业,接近无间业。这里应当用羊四句、战场四句、贼四句来说明。比如,一个人心里想的是“我要杀羊”,但实际上杀的是投生为羊的母亲或父亲,由于他的杀意损害的是无间业的对象,所以仍然触犯无间业。反过来,如果他的意图是杀羊,并没有杀父母的意图,结果杀的是羊,那就不触犯无间业,因为不存在无间业的对象。如果意图是杀父母,结果杀的也是父母,那就一定触犯。这个道理也适用于另外两组四句。对父母是这样,对阿拉汉也应当同样用这四句来理解。在所有这些情况中,先前的意图心并不是判断标准,真正决定是不是无间业的,是杀心所缘的对象以及命根。已经造了无间业的人,即使他想“我要挡住这个业的果报”,用像大塔那么大的金塔填满整个轮围世界来供养,或者向充满整个轮围世界的比丘僧团做大布施,或者一直跟在佛陀世尊身边、抓着佛陀桑喀帝的衣角行走,身坏命终之后,还是必定投生到地狱,也得不到出家。巴利
Parivattitaliṅgampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā jīvitā voropentassa ānantariyakammaṃ hotiyeva. Satipi hi liṅgaparivatte so eva ekakammanibbatto bhavaṅgappabandho jīvitindriyappabandho ca, nāññoti. Yo pana sayaṃ manusso tiracchānabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā, sayaṃ vā tiracchānabhūto manussabhūtaṃ, tiracchānabhūtoyeva vā tiracchānabhūtaṃ jīvitā voropeti, tassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ na hoti, bhāriyaṃ pana hoti, ānantariyaṃ āhacceva tiṭṭhati. Eḷakacatukkaṃ saṅgāmacatukkaṃ coracatukkañcettha kathetabbaṃ. ‘‘Eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti abhisandhināpi hi eḷakaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ manusso manussabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā mārento ānantariyaṃ phusati maraṇādhippāyeneva ānantariyavatthuno vikopitattā. Eḷakābhisandhinā pana mātāpitiaasandhinā vā eḷakaṃ mārento ānantariyaṃ na phusati ānantariyavatthuabhāvato. Mātāpitiabhisandhinā mātāpitaro mārento phusateva. Esa nayo itarasmimpi catukkadvaye. Yathā ca mātāpitūsu, evaṃ arahantepi etāni catukkāni veditabbāni. Sabbattha hi purimaṃ abhisandhicittaṃ appamāṇaṃ, vadhakacittaṃ pana tadārammaṇaṃ jīvitindriyañca ānantariyānānantarabhāve pamāṇaṃ. Katānantariyakammo ca ‘‘tassa kammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhissāmī’’ti sakalacakkavāḷaṃ mahācetiyappamāṇehi kañcanathūpehi pūretvāpi sakalacakkavāḷaṃ pūretvā nisinnassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvāpi buddhassa bhagavato saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ amuñcanto vicaritvāpi kāyassa bhedā nirayameva upapajjati, pabbajjañca na labhati.
115 “想要”是指想要穿白衣。因此说“只在接受了在家身份这一点上”。关于破僧的详细讨论,后面会清楚说明。“四种业”是指求听甘马等四种业。“以恶心”是在阐明前面已说过的意思,说“以杀心”。因为被杀心所染污的心,在这里就叫“恶心”。“令出血”:在这里,由于如来的身体不可破坏,通过他人加害而割破皮肤、令血流出,这种情况并不存在;然而身体内部只有一处血液汇聚,因打击而激荡时,便会积存在那里。提婆达多投掷的岩石碎片破裂后,击中了如来的脚背,脚背就像被斧头砍中一样,只是内部出血。而吉瓦咖则是随顺如来的意愿,用刀割开皮肤,从那个部位取出坏血,使其舒适,因此对他来说,这只是善业。所以说“如吉瓦咖等”。巴利
115.Icchamānanti odātavatthavasanaṃ icchamānaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyevā’’ti. Saṅghabhedakakathāvitthāro parato āvi bhavissati. Catunnaṃ kammānanti apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ. Duṭṭhacittenāti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘vadhakacittenā’’ti. Vadhakacetanāya hi dūsitacittaṃ idha duṭṭhacittaṃ nāma. Lohitaṃ uppādetīti ettha tathāgatassa abhejjakāyatāya parūpakkamena cammacchedaṃ katvā lohitapaggharaṇaṃ nāma natthi, sarīrassa pana antoyeva ekasmiṃ ṭhāne lohitaṃ samosarati, āghātena pakuppamānaṃ sañcitaṃ hoti. Devadattena paviddhasilato bhijjitvā gatasakkhalikāpi tathāgatassa pādantaṃ pahari, pharasunā pahaṭo viya pādo antolohitoyeva ahosi. Jīvako pana tathāgatassa ruciyā satthakena cammaṃ chinditvā tamhā ṭhānā duṭṭhalohitaṃ nīharitvā phāsumakāsi, tenassa puññakammameva ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘jīvako viyā’’tiādi.
那么,如来般涅槃之后,如果有人破坏塔、砍断菩提树、对舍利动手破坏,他们会怎样?这是重业,和无间业差不多。不过,如果是有舍利的塔或者佛像受到妨碍,那就可以砍掉挡路的菩提树枝。就算有鸟停在塔上、在塔上拉屎,也可以砍。因为比起受用塔,身舍利塔更重要。如果有人破坏塔地后走过去,就算在菩提树下,也可以砍了带走。但如果菩提树枝妨碍了菩提屋,就不能为了保屋而砍它。因为屋是为了菩提树而建的,不是菩提树为了屋而存在。在殿堂里也是同样的道理。不过,如果殿堂里安放了舍利,为了守护舍利,就可以砍菩提树枝。为了照料菩提树,砍掉吸收养分的枝条或者腐烂的部分,那当然可以,这就像照料佛陀的色身一样,也能得到功德。巴利
Atha ye parinibbute tathāgate cetiyaṃ bhindanti, bodhiṃ chindanti, dhātumhi upakkamanti, tesaṃ kiṃ hotīti? Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ hoti ānantariyasadisaṃ. Sadhātukaṃ pana thūpaṃ vā paṭimaṃ vā bādhamānaṃ bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi tattha nilīnā sakuṇā cetiye vaccaṃ pātenti, chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Paribhogacetiyato hi sarīracetiyaṃ garutaraṃ. Cetiyavatthuṃ bhinditvā gacchante bodhimūlepi chinditvā harituṃ vaṭṭati. Yā pana bodhisākhā bodhigharaṃ bādhati, taṃ geharakkhaṇatthaṃ chindituṃ na labhati. Bodhiatthañhi gehaṃ, na gehatthāya bodhi. Āsanagharepi eseva nayo. Yasmiṃ pana āsanaghare dhātu nihitā hoti, tassa rakkhaṇatthāya bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Bodhijagganatthaṃ ojoharaṇasākhaṃ vā pūtiṭṭhānaṃ vā chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva, satthu rūpakāyapaṭijaggane viya puññampi hoti.
双性人案例讨论的注释巴利
Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
116 “具有两性特征”是指“有男女两种特征”,这个说法表明:这是一个语法上前后词并非同指关系的有财释复合词,前一个词省略了格尾。这里所说的“特征”,指的是女相和男相。那么,两性特征者到底只有一根,还是有两根呢?只有一根。因为《根双论》中说:“当女根生起时,男根会生起吗?不会。当男根生起时,女根会生起吗?不会。”因此,同一个相续中不可能同时存在两根。而且,女性两性特征者具有女根,男性两性特征者具有男根。如果是这样,那第二特征就不存在了。因为根被称为特征的成因,而他并没有那个成因,不是吗?回答:他的根并不是第二特征的成因。为什么?因为它并非始终存在。当女性两性特征者对女人生起贪心时,男相就显现出来,女相则隐藏不现;另一类情况则相反。如果他们的根是第二特征的成因,那么两种特征就应该始终存在,但实际上并不始终存在。因此应当知道:他的根并不是那个特征的成因,在这里,唯有贪心才是成因,以业为助伴。巴利
116.Ubhatobyañjanamassa atthīti ubhatobyañjanakoti iminā asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoyaṃ, purimapade ca vibhattialopoti dasseti. Byañjananti cettha itthinimittaṃ purisanimittañca adhippetaṃ. Atha ubhatobyañjanakassa ekameva indriyaṃ, udāhu dveti? Ekameva ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) ekasmiṃ santāne indriyadvayassa paṭisiddhattā, tañca kho itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthindriyaṃ, purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisindriyaṃ. Yadi evaṃ dutiyabyañjanakassa abhāvo āpajjati. Indriyañhi byañjanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tañca tassa natthīti? Vuccate – na tassa indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Sadā abhāvato. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa hi yadā itthiyā rāgacittaṃ uppajjati, tadā purisabyañjanaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthibyañjanaṃ paṭicchannaṃ guḷhaṃ hoti, tathā itarassa itaraṃ. Yadi ca tesaṃ indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, sadāpi byañjanadvayaṃ tiṭṭheyya, na pana tiṭṭhati, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘na tassa taṃ byañjanakāraṇaṃ, kammasahāyaṃ pana rāgacittamevettha kāraṇa’’nti.
因为他只有一根,所以女性两性特征者自己也能受孕,也能使他人受孕。男性两性特征者能使他人受孕,但自己不能受孕。至于“结生时有男性相,结生时有女性相”这类关于结生时存在性相的说法,虽然《库伦德注》中有记载,但这并不合理。因为女性相等性相只在转起时生起,而不是在结生时。在结生时,只有根生起,而不是性相等。而且不能只说根就是性相,因为根和性相的自性不同。正如《殊胜义论》中所说:巴利
Yasmā cassa ekameva indriyaṃ hoti, tasmā itthiubhatobyañjanako sayampi gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parampi gaṇhāpeti. Purisaubhatobyañjanako paraṃ gaṇhāpeti, sayaṃ pana na gaṇhāti. Yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ, yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiliṅganti ca paṭisandhiyaṃ liṅgasabbhāvo kurundiyaṃvutto, so ca ayutto. Pavattiyaṃyeva hi itthiliṅgādīni samuṭṭhahanti, na paṭisandhiyaṃ. Paṭisandhiyaṃ pana indriyameva samuṭṭhāti, na liṅgādīni. Na ca indriyameva liṅganti sakkā vattuṃ indriyaliṅgānaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 632) –
女性性(女性身份)和女性状态,这两者含义相同,指的是女性自身的本质。这是业所生的,在结生时就形成了。而女性相(女性特征)等则是依靠女根,在生命流转的过程中才生起的。就像有种子存在时,依靠种子、以种子为条件,树木生长起来,长出枝叶,布满天空而站立;同样地,当被称为女性状态的女根存在时,女性相等特征就出现了。女根好比种子,依靠种子生长、布满天空而站立的树木,就好比依靠女根,女性相等特征在生命流转中生起。其中,女根不是眼所能识知的,只有意才能识知。女性相等特征则既是眼所能识知的,也是意所能识知的。巴利
‘‘Itthattaṃ itthibhāvoti ubhayaṃ ekatthaṃ, itthisabhāvoti attho. Ayaṃ kammajo paṭisandhisamuṭṭhito. Itthiliṅgādi pana itthindriyaṃ paṭicca pavatte samuṭṭhitaṃ. Yathā bīje sati bījaṃ paṭicca bījapaccayā rukkho vaḍḍhitvā sākhāviṭapasampanno hutvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva itthibhāvasaṅkhāte itthindriye sati itthiliṅgādīni honti. Bījaṃ viya hi itthindriyaṃ, bījaṃ paṭicca vaḍḍhitvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā ṭhitarukkho viya itthindriyaṃ paṭicca itthiliṅgādīni pavatte samuṭṭhahanti. Tattha itthindriyaṃ na cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, manoviññeyyameva. Itthiliṅgādīni cakkhuviññeyyānipi manoviññeyyānipī’’ti.
所以他说,其中审察的次第,应当从《法集论注》中详细了知。巴利
Tenevāha ‘‘tattha vicāraṇakkamo vitthārato aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya veditabbo’’ti.
无依止师等事例论的注释巴利
Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
117 “学处还没有制定”这句话,是针对这里所说的已制定学处而说的。“没有请依止师”,是指没有用“尊者,请您做我的依止师”这样的话来请依止师。不过,在甘马语中称说依止师的名字,这本身已经做到了,应当这样理解。否则,就会像“不提及人”所说的那样,产生甘马过失,甘马就会失效。正因如此,才说“没有请依止师”,而不说“没有称说依止师”。又比如,衣钵不具足的人受达上时,在甘马语中称说“衣钵具足”这个并不存在的情况,即使这样做了甘马语,达上仍然成立;同样地,称说“这位佛护是尊者丹玛·拉奇达的求达上者”这个并不存在的人,仅仅以称说存在之词的方式做了甘马语,达上也仍然成立。应当这样理解。因此说:“然而甘马不失效。”
“诸比丘,不应让没有依止师的人受达上,谁让受,犯恶作。”只说了这么多,并没有说“那个人没有受达上”,而且甘马过失的特征也不存在,所以说“不应取此”。正如律中说:“诸比丘,若作五众甘马,以黄门为第五人而作甘马,则非甘马,也不应作。”从这类说法可知,黄门等乃至两性特征者,只有在凑人数时甘马才会失效,其他情况下不会。因此说:“乃至以两性特征者为依止师等,也是同样的道理。”巴利
117.Sikkhāpadaṃapaññattaṃ hotīti idheva paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvāti ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti evaṃ upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā. Kammavācāya pana upajjhāyakittanaṃ kataṃyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttakammavipattisambhavato kammaṃ kuppeyya, teneva ‘‘upajjhāyaṃ akittetvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yathā ca aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampādanakāle kammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantavatthuṃ kittetvā kammavācāya katāyapi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti asantaṃ puggalaṃ kittetvā kevalaṃ santapadanīhārena kammavācāya katāya upasampadā ruhatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘kammaṃ pana na kuppatī’’ti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, anupajjhāyako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti ettakameva vatvā ‘‘so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’ti avuttattā kammavipattilakkhaṇassa ca asambhavato ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcavaggakaraṇañce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ paṇḍakapañcamo kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 390) paṇḍakādīnampi ubhatobyañjanakapariyantānaṃ gaṇapūrakabhāveyeva kammaṃ kuppati, na aññathāti āha ‘‘ubhatobyañjanakupajjhāyapariyosānesupi eseva nayo’’ti.
关于无钵者等事的讨论注释巴利
Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
118 如果有其他比丘想要布施,这就是与此相关的意思。所谓“未触碰过的钵食”,是指还没有从上面取用过的钵食。关于“与沙弥份额相等的食物份额”:在这里,虽然给沙弥的食物份额是均等的,并没有单独另有一份叫“沙弥份额”的东西,但是往下分发食物时,有时候可能会不够,所以这里的用意是:不要从上面先取,而应该按照沙弥那一排的次序取好之后再给。而且这份份额只给已经确定要出家的人。正因为这样,才说了“未熟的钵”等话。巴利
118. Aññe vā bhikkhū dātukāmā hontīti sambandho. Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātanti aggahitaaggaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ. Sāmaṇerabhāgasamako āmisabhāgoti ettha kiñcāpi sāmaṇerānaṃ āmisabhāgassa samakameva diyyamānattā visuṃ sāmaṇerabhāgo nāma natthi, heṭṭhā gacchantaṃ pana bhattaṃ kadāci mandaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā upari aggahetvā sāmaṇerapāḷiyāva gahetvā dātabboti adhippāyo. Niyatapabbajjasseva cāyaṃ bhāgo dīyati. Teneva ‘‘apakkaṃ patta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
关于断手等事例的注释巴利
Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
119 “山羊足迹”是指像山羊足迹形状的地方。“梵天神端直之身”是指像梵天神那样身体端直。“其余有情”是指不具备这个特征的有情。以此说明:除了大丈夫和转轮王之外,其他有情都是驼背、歪斜之类的。因为大多数有情在肩、腰、膝这三处会弯曲。其中,在腰部弯曲的,是向后弯;在另外两处弯曲的,是向前弯。身体长的人则向一侧歪斜;有些人仰着头走路,好像在数星星;有些人肉少血少,像木桩一样;有些人身体向前倾;有些人走路时不停颤抖。“四周圆润”是指从各方面看都圆圆的。巴利
119.Ajapadaketi ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese. Brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto. Avaseso sattoti iminā lakkhaṇena rahitasatto. Etena ṭhapetvā mahāpurisaṃ cakkavattiñca itare sattā khujjapakkhikāti dasseti. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇūsūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Te kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti, itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu namantā purato namanti. Dīghasarīrā pana ekena passena vaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnāmetvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, eke purato pabbhārā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti. Parivaṭumoti samantato vaṭṭalo.
骨、筋、皮之身,就是只有骨、筋、皮构成的身体。裂头,就是头裂成两半。斜视,就是侧着眼看。难词解释里说,所谓水星,就是水泡。眼星,就是眼球。无睫毛眼,就是缺少眼睑睫毛的眼睛。因为睫毛这个词,在世间习惯上就是指眼睑上的毛。蚱蜢蛙,就是大嘴蛙。羊面,就是嘴里一直流口水滴答的脸。所有这一切,是针对患疥疮者等来说的。睾丸肿者,就是睾丸得了增生之病的人。外跛者,就是双脚走路时向外斜、走路时膝盖向外撇的人。内跛者,就是双脚向后翻转、走路时膝盖向内收的人。巴利
Aṭṭhisirācammasarīroti aṭṭhisirācammamattasarīro. Kappasīsoti dvidhābhūtasīso. Kekaroti tiriyaṃ passanto. ‘‘Udakatārakā nāma udakapubbuḷa’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Akkhitārakāti akkhibhaṇḍakā. Nippakhumakkhīti akkhidalalomehi virahitaakkhiko. Pakhuma-saddo hi loke akkhidalalomesu niruḷho. Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūko nāma mahāmukhamaṇḍūko. Eḷamukhoti niccapaggharaṇakalālamukho. Sabbañcetanti ‘‘kacchugatto vā’’tiādiṃ sandhāya vadati. Vātaṇḍikoti aṇḍakesu vuddhirogena samannāgato. Vikaṭoti tiriyaṃ gamanapādehi samannāgato, yassa ca caṅkamato jāṇukā bahi gacchanti. Paṇhoti pacchato parivattapādehi samannāgato, yassa caṅkamato jāṇukā anto pavisanti.
用“脚掌中间蜷缩”来说明曲足的原因。用“脚尖蜷缩”指出曲足的成因。用“以脚背前端行走”来说明曲足者走路的样子。“口吃”是指说话结巴。凡是把同一个音节重复四五次的人,就用这个词来称呼他。巴利
Kudaṇḍapādatāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘majjhe saṅkuṭitapādattā’’ti. Agge saṅkuṭitapādattāti kuṇḍapādatāya kāraṇanidassanaṃ. Kuṇḍapādasseva gamanasabhāvaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘piṭṭhipādaggena caṅkamanto’’ti. Mammananti khalitavacanaṃ. Yo ekameva akkharaṃ catupañcakkhattuṃ vadati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
关于依止无惭者的因缘故事的注释巴利
Alajjīnissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
120 在涉及依止的诸事中,与比丘们具有同等的戒等功德分,这就叫“比丘同分”;那种状态就是“比丘同分性”。如果有人住了两三天就想走,可以不受依止而住——这里的意思是:即使没有作意“我要知道比丘同分性”,不受依止而住也是可以的。但是,如果明明知道比丘同分性,却想“我明天就走,要依止干什么”,那就不能等到天亮。如果作意“我要在天亮之前起来就走”然后躺下,即使天亮了,也没问题。然而,如果心里打算“我要住七天”,那就必须受依止。也就是说,如果想着“我大概就住七天,何必去知道什么比丘同分性”,放下这个审查的责任而住,那是不可以的;应当先审查比丘同分性,然后受依止——这就是这里的义理。巴利
120. Nissayapaṭisaṃyuttavatthūsu bhikkhūhi samāno sīlādiguṇabhāgo assāti bhikkhusabhāgo, tassa bhāvo bhikkhusabhāgatā. Dve tīṇi divasāni vasitvā gantukāmena anissitenavasitabbanti ettha ‘‘yāva bhikkhusabhāgataṃ jānāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ vināpi anissitena vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Bhikkhusabhāgataṃ pana jānanto ‘‘sve gamissāmi, kiṃ me nissayenā’’ti aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetuṃ na labhati. ‘‘Purāruṇā uṭṭhahitvāva gamissāmī’’ti ābhogena sayantassa sace aruṇo uggacchati, vaṭṭati. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti ālayaṃ karontena pana nissayo gahetabboti ‘‘sattāhamattaṃ vasissāmi, kiṃ bhikkhusabhāgatājānanenā’’ti jānane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā vasituṃ na labhati, bhikkhusabhāgataṃ upaparikkhitvā nissayo gahetabboti attho.
行路者等依止事论注释巴利
Gamikādinissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
121 在路上休息时……(中略)……不犯戒。这是说,在没有能给予依止的人时,不犯戒。所谓“依止他”,是依照巴利原文而说的,意思是“依靠他”。不过,如果在阿沙利月……(中略)……应当去那里,这里的意思是:如果临近雨安居时,他想离开,听说“某位大长老要来”,如果他等候那位长老,是可以的。如果在等候时正好到了雨安居开始的那一天,那也没关系,应当去他能得到依止师的地方。不过有些人说:“如果他在前往途中看到有生命危险或梵行危险,就应该住在那里。”巴利
121.Antarāmagge vissamanto vā…pe… anāpattīti asati nissayadāyake anāpatti. Tassa nissāyāti pāḷianurūpato vuttaṃ, taṃ nissāyāti attho. Sace pana āsāḷhīmāse…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace so vassūpanāyikāya āsannāya gantukāmo suṇāti ‘‘asuko mahāthero āgamissatī’’ti, tañce āgameti, vaṭṭati. Āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhati. Keci pana ‘‘sace so gacchanto jīvitantarāyaṃ brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā passati, tattheva vasitabba’’nti vadanti.
关于Gottena唱令许可之处的注释巴利
Gottena anussāvanānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
122 122. 因为“某某比丘是某某尊者的”这句话是用来唱报名字的,所以才有“我不敢取长老的名字”这一说法,意思是“我不敢取尊者毕波利沙的名字,即求受达上者(upasampadāpekkho)”。由于有“也可以用姓氏唱报”这句话,可知用什么样的称呼来说,就可以那样成立。被人问“你的戒师叫什么名字”时,也可以把姓氏当作名字来说,这也是成立的。因此,在四种名字当中,可以用任何一种名字来唱报。一个人有很多名字,但在作白时用一个名字、在唱报时用另一个名字,是不可以的;唱报在意义和文句上都应当一致。虽然巴利圣典里“某某比丘是某某尊者的”把“尊者”这个词放在后面,但甘马语圣典里写成“这位佛护比丘,是丹玛·拉奇达尊者的”,不应认为这是次序颠倒。因为巴利圣典里的“某某比丘是某某尊者的”只是在显示意义,所以甘马语圣典中“这位佛护比丘,是丹玛·拉奇达尊者的”这种用法,即使巴利圣典里没有说,也是成立的。还有“我从前没见过这位尊者舍利弗”以及“尊者舍利弗善于理解义理”这样的例子,都是把“尊者”放在前面用的。有些地方说“佛护长老尊者的”,有些地方只说“佛护的”,这不算省略称呼,因为名字并没有被省略。有些地方说“佛护尊者的”,有些地方说“佛护尊者”。如果有些地方说“佛护尊者的”,有些地方说“佛护尊者”,由于随顺文本,有些人说这正落入其范围。有些人说,由于文句差异的牵连,那些唱报是不可以的。但如果一切处都以此方式说,则可以。巴利
122. ‘‘Itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti nāmakittanassa anussāvanāya āgatattā ‘‘nāhaṃ ussahāmi therassa nāmaṃ gahetu’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘āyasmato pippalissa upasampadāpekkho’’ti evaṃ nāmaṃ gahetuṃ na ussahāmīti attho. ‘‘Gottenapi anussāvetu’’nti vacanato yena vohārena voharati, tena vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Konāmo te upajjhāyo’’ti puṭṭhenapi gottameva nāmaṃ katvā vattabbanti siddhaṃ hoti, tasmā catubbidhesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena anussāvanā kātabbāti vadanti. Ekassa bahūni nāmāni honti, tattha ekaṃ nāmaṃ ñattiyā, ekaṃ anussāvanāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atthato byañjanato ca abhinnāhi anussāvanāhi bhavitabbanti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āyasmato’’ti padaṃ pacchā vuttaṃ, kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti paṭhamaṃ likhitanti taṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttanti na paccetabbaṃ. Pāḷiyañhi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti atthamattaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ payogo dassito. ‘‘Na me diṭṭho ito pubbe iccāyasmā sāriputto’’ti ca ‘‘āyasmā sāriputto atthakusalo’’ti ca paṭhamaṃ ‘‘āyasmā’’ti payogassa dassanatoti vadanti. Katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassā’’ti vatvā katthaci kevalaṃ ‘‘buddharakkhitassā’’ti sāveti, sāvanaṃ hāpetīti na vuccati nāmassa ahāpitattāti eke. Sace katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vatvā katthaci ‘‘buddharaakhatassāyasmato’’ti sāveti, pāṭhānurūpattā khettameva otiṇṇantipi eke. Byañjanabhedappasaṅgato anussāvanānaṃ taṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Sace pana sabbaṭṭhānepi eteneva pakārena vadati, vaṭṭati.
两位求受达上者等事项的论注释巴利
Dveupasampadāpekkhādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
123 在“一白”这一说法里,是指它们有共同的告白,所以“一白”应当理解为所依境不同的有财释复合词。因此说“二人一起作一白”。其中“一起”是同一刹那的意思,这种表述是省略了格位词尾。按照前面的方式作一起白,就是像前面所说的“由一人为一人,由另一人为另一人”等那样,由两位或三位戒师,或由一位戒师共同作白。巴利
123.Ekānussāvaneti ettha ekato anussāvanaṃ etesanti ekānussāvanāti asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘dve ekatoanussāvane’’ti. Tattha ekatoti ekakkhaṇeti attho, vibhattialopena cāyaṃ niddeso. Purimanayeneva ekatoanussāvane kātunti ‘‘ekena ekassa, aññena itarassā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi ekena vā ekatoanussāvane kātuṃ.
达上仪轨的注释巴利
Upasampadāvidhikathāvaṇṇanā
126 他仔细审察什么是该谴责的、什么是不该谴责的,所以叫“审察”。这里是用“审察”这个词,来说明“审察”这个词和“亲教师”这个词意思相同。巴利
126.Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāti iminā upajjhāyasaddasamānattho upajjhāsaddopīti dasseti.
四依止等论的注释巴利
Cattāronissayādikathāvaṇṇanā
130 “共受用”是指法的共受用和物质的共受用。在“共受用、共住无犯”这句话里,意思是这样的:因为这个人已经做了接纳甘马,处在清净比丘的身份上,所以跟被举罪的人一起受用等,不犯巴吉帝亚;跟无羞耻的人一起受用,也不犯恶作,因为他不符合无羞耻者的特征。如果有人对甘蔗渣等七日药乃至尽形寿药,生起“非时嚼甘蔗是可以的”这种想,然后就这样嚼了吃,因为他的想是“可以”,所以不认为这构成巴吉帝亚;或者有人承认自己犯了罪,却坚持说“我不忏悔”——巴利
130.Sambhogeti dhammasambhoge āmisasambhoge ca. Anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti ettha ca ayamadhippāyo – yasmā ayaṃ osāraṇakammassa katattā pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhito, tasmā na ukkhittakena saddhiṃ sambhogādipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, nāpi alajjinā saddhiṃ paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ alajjīlakkhaṇānupapattito. Yo hi ucchurasakasaṭānaṃ sattāhakālikayāvajīvikattā vaṭṭati vikāle ucchu khāditunti saññaṃ uppādetvā taṃ khāditvā tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ na passati ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti tathāsaññitāya, yo vā pana āpattimāpannabhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘na paṭikaromī’’ti abhinivisati, ayaṃ –
“ 故意犯戒,覆藏其罪;
随贪嗔痴怖而行非道,是名无惭之人。”巴利
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati; Agatigamanañca gacchati, ediso vuccati alajjīpuggalo’’ti. (pari. 359) –
对于具备上述特征的人,由于不落入(无惭者的)定义,所以不名为无惭者。因此,如同先前所说:只要尚未对他做举罪甘马,与他共受用、共住便不犯戒;此处也是如此。应当知道,这只是就一切不犯戒的情形,说为“无犯”而已。因为世尊不会在确实有犯戒产生的情况下,还说“共受用、共住无犯”。然而有人在这里却依这条巴吉帝亚说“共受用、共住无犯”,接着又说“但因为受用无惭者的东西,实际上还是犯恶作”,如此多方发挥。这些说法不应当作核心要义来接受。此中其余的部分是显而易见的。巴利
Vuttalakkhaṇe apatanato alajjī nāma na hoti. Tasmā yathā pubbe yāva ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kataṃ, tāva tena saddhiṃ sambhoge saṃvāse ca anāpatti, evamidhāpīti sabbathā anāpattiṭṭhāneyeva anāpatti vuttāti veditabbaṃ . Na hi bhagavā alajjinā saddhiṃ sambhogapaccayā āpattisambhave sati ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti vadati. Tato yamettha kenaci ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti iminā pācittiyena anāpatti vuttā, ‘‘alajjīparibhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjatiyevā’’ti vatvā bahudhā papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.